PJ 5213 
R6 
1858 
Copy 1 



■H 



m 






m , 



!'»*'* 



I I 






■ 

mam 



k^i 




mmm 








2 



■ 



*V\* 



JMPffiff^ 



?r??5V ??£?????? ??; ????$»? t????r? r.?r? 






i LIBRARY OF CONGRESS.- 8 



:.- 



| UNITED STATES OF AMERICA. H 



(,v- 



MANUAL 



OF TIIK 



CHALDEE LANGUAGE; 



CONTAINING! A 



CHALDEE GRAMMAR, 

CHIEFLY FROM THE GKRMAN OF PBOFESSOB O. B. WINER ; 



CHRESTOMATHY, 

CONSISTING OF SELECTIONS FROM* THE TARGUMS, AND INCLUDING NOTES ON THE 
DIBLICAL CHALDEE ', AND 



VOCABULARY, 



ADAPTED TO TIIK CHRKSTOMATHY. 



AN APPENDIX 

ON THE RABBINIC AND SAMARITAN DIALECT 



BY ELIAS EIGGS, D. D. 



SECOND EDITION, BEYISED. 



■A,,^ 



NEW YOKK : 
ANSON D. F. RANDOLPH, 683 BROADWAY. 

LONDON : SAMPSON LOW & SON. 

1858. 




*■* 



1 



"b 



"?* 



■Q 



Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year.1858, by 

ELIAS EIGGS, 

In the Clerk's Office of the District Conrt of the United States for the Southern District of 

New York. 



JOHN F. TEOW, 

PRINTER, 8TEREOTYPER, AND ELECTEOTYPER, 

377 & 379 Broadway, New York. 



V 



CONTENTS. 



. 






5 


lMIMHI . II. <\. <II.\.LDEE LANGUAfiK AM) LlTI! 


. 


. 9 


GRAMMAR, 






•*'•!. 




PAOB 


PART I.— Orthography and Ohxhoxpy. 




Verbs defective, and mixed forma 


48 


Consonants ..... 


17 


Irregular, with suffix pronouns 49 


Vowels • 


17 


NOUNS; derivation . 


50 


Daghesh 


19 


gender and number 


. 51 


Mapplq ..... 


20 


states; emphatic 


52 


Ace. 'tit-. ..... 


20 


Declension . 


. 54 


Tone-syllable . ' 


20 


Dec. I. . 


54 


or reading unpointed text . 


21 


Deo, II. III. . 


. 55 






Deo, iv. v. . 


56 


PABT tL— Etymology. 




Deo. VI. VII. 


. 57 


Derivation and Inflection of words gen- 




Deo.Vm.IZ, . 


53 


erally ..... 


22 


Irregular nouns 


. 59 


Mutations of consonants 


23 


ADJECTIVES . 


59 


Vowel changes .... 


2.-) 


Numerals 


. 59 


PRONOUNS : personal and posse 


27 


PARTICLES; adverbs 


60 


Suffix pronouns .... 


28 


Prepositions . 


. 61 


Demonstrative pronouns 


29 


Conjunctions 


61 


Belatlve and interrogative 


29 


Interjections . 


. 62 




80 






Conjugations .... 


80 


PART III.-Stntax. 




Moods and tenses .... 


82 


PRONOUNS; personal 


68 


Inflection of the Regular Verb 


83 


relative 


. 64 


Notes «hi the Par. of the Regular Verb . 


84 


interrogative 


64 


Persona] Inflection of the participles . 


36 


reflexive, bow desig 


. 64 


Cnfreauent Conjugations . 


87 


indefinite 


64 


Quadrilitera] Verbs 


87 


demonstrative 


. 64 


Verbs with Gutturals 


37 


VERBS; dse of tbe tenses . 


64 


Regular Verbs with Suffix-pronouns . 


39 


Peculiar mode of designating carta 


D tenses 65 


IRREGULAR VERBS . 


40 


Use of the Imperative . 


66 


Verbs Pe Nun .... 


41 


Infinitive 


. 66 


Ayin doubled 


41 


Participles 


66 


Pe Yodh .... 


4-2 


Optative mood 


. 67 


Te Aleph . 


44 


ment of the verb with its su 


bject 67 


Ayin Vav and Ayin Yodh 


44 


Impersonal verbs ; how designate* 


1 . 67 


Lamedh Aleph 


45 


Regimen of verbs 


68 


doubly anomalous 


47 


Verbs used for adverbs 


. 63 



contents. 



Constructio praegnans . 

Ellipsis 

NOUN'S ; designation of cases 

Use of the cases 

plural 

Eepetition of nouns . 
ADJECTIVES . 



PAGE 

63 



Adjectives ; comparison of . 
NUMEEAES . 
PAETICLES; adverbs 
Negatives . . ; 

Interrogative particles 
PABADIG-MS of verbs, nouns, &c. 



PAGB 
71 

71 
72 
72 
73 

74 



CHRESTOMATHY. 



PAET I.— Select sentences feom the 
Takg^m of Onkelos . . 92 

PAET II.— Extracts feom the Tab- 

GTJ1IS. 

I. Eustory of the fall, Gen. 3. Onkelos . 97 

II. The same, Gen. 3. Pseudo-Jonathan 100 

III. The same, Gen. 3. Jerusalem Targum 105 

IV. Story of a dispute between Cain and 
Abel, Gen. 4 : 8. Jerusalem Targum . 108 

V. Marriage of Samson, Judg. 14. Jona- 

than 109 

VL Prediction of Messiah's kingdom, 
Ps. 2. Author of the Targum uncer- 
tain Ill 



VII. The praises of Jahovah, Ps. 8 . 112 

VIII. Parable of the vineyard, Isa. 5 : 1—7. 
Jonathan .... 112 

IX. Extract from Isaiah's prediction of 
the Messiah, Isa. 52 : 13 — 53 : 2. Jona- 
than 114 

X. Aphorisms of Solomon, Prov. 10 : 1— 

12. Targumist unknown . . 115 

PAET III.— Notes on the Biblical 
Chaldee. 

I. Jeremiah 10 : 11 .... 117 

II. Daniel 2 : 4—7 : 28 . . . 118 

III. Ezra4:8— 6:18 . . .122 

IV. Ezra 7: 12— 23 . .122 



VOCABULAEY 

APPENDIX A. Eabbinical Dialect 
" B. Samaritan Dialect 



128 
146 
151 



PREFACE. 



The first edition of tin's work was published in l v -"._!. The preface to 
that edition, kindly famished by my respected instructor, the Rev. 
Moses Stuart, then Professor of Biblical Literature in the Theological 
Seminary at Andover, so well sets forth the advantages of studying the 
Ohaldee dialect, that I retain the principal portion of it here. Prof. 
Stuart says : 

" The study of the Chaldec language is worthy of commendation, on* 
various grounds. 

" (1) A knowledge of it is highly important, in aiding the student 
more fully to understand the Hebrew. The basis of Hebrew, Chaldec, 
Syriao, Arabic, and Samaritan, is well known, by every good oriental 
scholar, to be one and the same. Hence it may be truly said, that he 
who has a solid and fundamental knowledge of the genius of one of 
these languages, possesses a real knowledge of them all. The meaning 
is, that the genius, structure, idiom, peculiarities of syntax, and a mul- 
titude of the words, are substantially the same in all; so that he who 
has acquired a radical acquaintance with any one of them, is prepared to 
make very rapid and easy progress in them all. The student who un- 
derstands the Hebrew, has only to read through the pages of the Gram- 
mar in the following sheets, in order to be fully satisfied of the correct- 
ness of this statement. And if correct, then is it obvious, that in every 
step of his progress in the study of the Chaldee, he is gaining additional 
light and satisfaction and confirmation, in regard to the meaning, forms, 
and structure of the Hebrew. "Who will say that the study of Greek, 
Latin, French (specially the Norman), and Saxon, does not cast light 
upon the English language ? Indeed, how can it ever be radically un- 
derstood, without some knowledge of these languages ? But the Chal- 
dee is much nearer to the Hebrew, than any of these languages to the 
English. 

" (2) The most important ancient helps extant, for illustrating the 



PREFACE. 



meaning of Hebrew words, are in the Chaldee language. The two 
Targums of Onkelos and Jonathan (which extend over the most con- 
siderable portion of the Old Testament) are more to be depended on 
in difficult cases, than any other aid to which we can resort, in all the 
store-houses of antiquity. In all probability they are older than the 
Christian era (excepting a few later adscititious passages that have 
been mingled with them) ; and inasmuch as they are substantially of the 
same idiom with the Hebrew, so they often give us the exact shape, as 
well as meaning of the Hebrew, better than any or all other ancient ver- 
sions. Let the attentive student note the use which Rosenmueller has, 
with so manifest advantage to his commentaries, often made of the Tar- 
gums. We may reasonably, have a confidence in such ancient Chaldee 
translators, that they, at least for the most part, rightly understood 
their original. 

" (3) Several chapters in Ezra and Daniel, as exhibited in our He- 
brew Bibles, are in the Chaldee language. The student, then, who de- 
. signs to acquire the power of consulting all the original Scriptures, must 
make himself acquainted with the Chaldee language. 

" (4) Whoever designs to pursue Talmudic and Rabbinic literature, 
or to be able to judge of quotations from the Talmud or the Rabbins, 
must have some acquaintance with the Chaldee. The Gremara of the 
Talmud is Chaldaic in its idiom ; and so are nearly all of the older 
Rabbinical writings. All the works of this class are, indeed, of a cor- 
rupt dialect and mixed nature ; but they all Chaldaize. 

" (5) The Chaldee is a very easy conquest to the well-grounded He- 
brew student. A few weeks devoted to it will enable him to read it 
with as much facility as he does the Hebrew. Buxtorfs Lexicon 
Chald. Talmud. JRabbinicum, is a complete store-house of these dia- 
lects, and is a book which may be procured for a trifle. It is an " opus 
triginta annorum ;* " and truly a paragon in this species of lexicography. 
Every biblical student should possess it. 'A Polyglott Bible will pre- 
sent the student with all the Targums ; and Buxtorfs JBiblia Mabbinica 
will not only give these, but all the distinguished Rabbinic commenta- 
ries, such as those of Kimchi, Jarchi, Aben Ezra, etc." 

After some remarks respecting the publication of such a work as 
the Chaldee Manual in this country, he adds : 

" As to the work itself, the plan and the execution are throughout 
such as I can commend. The grammar is brief; but quite copious 
enough for the student who is well versed in Hebrew. In the text, 
notes, and lexicon of the Chrestomathy, will be found all that is needful 



I'Kl.l A«| . 



in ;,n introduction to the Ohaldee language. With Buxtorf ' 

and the Targams, one can easily make his own way, after reading this 

ChreBtomathy." 

oond edition of I *!-<>**. Winer's Chaldee Grammar appeared at 
Leipzig in 1842, revised and considerably enlarged. This was translated 
into English by the Rev. Hor. 15. Qaekett, D.D., Professor of Bibi Lit. 
in Newton Theoi Institution, and published at Andover in 1845. 

Revisiting my Dative land, after an absence of twenty-four years in 
the foreign missionary service in Greece and Turkey, it seemed to me 
due to the cause of Biblical literature that I should revise and re-edit 
the- Ohaldee Manual. Tins, with the full concurrence and approbation 
of Trot'. Qaokett, 1 have undertaken, availing myself of whatever 
Beemed to be improvements in Prof. Winer's second edition, and incor- 
porating numerous manuscript notes of my own. To tbe brief view of 
the Rabbinic dialect in the Appendix has been added a similar view 
of the Samaritan. The former is a Chaldaizing Hebrew, the latter ;i 
Hebraizing Chaldee. 

I trust it will be found that the work has been decidedly enhanced 
in value, although somewhat diminished in size 1 , by the omission from 
the Chrestomathy of the text of the Biblical Chaldee. The notes arc 
rved, and in the first edition the text also was printed for conven- 
ience of reference; but as every student has it already in his Hebrew 
Bible, it was thought that his interest would be best consulted by omit- 
ting it here, and thus diminishing the size of the book, and consequently 
it.-> j trice. 

This edition will be issued simultaneously in this country and in 
Great Britain. It is offered to the lovers of biblical and oriental study 
in both countries, with a prayer to the Author of the Scriptures, that 
lie would condescend to employ it as a means of furthering in these 
highly favored lands the critical study of the Sacred Volume. 

ELIAS RIGGS. 

New York, January, 1858. 



In the tables of pronouns and numerals, and generally in the grammar, unusual 
forms are included in parentheses. 

In references to the Scriptures, where the name of the Targum is not given, that 
of Onkelos is to be understood, when the passages cited are from the Pentateuch, 
and that of Jonathan, when they are taken from the prophets. 

Distinct meanings of words are separated, in the vocabulary, by semicolons. 
Where two or more words are employed to express or illustrate the same definition, 
they are separated by commas. 



INTRODUCTION. 

CHALDEE LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE. 



Tiie Aramean, one of the three grand divisions* of the 
Shemitish or Oriental languages, comprises two principal 
^ulnlivisions; viz. the Syriac, sometimes called, by way 
of distinction, West Aramean, and the Chaldee, or East 
Aramean. The appropriate region of the latter was the 
province of Babylonia, between the Euphrates and Tigris, 
the original inhabitants of which (related in respect of 
their origin to the Hebrews and Syrians, and who should 
not be confounded with the Chaldeans, a tribe which 
occupied that region much later) cultivated this language 
as a distinct dialect, and communicated it to the Jews 
during the Babylonian exile. 

The Chaldeans [XaXSatot, G"Hi33] originated, as is evident from a 
comparison of the statements of Greek authors, (particularly Xenophon,) 
with those of the Bible, in the mountains of Armenia. Partly overcome 
by the Assyrians, they removed to the plains of Mesopotamia, and espe- 
cially of Babylonia, in the seventh century B. C. They afterwards not 
only gained their own independence, but rose to universal dominion on 
the ruins of the great Assyrian Monarchy. The name Babylonians (Ezra 
4 : 9) we apply, on the other hand, to the original inhabitants of Babylonia, 
who were of a Shemitish (Aramean) stock. To them belonged the lan- 
guage of which we are treating ; and it may therefore not inappropriately 

* Aramean, Hebrew, and Arabic. 



10 CHALDEE LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE. 

be termed Babylonish. For, that the Chaldeans did not speak the same 
language as the descendants of Abraham who settled in Palestine did, 
nor even a kindred dialect, is clear from the Chaldaic names of gods, 
kings, and offices, which appear in the Old Testament after the time of 
Nebuchadnezzar, and which are connected with the Medo-Persian lan- 
guage, (see Gesenius' Geschichte der Hebr. Sprach. p. 62 seq.), but 
which admit no adequate explanation from the Shemitish dialects. 

The appellation Aramean (language) is derived from 2 Kings 18 : 26, 
Isa. 36 : 11, Ez. 4 : 7. and Daniel 2:4. In the first two passages the name 
mianx is applied to the dialect through which the Assyrian and Chaldean 
officers made themselves understood in conversation with Hebrews [Jews] ; 
i. e. the universal language of the inhabitants of the Assyrian [Chaldean] 
kingdom on this side the Tigris. See Gesenius Com. zu Jes. Vol. I. p. 
956 seq. In the last case, on the other hand, the Chaldean magians 
address Nebuchadnezzar in Aramean ; which is indeed remarkable. It is 
manifest however that the same dialect is meant from the se'quel, in which 
the speech of the magians is inserted in the Chaldee dialect, now so 
called. In the Greek and Latin languages the term Aramean is not 
wholly wanting, (comp. Strabo I. p. 212. ed. Siebenkees,) although 
Syriac is very extensively used in respect to Syria, Mesopotamia, and 
Babylonia, and specially of the languages of these countries. Comp. Xen. 
Cyrop. 7, 5. 31. Jerome on Dan. 2 : 4. Strabo II. p. 58. — On the name 
applied to the Chaldee by the Talmudists, see Lightfoot Hor. Heb. on 
John 4 : 2, and below No. 2. 

Chaldaic, [D^feKD ffioV] in the Old Testament, signifies the language 
of the inhabitants of Chaldea proper, which, according to Dan. 1 : 4, was 
the court-language under Nebuchadnezzar. On the other hand, Philo 
uses XaAScuo-Tt of the Babylonian also, and even of the ancient Hebrew. 

To what extent the Babyloneo-Aramean was cultivated, as a separate 
dialect, and whether it ever became the language of books, history does 
not inform us. That it continued in Babylonia, in connection with the 
proper Chaldee, as the language of ordinary intercourse, is evident, 
partly from the above-quoted Scripture passages and from several pas- 
sages in Xenophon's Cyropaedia, but especially from the well known 
circumstance, that the exiled Jews found the Babylonish, as a living 
language, in the provinces to which they were carried. It appears also, 
from the remains of the Pehlvi dialect^ that the Babylonish produced a 
very great influence upon the ancient language of the Chaldeans, (i. e. 
the Median.) See Gesenius Com. iiber Jes. Vol. I. p. 947. 

2. By means of the Jews the Chaldee was transplant- 
ed into Palestine, where it became the vernacular tongue, 
and was employed by them, as it had been in Babylonia, 
as the language of books. Though the Aramean as 
spoken by Jews partook somewhat of the Hebrew char- 



« iiAi.hi.i. i.\.\«.i \..i. \M» !.i i i i: \ I i i 11 



p no entire or very importani corruption of il took 
place; and to this circums alone the Babylonians 

are indebted forthe Burvival, or a1 Least the partial pre- 

ation, of their Language, which, even in the mother 
country, has, Bince the Bpread of Eslamism, become ex- 
tinct. 

The Jews however did Dot, immediately after their return, adopt the 
Chaldee exclusively. It was nol until the time of the Maccabees, that 
this language completely displaced the Old Hebrew, as Geseniue has de- 
monstrated. Qesch. d. Heb. Spr. p. II. Concerning the Chaldee as the 
language of books among the .lews, see No. 'I It is clear from Ezra I: 
thai ii was also the government-language of the western provinces 
of the Persian empire. The Samaritans also Bpoke a dialect very nearly 
resembling the Chaldee. 

In later times, (fee name Hebrew (c/?pats, efipaus StaAocros, yXaknra row 
e/ip(u'u)i', fjSpawrrt), was transferred to the Babylonish dialect; comp. Prol. 
to Sirach, John 5:2, 19:13. Acts 61: 40, 22:2, 26:14 Rev. 9: 11, 16: 

li>. Jerome Prol. to 1 MaCC. It was even called TTaTfMOS yXCxTCTO, cfiuwr). 

2 Mac. 13:37. Joseph. Jewish War. Pref. § 1. The Talmudists. on the 
other hand, call the Chaldee, in distinction from the Old Hebrew, \VOb 
-n:n n^rn. See Lightfoot on John 5:2. Also ^omo [Syriac] Baba 
Kama IM. 83, 1. Sot. 49. 2. Pesach. 61. 1. Compare C. H. Zeibich de 
lingua Jud. Heb. tempore Christi. Viteb. 1711. The name ( 'hah/air did 
not. however, become totally obsolete. We find it again in Jerome. Prol. 
ad Tob., Judith. 

It is plain, from tin: nature of the case, that the Babylonish language 
would, as spoken and written by Jews, i. e'. by those who inhabited Pales- 
tine, receive something of the Hebrew character. That such was the 
fact will be more particularly shown below. No. 3. Still the assertion is 
incorrect, that the Chaldee which we have, (and which has come to us 
only through the Jews.) has been extraordinarily corrupted by them, or is 
a mixture of Hebrew with pure Babylonian. See Michaelis Abh. V. d. 
Syr. Spr. 36 seq. Wahl Geschiehte d. morg. Sprachen. § 78 seq. Meyer 
Hermeneut d. A. T. vol. I. p. 266. Comp. Jahn, Einleitung in das A. T. I. 
2 IS. 284. For, from a comparison of the Chaldee (as it is found in the old 
Targums. Ibr example) with the Syriac. which we learn from native Sy- 
rian authors, it is evident that the Chaldee has all the most important pe- 
culiarities of grammatical form and syntactical construction, as well as the 
greatest part of its stock of words — copia verborum. in common with the 
Syriac. Its prominent features are those of an Aramean dialect. On the 
other hand, those traits in which the Chaldee differs from the Syriac and 
agrees with the Hebrew, are few; and those few relate mostly to ortho- 
graphy and punctuation. See No. 4. But why may not all this be re- 
garded as dialectic difference ? As widely as the Aramean was extended. 



12 CHALDEE LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE. 

it was natural that, like other languages extensively in use, it should 
split up into different dialects. The Hebrew and Phenician, notwithstand- 
ing their original relation and vicinity, exhibit variations of this kind. Be- 
sides, it would be difficult, on the other supposition, to say why the Jews 
varied from the Aramean character in so few points, and those such as dif- 
fered from the Hebrew not more than others which they have left un- 
touched: why for example, they said ^p*i instead of ^Mpj, X^BJ2 instead 
of xbttjsa, which certainly did not savor more of foreign idiom than psVa 
for D"o£b" , sm"> for oi*fi, or bapa for bi'J£ . 

The periods of Persian and Grecian supremacy introduced some Per- 
sian and Greek words into the Babylonish' (though less than into the Sy- 
riac) ; whence even the Targum of Onkelos is not free from Greek words. 
But the Saracen dominion, which commenced with the invasion of Baby- 
lonia by the hosts of the Kaliphs, A. D. 640, soon swept away the ancient 
language of the country, so that at the present day scarce a relic of it 
exists in the East. 

Note 1. There is a modern Syriac dialect spoken by the Nestorians 
on the plain of Oroomiah and in the mountains of Koordistan. See Smith 
and Dwight's Researches in Armenia, vol. II. p. 212, and Perkins' Resi- 
dence in Persia, p. 11. The language of the Jews in the same region 
closely resembles this. So do those remains of Aramean which are found 
farther south in Mesopotamia. The fact that these remains have some- 
times been called Chaldee, has perhaps arisen from the circumstance that 
a portion of the nominal Christians among whom they are found (viz., 
those who acknowledge the authority of the see of Rome) have been 
designated as the Chaldean church ; or, perhaps, from the fact that these 
Christians reside in the region of the ancient Chaldea. Niebuhr, speaking 
of these remains, (Reisebeschreibung, vol. II. p. 352,) calls them indiffer- 
ently Chaldee or Syriac. The subject is worthy of further investigation. 

Note 2. Other Aramean dialects are, the Samaritan, preserved in a 
translation of the Pentateuch and a few hymns ; the Zabian, in the books 
of the Zabians or Christians of St. John ; and the Palmyrene, only in in- 
scriptions. The first of these is more nearly related to Chaldee, and the 
others to Syriac. 

3. The principal remains of the Chaldee dialect in 
our possession are the following. (1) In the canonical 
books, Ezra 4 : 8—6 : 18, 1 : 12—26. Daniel 2 : 4—7 : 
28, Jerern. 10 : 11. (2) A class of translations and 
paraphrases of the books of the O. Test. [Targums] 
which have originated in different ages, and which ex- 
hibit very considerable varieties of linguistic and exegeti- 
cal character. 



< IIAI.hhi; I.A.N". I LGH AM' I.I I I i: A II KM . I •') 

Note I. In respect to linguistic character, with which alone we are at 
M i concerned, these remains of the Babylonish dialed may be dn 
into three < The purest Chaldee (i. e. the freest from Hebi 

appears in the Targum of Onkelos on the Pentateuch. Similar to this in 
respect to words, orthographj . and grammatical construction, but somewhat 
inferior, is the Biblical Chaldee, winch is intei persed throughout with 
Hebrew peculiarities j e. g. the substitution ofn lor x whether quie cent 
or not, the Plural termination c— . the Dual form, the conj. Hophal. 
Finally, the remaining Targum* are composed in a language, not only 
abounding in foreign words, but exhibiting many peculiar forms, (i 
Hiphil D"*p5i» from Dip, "- preTorraative of the Infin. Pael, [thpeel, and 
[thpa&l,) part of which resemble the Syriac <>r Rabbinic, (as : prefixed to 
the 3d p. Put and the Byllable Pia prefixed in Passives,) and part arise 
from contractions, (as in the numerals.) These peculiarities have been 
noticed, though inadequately, by Eichhorn (Einl. ins A. T. II. seq. 90 
seq.) They deserve indeed to be collected into a separate treatise, In 
the sequel the later Chaldee will constantly be distinguished from the 
earlier. 

Note 2. The language of the Talmud is commonly termed Chaldee. 
The Mishna and the Gem ara are however very different. The former is 
written in a dialect nearly resembling the Hebrew, and is only disfigured 
by some Chaldee forms; the style of the Gemara exhibits the funda- 
mental characteristics of Chaldee, both in respect to the roots of words 
and their grammatical conformation — still it is to be regarded, especially 
the Jerusalem Gemara, as a very corrupt Chaldee. Its grammar \u-r<\< 
therefore to be treated separately. See J. E. Faber Amu. z. Erlernung 
des Talmud, und Rabbin. Gutt. 1770. 

Note 3. The Syrochaldaic originals of several of the Apocryphal books 
[those which were written in Palestine] are lost. See Jerome Pml. ad 
Tob., Judith. I Mace, and the Intrr. of Eichhorn, Bertholdt, and De Wette. 
Josephus also wrote his work on the Jewish AVar in the Syrochaldaic lan- 
guage. (Jewish War, Preface § 1.) 

4. The Chaldee with which we are now concerned 
sustains, as is apparent from the slightest observation, a 
near relation to the Syriac, and shares with that dialect 
all its essential peculiarities, both in respect to the forms 
of words and their themes, but differs from it in details 
sufficiently to claim separate individuality as a dialect. 
These variations concern rather the grammatical forms 
than the themes of words, and especially punctuation, in 
which the Chaldee nearly accords with the old Phenician 
and Hebrew. 



14 CHALDEE LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE. 

Note 1. On the connection of Chaldee with Syriac, see Michaelis 
Abhandl. von der syr. Sprache, pp. 12 seq. 

Note 2. A full consideration of ChaJdee ground-forms would be out 
of place here. I shall only notice the change of letters for others of some- 
what different sounds, in such words as the Chaldee has in common with 
the Hebrew. In consequence of that flat pronunciation which character- 
ises the Aramean dialects, we frequently find 1 and n substituted for the 
Hebrew t and IB ; e. g. rn'n to offer (sacrifices), bii'n gold, 3^ seed, lain to 
break in pieces, l-ifi an ox; and 13 for 2J, as *1-IB a rock, KI32 counsel. Be- 
sides these, S is used almost constantly instead of n final, £ is sometimes 
changed into 3> , as snx [y^]- (On the cause of this change, compare 
Gesenius Heb. Lex. letter s) ; 3 into b, as aba^N a widow. Finally, it is 
scarcely necessary to remark, that letters of the same organ may be in- 
terchanged ; e. g. n'inasi [Heb. n*i&&] brimstone, 3?nip [Heb. SSis] a 
helmet, NSI3 [Heb. nsn] to wander. 

Note 3. In respect to grammatical forms, the Chaldee shares the fol- 
lowing peculiarities in common with the Syriac. 

(1) The same forms of words are pronounced with fewer vowels than 
in Hebrew, so that the consonants predominate in grammatical forma- 
tions ; as, bvp, tjba, b^p. 

(2) The emphatic state (of nouns) equivalent to the article in Hebrew 
and Arabic. 

(3) The use of 1 as a sign"of the Genitive case ; also as a Relative 
Pronoun ; and the formation of Possessive Pronouns from b^ and suffixes, 
as "h" 1 "* mine, Tj^^ thine. 

(4) b as a mark of the Accusative. 

(5) The termination "p— for the plural of masculines. 

(6) Distinction of genders in the 3d p. plur. Pret. of verbs. 

(7) The formation of Passives by prefixing the syllable nx. 

(8) The formation of the third conjugation like b'qpx . 

(9) Imperatives Passive. 

(10) Two participles in the Actives of the second and third Conj. 

(11) The use of the participles with pronouns for a separate tense. 

(12) The preference of X to n as a termination of words; e. g. K3^a 
a queen, and the consequent confusion of verbs 5t b and T\b . 

(13) The use of pleonastic suffixes before the Genitive. 

(14) The use of the 3d p. pi. of Actives in a Passive sense. 

Note 4. Peculiarities of the Chaldee, in which it differs from the 
Syriac, and in some of them more nearly resembles the Hebrew. (1) Pre- 
ference of the clearer-sounding vowels. Thus a is often substituted for 
the Heb. and Syr. o; e. g. 3n3, Syr. JjdzLs ; Ktl^S'j Syr. Jol^sI ; Dbs>, 
Heb. cViS; 1B38, Heb. \B3K ; bp r , Heb. bip; &nj3, Syr. j£o j the plural 

termination of feminines "J— instead of Syr. ^ So the Chaldee often 

has i where 1 occurs in Syriac, e. g. bis, \s ; and — for the Syr. — • 
e. g. bwpn, Syr.'Vo-ft-oZ. — (2) Avoiding diphthongs; compare Sat 1 with 



0H \i DEE LANGUAGE am- i mi B vi i i:i . 16 



]^-^ . -rV; const, st. with -..'— T*""X with ^z] . fta with s^. j 

otiaat letters; compare *a\a my king with **a^o, ""— ~ writh --. — -. :- . 

= with w»li^uo.— (:i) The possibility of doubling letter not guttural; 
(4) The tone regularly on the ultimate ; n::-: i x ■ • . - .— 

rhe formation of the Inf except In Peal without the prefix a, &c— In 
reaped to orthography, it may be remarked here thai the ecriptio plena, 
or lull mode of writing quiescents, ii decidedly prevalent in Chaldee. 



THE FOLLOWING ARE THE PRINCIPAL HELPS TO THE 
STUDY OF CHALDEE. 

I. Lexicons. 

J. Buxtorfii (t 1629) Lexicon Chaldaico-Talmudico-Rabbinicum. Basil. 
1640. fol. 

Edm. Castelli Lexicon Heptaglotton. London, 16G9. fol. (Thifl work 
contains a complete Chaldee Vocabulary.) 

M. J. Landau, Raid). Aram. Deutsch. Worterbuch zur Kcnntniss des 
Talmud., dor Targum. u. s. w. Prag. 1819. 

II. Grammars. 

(a) Of the Shcmitish dialects generally, or at least of the Aramean 
dialects. 

J. Buxtorf. Gram. Chald. et Syr. Basil. (1615) 1650. Svo. 

Lud. do Dieu (f 1642.) Grammatica Ling. Orient. Heb. Chald. et Syr. 
inter se collatarum. Lugd. Bat. 162S. 4to. Frcf. a. M. 16S3. 4to. 

J. H. Hottinger (| 1667) Gramm. quatuor linguar. Heb. Ch. Syr. et 
Arab. Tigur. 1649. 4to. Heidelb. 165S. 

Andr. Sennert (f 16S9) Hypotyposis harmonica ling. Or. Chald. Syr. 
et Aral), cum matre Heb. Viteb. 1653. 4to. 

Car. Schaaf (f 1729) Opus Aram, complec. Gram. Chald. Syr. &c. L. 
Bat. 1686. 8vo, 

Ign. Fesfler Instt. Ling. Orient. Heb. Ch. Syr. et Arab. Vratisl. 1787, 
1789. 2 vols. Svo. 

J. Gottfr. Hasse (f 1806) Prakt. Handb. der aram. Sprache. Iena 
1791. Svo. 

J. Jahn (f 1S17) Aram, oder chald. u. syr. Sprachlehre. Wien 1793. 
Svo. — Elements Aram. s. Ch. et Syr. ling. lat. reddita et accessionibus 
ancta ab Andr. Oberleitner. Vindob. 1S20. Svo. 

J. S. Vater, Handbuch der hebr. syr. ch. uhd arab. Gramm., Leipzig. 
(1S02) 1817. Svo. 

f The obelisk designates, throughout this list, the year of an author's decease. 



16 CHALDEE LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE. 

(b) Of the Chaldee language only. 

Chph. Cellarii (f 1707) Chaldaismus sive Grammatica nova Linguae 
Chaldaicae. Cizae. 1685. 4to. 

Henr. Opitii (f 1712) Chaldaismus targ. talm. rabb. Hebraismo harmoni- 
ous. Kil. 1696. 4to. 

J. Dav. Michaelis (f 1791) Grammatica Chald. Goett. 1771. 8vo. 

Wilh. Fr. Hezel Anweis. zum Chald. bei Ermangelung alles mundl. 
Unterrichts, Lemgo. 1787. 8vo. 

N. W. Schroder (f 1798) Instt. ad fundam. — Chaldaismi bibl. brevissime 
concinnata (1787) ed. 2. aucta et emend. Ulm. 1810. 8vo. (a proper appen- 
dix to the Hebrew grammar of this author. See Eichhorn's Bibl. VIII. 
694.) 

F. Nolan, An Introduction to Ch. Grammar. Lond. 1821. 12mo. 

W. Harris, Elements of the Chaldee language, Lond. 1822, 24 pp. 8vo. 
(republished at N. York.) 

Jul. Ftlrst, Lehrgebaude der Aramaischen Idiome in Bezug auf die indo- 
german. sprachen. (1 Thl. Formenlehre der Chald. Grammatik.) Leip- 
zig, 1835. 8vo. 

G. B. Winer, Grammatik des biblischen und targumischen Chaldais- 
mus, Leipz. 1824, and 2d ed. 1842. 8vo. (the basis of this work.) 

III. Chrestomathies and Readers. 

Geneseos ex Onkelosi paraphr. Chald. quatuor priora capita una cum 
Dan. c. 2. Chald. Ed. W. Fr. Hezel. Lemgo, 1788. 8vo. 

Geo. Lor. Bauer (f 1806.) Chrest. e paraphras. Chald. et Taimude 
delecta c. nott. et ind. Niirnb. 1792. 8vo. (See Eichhorn's Bibl. IV. 
895 seq.) 

J. Jahn, Ch. Chrestomathie grosstentheils aus Handschriften. Wien, 
1800. 8vo. (without a vocabulary.) 

H. Adolf. Grimm (f 1813.) Chald. Chrestomathie mit einem vollstandi- 
gen Glossar. Lemgo. 1801. 8vo. 

G. B. Winer, Chal. Lesebuch, aus den Targ. d. a. T. ausgewahlt, 
Leipz. 1825. 8vo. 

The Hebrew Lexicons generally contain also the Chaldee words which 
occur in Daniel and Ezra. The older Hebrew Grammars, (compare 
those of Alting and Danz,) contained also brief instructions for Chaldee. 



CHALDEE GRAMMAR. 



PART I. 
ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY. 



§ 1. Consotiants. 

The Chaldee is written with the same characters as are 
employed in Hebrew; and, so far as we can trace its 
ancient history, was never expressed by any others. In- 
deed the square character, now termed Hebrew by way 
of distinction, appears to have belonged originally to the 
Chaldeans, (Babylonians,) and to have taken the place of 
the old Hebrew character among the Jews in the age suc- 
ceeding the Babylonish exile. 

The most ancient Phoenician, the Samaritan and the Hebrew coin- 
Letter alphabets are essentially the same. The letters of the Palmyrene 
inscriptions, (the oldest of which date back to the first century after 
Christ.) much more resemble the square character. So do the letters of 
the Eiryplian Araraean inscriptions, which are still more ancient. See 
Gesenius' Geschichte der Hebr. Sprache und Schrift. pp. 140 seq. Wood's 
Ruins of Palmyra, (the plates,) and Kopp's Bilder und Schriften, II. 
245 seq. 

§ 2. Punctuation. 

1. The vowel-points, which are employed in Hebrew, 
have been transferred to the Chaldee, and appear in many 
manuscripts, and most editions of the Chaldee text. Since 
2 



18 § 2. PUNCTUATION. 



it is evident that these points are the work of the Jews, 
and were invented several centuries after Christ, it is plain 
that the Chaldee must originally have been written with- 
out vowel-points. Thus the Palmyrene inscriptions ex- 
hibit no vowel-marks. But the letters » 1 "* [matres lee- 
tionis] were earlier employed, in doubtful cases, as a guide 
in reading. 

The last-mentioned fact is clear from such orthographical phenomena 
as x^siH , "i&KU&a, ns^B , Dan. 2 : 35, etc. and from the abundant use of 
the scriptio plena throughout. 

2. The transfer of the Hebrew vowel-points to the 
Chaldee took place in an age when the vowel system of 
the Jews was yet in an imperfect state ; and in later times, 
the pointing of the Chaldee text, especially that of the 
Targums, did not receive the same attention which was 
devoted to the Hebrew. These circumstances exhibit 
clearly the reason why the punctuation of the Chaldee 
writings appears, at present, far less regular than that of 
the Hebrew. This irregularity is indeed so great that 
not only do different copies and editions, (especially those 
of London and Venice,) differ widely from each other, 
but there prevails throughout an extreme variableness in 
the use of the long and short vowels. 

On the variable punctuation of the Targums, see Eichhorn Einl. ins 
A. T. Part 2. p. 24 seq. 

3. Long vowels sometimes occur in a mixed syllable without, the tone, 
and vice versa, short vowels in a simple syllable. (Especially are 1 and -7 
employed altogether promiscuously, to which usage only a slight tendency 
is noticeable in Hebrew. See Gesenius Lehrgebaude p. 60.) For exam- 
ples of the former comp. ftjpyifi Deut. 23 : 16, j^^n^ Jer. 49 : 19, y!b 
[allin] Dan. 4:4; of the latter &aj3 . 

4. The violation of the rule of Q,amets Hhatuph, in such cases as 
Kaa.in is only apparent. The 1 is only a superfluous mater lectionis and is 
by no means to be regarded as quiescing in Qamets Hhatuph, or as a con- 
sonant \_Hhdvchma] since it is written without Sheva. In general, how- 
ever, Q,amets Hhatuph seldom occurs in Chaldee words. 



IM v ii \ riOM : DAGH1 SB. L9 



DAQHK8H. 

5. Daghesh lene is Bubjecl to the same general rules as 
in Hebrew. 

(i. The pron. Buff, v- and i- never receive it. 

h. In some editions, 7— : in the middle of. a word fa treated as a diph- 
thong, ;iikI the next letter does not receive Daghesh lene; as -r m z baitht 
Generally however - is peg irded aa a proper consonant, and we find "~"^ 

Nouns <>r the Ibrm ~~~ ( I reb. ~r. -J are treated ae though the gcound- 
fbrm was "''■?• and Daghesh is inserted in the - where a mixed syllable 
prec< *$^ ■ "^"^ • 

6. Daghesh forte compensative 

(/. Is inserted in the first radical of verbs 7r ; e. g. p?X for p£"lX . 
Aphel from pg^ . 

b. In r ol* tln> passive prefix rx it compensates lor the omission of II 
the characteristic prefix of Aphid, e. g. ^pnx for bapxrx . 

\ »te. The peculiarity of the Chaldee in both these cases is. that the 
letter (or which compensation is made would, if the word were fully writ- 
ten, have succeeded the letter iii which Daghesh forte is inserted. In He- 
brew this is unusual, and where it occurs might perhaps be denominated 
Chaldaism. 

c. Sometimes, especially in the later Chaldee, it compensates lor the 
omission of quiesceuts and consequent shortening of the vowel preceding 
the letter in which Daghesh forte is inserted; as x:sx instead ol'x:b-x. 
Gen. 3 : 2. Pseud. Jon. The converse of this also takes place; § 7. a. (2.) 

7. Forms which regularly exhibit Daghesh forte, but 
sometimes appear with a different orthography. 

a. The letter 3 sometimes takes the place of Daghesh forte, even 
where the radical form does not exhibit a 3 ; e. g. ^S3Pl Dan. 2 : 25. instead 
of Vsn or brx from hbs This may hav% arisen from an imperfect ac- 
quaintance with Chaldee. A Jew. on perceiving that 3 was expressed in 
Chaldee in many cases where his own language required Daghesh forte 
or a long vowel compensating for it. would perhaps be liable to employ it 
even where it was not required by good Chaldee usage. See below § 6. a. 
note. Gesenius, Lehrg. § 33. 3. 

6. Very frequently no compensation is made for the exclusion of Da- 
ghesh forte from gutturals; e. g. l«n^P Gen. 3 : 3. CH3 2 K. 21 : 6. 

c. As in Hebrew, Daghesh forte is sometimes dropped when the letter 
in which it would regularly be inserted has She via. 



20 § 3. TOOTS-SYLLABLE. 



MA^PIQ. 

8. Mappiq is inserted, as in Hebrew, in n where it is 
not quiescent. 

a. In the Pronominal suffixes ff— and ft— , comp. § 8. 

b. In n when it occurs as the last radical of a verb or noun and is not 
quiescent; e. g. ttna Ps. 131 :1, ttbx Dan. 2 : 28. 

ACCENTS. 

9. a. In the Chaldee portions of the original Scrip- 
tures, the same accents are employed, and subject to the 
same rules, as in Hebrew, only that the half-accent Metheg 
is much less regularly and less frequently inserted than 
in Hebrew. 

h. In the Targum of Onkelos, the train of accents is 
substantially the same as in the original text. See Chres- 
tomathy Part I. Note on No. 1. 

a To the text of the other Targums no accents have 
been appended. 

§ 3. Tone-Syllable. 

The tone falls in Chaldee, (as in Hebrew,) usually on 
the last syllable. The following forms are exceptions, 
and are accented on the penultimate. 

1. Segholate nouns which follow the Hebrew form; 
as tfb'a , D?t3 , 'pja , which however occur almost exclu- 
sively in the biblical Chaldee. 

2. Verbal forms terminating in sn a_ «a ■>_ and *!; 
as nbbp, abt#, K^bf?, i*)fijp, *fi|p.. 

3. The suffixes V- arj- *»_. ^n_ *>rn ; e. g. vs&fo-. 

The German and Polish Jews place the tone in Chaldee (as they also 
do in Hebrew) on the penult. Whether this was the ancient. Babylonish 
accentuation, cannot be decided from the accentuation prevalent in Syriac ; 
since two closely related dialects may differ widely in this respect. Were 



■ I. ..i si idotg i snponn ed i i vi. 21 

the vowels of the Chaldee, aa we have them, entirely conformed to the 
old Babylonish pronunciation, we Bhoold have, in them, a clew to the 
.nun nt accentuation. 

§ 4. Of reading unpointed text. 

As points have not been attached to all the Chaldee 
text, and since the unpointed, (besides the use of the mar 
tree lectionis k, 1, *», which obtains likewise in Heb.) pre- 
sents some peculiarities, it may be well here to notice, as 
an assistance in reading without vowels, one usage at least, 
which obtains in the Targums, viz. that a double "i or i is 

Sometimes employed, 

(a) In the middle of a word, either to indicate that 
these letters are moveable; as WTrtSSB i.e. MrtJEp, »mn 
i. e. Kj^Dri ; or that they are to he pronounced double ; as 
nrrmna i. e. nn^n^ , "pa^n i. e. pljn . 

(A) In the end of a word, especially w r hen it is neces- 
sary to distinguish between the pronouns V and *»—; as 
■wian i. e. ^byi . 

Note. Only one abbreviation occurs in the Targums, viz. " 1 " 1 for hW, 
The Talmud abounds with them. See J. Buxtorf De Abbreviat Hebr. 
Basil. 1640. 8vo. 



PART H. 
ETYMOLOGY. 



CHAPTER I. 

GENERAL PRINCIPLES WHICH REGULATE THE DERIVATION AND INFLECTION 

OF WORDS. 



5. The subject generally. 



1. Befoee entering upon the derivation and modifica- 
tions of the various parts of speech, it will be necessary 
to notice briefly the general principles according to which 
these changes take place. In Chaldee, as in every other 
language, these changes respect partly consonants, and 
partly vowels, which will naturally divide this subject 
into two parts. 

2. It is proper to distinguish, among the changes of 
consonants and vowels with which we meet in the inflec- 
tions of the parts of speech, between those which are 
necessary, and those which are the result of euphony. 
The former class includes those changes which are essen- 
tial to permanent forms, — those which run through the 
language, and which form, so to speak, its substratum. 
Such are the terminations of the persons in verbs, and of 
the numbers in nouns. Those changes, on the other hand, 
may be reckoned euphonical, which are not essential to 
the form, but result simply from facility of utterance ; 



.' 6. Ml TATI0N8 "l « 0X80N 



- '■.-_:-; instead of f?Q% , H*3 instead of]TW?i in rrs 
instead <>f """rx. So in Latin we h&ve immirvutus for 
inrninutus, mi for ///////, /""//V for Aoc dfo, Ac. It is 
plainl) with this latter class of changes thai we arc at 
present chiefly concerned. 

§ o. Mutations of Consonants* 

The derivation and inflection of word-, so far as they 
depend on the consonants, arc effected by other letters 
(beside those which compose the root) being prefixed, 
inserted, or Buffixed ; or by the radicals themselves being 
omitted, doubled, or commuted with other letters; • 
bopp, r-jp, fctotep, tog from b-jp; n-j from nrj; ^a from 
Kba. For these purposes the Chaldee employ- the let- 
ters x. n, "i, ■», tt, :, n. It belongs to the details of ety- 
mology to exhibit the manner in which these servile 
letters arc employed in each particular case. Those 
changes only will be noticed in this place, which, in the 
formation and inflection of words, are the result- of eu- 
phony. Such are the assimilation, tra/n^position, omis- 
sion, commutation, and insertion of consonants. 

a. Assimilation takes place regularly, (1) Of the 
letter :, when it occurs as the final consonant of a mixed 
syllable and immediately precedes another consonant. 
Thus instead of per is commonly written ps n , 3Q3& in- 
stead of aro;m. Comp. § 18. — (2) Of n in the passive 
prefix rx with a succeeding "J or "I, more rarely with any 
other letter. See § 10. 5. 

Note. The converse of this takes place, when, instead of doubling a 
consonant, the letter 3 is inserted; e. g. "»aC3p3 for ■>::;?; ~z:x for ~sx 
Job 31 : 12. Dan. 4 . 9. (This takes place however in only a lew words 
which must be learned by practice.)—* 1 also fa so used in the later Tar- 
gums; e.g. Tr , £ nfi J instead of "p'-^X Gen. 3S : 9. Pseudo-Jon. "\ m -'2 in- 
stead of "t-2 Eccl. 10: 12. 

h. Transposition. The h of the passive preformative 



24c § 6. MUTATIONS OF CONSONANTS. 

na regularly changes places with the first radical, when 
that happens to be a sibilant (T, 0, 2, to or to); e.g. 
ronton, ^m??**, ?£t32tf. 

c. The following letters are dropped. (1) * and 5 in 
some forms in which they would stand in the beginning 
of a word without a vowel ; e. g. ps instead of pSJ , yn 
[Imp.] for y^P . — (2) Consonants destitute of vowels, by 
contraction ; e. g. *itona instead of *ito»riK , l^nn instead 
of ^D? *nn. Here belong also ^tntf instead of "ta^ 
kwid instead of arn?o Ex. 9 : 31, Jon. — (3) 5 without 
a vowel and in the end of a syllable, of participles 
changed into tenses ; e. g. T^V?!? for 'pnpbtpp . — (4) Very 
frequently the quiescents ; e. g. fta? instead of ITTaao , 
Wfi instead of Tiam.— (5) n in the end of words, con- 
stantly in the absolute state of feminine forms like TObtt ; 
— also in the later Targums ^ for JTO Gen. 22 : 19, Jon. 

d. Commutation takes place, especially of quiescents ; 

(1) "When one quiescent letter is exchanged for another 
capable of quiescing in the same vowel ; as WE instead 
of k T3^'a , (which is merely an orthographical change ;) — 

(2) When a quiescent, homogeneous with the character- 
istic vowel of a particular form, is substituted for one 
which would be heterogeneous ; as E^ptf for alptf ( Q, ?i?S). 

But those numerous cases of verbs & b do not belong here, in which i 
appears instead of X ; nor such instances as Kn^E^p instead of xnx^j? ; 
for in these cases the ^ is only the original consonant (which had been dis- 
placed by another) restored. See above. 

e. Insertion. 8 prosthetic is sometimes inserted in 
cases where otherwise a syllable would commence with 
two consonants ; e. g. intoa , inna . Here belong also 
such cases as isntf' instead of "^na ? VDjjna instead of 
bqpantf . For Daghesh forte is here euphonic, being pri- 
marily designed to shorten the pronunciation, (see Gese- 
nius, Lehrgeb. p. 860,) though it constantly indicates the 



; 7. VOWEL-OB UTOE8. 



doubling of the consonant; and \'<>v this purpose the 

vowel of the » tails hack to the n of tin- prefix. 

g 7. Vmr, !-<•}, miges. 

The derivation and inflections of words are effected, 
in the second place, by vowds, when forms of words de- 
rived from the same ground-form arc characterized by 
different vowels; ex. ffyn from Sfbtt, tog from bojj, bac 
from bnp. It is impossible to decide, in each particular 
case, why such and such vowels have been selected as 
characteristic of the form. We can distinctly ascertain, 
however, what are the characteristics of particular form- ; 
and this again must he referred to the details of ety- 
mology. Only some variations from the general prin- 
ciples which regulate these forms, and some other modifi- 
cations of vowels which result from facility of pronuncia- 
tion, will be noticed here. Vowels, in the course of for- 
mation and inflection, are commuted, transposed, dropped, 
or inserted. 

a. Commutation of vowels; (1) Short for long, when 
a mixed syllable loses the tone; as pnip3 from fe s n:n 
from "jn, "i£p const, steite of IjgP. In these cases i pure 
generally becomes — ; and — , — . When the long vowel 
remains unchanged, either that is impure, or the last con- 
sonant of the ground-form is thrown forward and pro- 
nounced with the suffix ; e. g. V* 3 ^!? 1 ? Dan. 3:31. So con- 
stantly in Hebrew; as spa'i . See above § 2. 2. — 
(2) Long vowels take the place of short; — in pause; ah 
S|D3 Dan. 2:32, ^» Dan. 4:6, ns< Gen. 4:11, rbm 
Ex. 4:13, (though this is not universally the case ; comp. 
Dan. 2 : 9, 17) ; — before a guttural which would regularly 
he doubled; as t^tt instead of S^M, *yj*9 instead of 
tfrrsTp , (although this likewise is not without exceptions, 
especially if the guttural be n or n. Dan. 4 : 16, 24) ; — 



26 § 7. VOWEL-CHANGES. 



before other consonants, less frequently ; as TH]^** instead 
of fHj?*? Gen. 38:9. Ps. Jon. see § 6. a. ; — when a quies- 
cent which would regularly have a composite Sheva, drops 
it and quiesces in the preceding vowel ; as 1?isb instead 
of "J^Kb . — (3) It is for the sake of euphony that, in final 
syllables which terminate in a guttural, Pattahh is usually 
found before it, instead of the usual characteristic vowel ; 
as fibi^ instead of fibtt^ fiat? instead of fiaf "; also that 
when a syllable terminates in a quiescent preceded by a 
heterogeneous vowel, that vowel becomes homogeneous 5 
e. g. 5ppia instead of spo^a . 

The case of simple syllables, in which long vowels have displaced the 
short ones, does not belong here. In most of these instances, the punc- 
tuators probably employed the short vowels ; and such forms as te'EttJ , 
! H|?3 occur only in particular editions. 

b. Transposition of vowels takes place in some mono- 
syllabic forms of verbs, the vowel of which is between 
the last two radicals, when they receive a pronominal 
suffix ; as ftbtpp from biop ; — also in some contracted forms 
of verbs $$ ; as p^? for pj£j5 ; — and finally, in cases like 
n^p for D^p, *>t-\)2 for iriiMa, when the moveable 8 or 1, 
etc. throws back to the preceding consonant its own 
vowel, for the sake of quiescing in it. 

c. Vowels are dropped, in the final syllable of ground- 
forms, only when formative syllables are added, and then 
much less frequently than in Heb. ; e. g. Xttty from oby ? 
■pbtpp from bpp, abns from bh&, "pbt:p:> from br>p^ . The 
vowels most frequently omitted are Pattahh, Tseri and 
Hhireq. 

d. Finally, vowels are inserted; (1) When two con- 
sonants would otherwise stand together without a vowel 
in the beginning of a syllable; as bttp? from bup, tjb^b 
from tfbft . The vowel most commonly employed in such 
cases to facilitate pronunciation is Hhireq. But when 



g 8. PttRBON m. a.m. P068E88IV1 PBONOUNB. 



the following consonanl is a guttural, and bas a compo- 
site Sheva, the preceding consonanl takes the short rowel 
corresponding with this Sheva; as Kp^P, iw$. — ($) \ u 
3 like i""-**v Ez. 7: L8, ~™~ E& I ■ L5, instead of 
V~2rp , nr-n ; where three consonants would conic to- 
gether, in the beginning of a syllable, without a vowel. 

Note. In case ( I ) the Inserted vowel regularly belongs to the first of 
the two consonants which would have been without vowels. In Lhe later 
tins, a practice Bomewhal different prevails to considerable extent 
Instead of a short vowel under the firsl consonant, a long vowel appears 
under the second ; e. g. ~-n" instead ofiBKi ( fen. 3:1. Pb. Jon. el pi 
kVtish instead of kWw Gen. 3 : 24. Ps. Jon. 



CHAPTER II. 
PRONOUNS. 



§ 8. Personal and Possessive Pronouns. 

1. Personal pronouns are divided, as in I Id dew-, into 
two classes, separate and sufljxed. The former express, 
with some exceptions, the nominative case, and the Latter 

the ol>li<pie cases. 

TABLE OF THE SEPARATE PBONOtfNS OB OROUND-FOBlf . 



Bingolar. Plural. 

I.e. K:x,(n:x) / 

2. c. nx. p:x (nn:x) thou 
o. m. Kin (vv*%. sinsK, *n 

Prov. 25 : 20. like the Syr.) he 

3. f. K^h (Krr»K, VpK,) she 



1. c. 


KjnaK . wna . (-,:x 


) 


2. m. 


1in?K . i*"X ' 




2. r. 


7r:x . r~s ] 




3. m. 


1 W, ('"-) 
| yian, ian 


[ 

f 


3. f. 


rwi (nrji tr*) 



we 

ye 



2. The suffix (or inseparable) pronouns are appended 
to verbs, to the signs of cases (§ 60) and prepositions, or 
to nouns. In the last case they are usually translated by 
possessive pronouns, though the genitive of personal pro- 
nouns would more exactly express them ; precisely as in 



28 



§ 8. PERSONAL AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 



Greek, narriq /uou> &g. The following are the suffixes at- 
tached to verbs. 



1. c . *i— . (^3) me 

2 - m> ^~ T » I thee 

3. m. ft—, ft-"— (>ft, irvT) ftim 

3. f. ft—, (Xft,) her 






us 



you 



them 



Which of the forms is to be used in each particular case, is explained 
in § 16, where also will be found an explanation of the so-called Nun epen- 
thetic, which is frequently inserted between the verbal form and its suffix. 

3. The suffixes of nouns are divided, again, into two 
classes, viz. those attached to nouns singular, and those 
attached to nouns plural. The latter are expressed by 
somewhat lengthened forms, in which the i of the 
plural termination commonly appears. They are gene- 
rally the following : 



I. SUFFIXES TO NOUNS SINGULAE. 



Singular suffixes. 



I.e. 
2. m. 

2. f. 

3. m. 
3. f. 



ft— 

ft—, (inbibl. Ch. ft— ) 



thy 

his 
her 



Plural suffixes. 

TO, bis ) 

1= J 

•Jin, (cTn) | 

m, v. f 



our 

your 

their 



Note 1. Twice, instead of ft— appears K— Dan. 4 : 15, 5:8; the Tar- 
gumists wrote likewise *>fti Gen. 1 : 12, 21, or with the full orthography 
ft n — . Appended to the words 3&J , nx and Din which before stiff, take 
the forms HiK, etc., the suff. of the 2d and 3d per. sing, take the forms T\ , 
">ft, tfri; the last of which forms occurs also elsewhere as a noun-suffix. 
Gen. 3 : 5. Est. 1 : 12. 

The same forms are attached to prepositions, (excepting such as are 
originally plural nouns, § 44. 2.) and to the signs of cases b, n^ , etc. ; as 



•$', la-, ftn^, etc. See be 


low § 44. 








II. 


SUFFIXES TO 


NOUNS 


PLUEAL. 




Singular suffixes. 






Plural suffixes. 




1. c. *— 

2. m. TT-, T\- I 

2. f. rc— , ^—' | 


my 
thy 






our 
your 


3. m. '•nV, *i 

3. f. Kft— , (ft^— Dan.7 


his 
7, 19.) her 






their 



g 9, OTHER PRONOUNS. 29 



N te i. These suffixes are n gularly appended, however, only to plo- 
r; ,l masculine. Indeed, it ia from the termination of such nouns, thai the 
i comes, which appears in the Buffix of the 2d per. sing, and in all the plu- 

Bffixes. I'Yminines lir.|iiriitl\- ink.- the sing. Mill'. "'— . n — 

Gen, 80: L7. Dan. 2:32, 5:2. Bz. I: 17, 6: 18. I . I : 1. Proy. I : 18. 
it : '.». In Syriac this ia constantly the case. The < lhaldee exhibits 
a medium between the u Bage of the Hebrew and thai of the Syriac. 

q 2, The suffix 7p— is in some editions written Tl*"— or ~""— . 
Frequently it appears abbreviated ~- I >;ui. 5:10. :i Sam. 11: 
Ps. 1 19 : I.— s<> also the feminine rf.— is in many editions written ~— . so 
thai the genders are nol distinguished. lea. 19; 18. Ven. 

Note I. The possessive pronoun may be expressed separately from its 
noun by appending suffixes to b*«j (comp. of the relative *a . and b . sign 
oi* the dative case); or. more rarely, to tit (comp. of *»? relative and*, 
sign of the genitive case); e. g. ife** lfyo t thy king, lit. the king who [ig] 
to thee. Usage has however made these particles mere signs of the geni- 
tive; for even to them •n (relative) is prefixed. 

Note 4. Prepositions which are originally plural nouns take the suffixes 
of pi. nouns; e. g. ^na; vr-ri;? , -rybr. ) ia^Si . See § 44. 2. So also 
do rn» [=Heb. cvj rV> its negative, and was, as; e. g. W«, '"T-b. 
yirp&S, and the suffix must be rendered in the nominative case. 

§ 9. Other Pronouns. 

1. The Demonstrative Pronov/ns are, sing. masc. sn 

(W Gen. 37 : 19, W Job 9 : 24,) ft, H (pyy Jer. 
26 : 9 ;) fern. f} , *n ; com. fM , an , (fW ,) ^ (Ps. 24 : 6, 
52 : 8,) this, that; plur. com. pj?», fr*K, b», *j>« $ew, 

Note. With the Hebrew article. BMfiri, ysxn (Ex. 20: 1) are equiva- 
lent to our expressions this very, precisely this. So also are the forms 
Kims, KW«, MTW (Ruth 1 : 16. Lam. 1 : 4.) 

2. The Relative Pronoun is 1 (as a }U'efix), or "H * 
(as a separate word), of both genders and both numbers. 
It designates regularly the Nominative or Accusative. 
How the other oblique cases are indicated, see in Syntax 

§ so: 

3. The Interrogative Pronouns are expressed, some- 
times, according to the Hebrew analogy, by ""? who? of 



* In the Egyptian Aramean inscriptions *t and n? . Comp. the Heb. AT 



30 § 10. VERBS ; DERIVATION AND INFLECTION. 

persons, (whence im for *n i« Pro v. 20 : 6, 27 : 4,) and 
tf E (™) wto# f of things : sometimes, by prefixing the 
interrogative particle *« to the demonstrative pronoun : 
PTS m - *T? £ OTO, «T0). The latter mode is rather 
more expressive, who indeed? who then? 

On the mode of designating the reflexive and recipro- 
cal sense of pronouns, compare Syntax, § 49. 1. 



CHAPTER III 
VERBS. 



§ 10. Derivation and inflection of verbs generally. 

1. Verbs^as in Hebrew, are generally primitive. A 
few are formed from nouns, and are called denominatives ; 
e. g. p$D to eradicate, E^ftifsi to take root, from ww a 
root; ^<}xr} to pitch a tent, from tfbna a tent; yiiBP\i»« to 
he acquainted, from T\in an acquaintance. 

2. The roots of verbs consist, generally, of three con- 
sonants which are pronounced in one syllable with the 
vowel — under the middle radical. A few consist of four 
consonants [quadriliterals], and are pronounced with — — ; 
as bsno to cover. The root is the third person singular 
masculine Praeter, and from this are derived, not only the 
other parts of the active voice, but a passive consisting 
of the same moods and tenses. 

. Derivative Conjugations. 

3. As in Hebrew, other forms, derived from the root 
and analogous to it, are employed to express various 
modifications of the original sense. These also are con- 
jugated through an active and a passive voice. They 
are generally two, ba£ and bojpx . These, as well as the 



; DERIVATION and im i.i « 



ground-form, are called conjugations; bo tl may 

reckon in Chaldee three osua] conjugations, each in- 
cluding an active and a passive voice. For the unusual 
conjugations, Shaphel, Po£l, Pile], sec § 1 I. 

■I. Characteristics cmd signification of tlu conjugar 
turns, ( 1 ) The 2d conjugation or Pa£] is characterized, 
like the Hebrew Piel, by Daghesh forte in the 2d radi- 
cal, (a) It-- signification is usually ccmsatiwe, when Peal 
is intransitive : as D?n to & wise, =rH to make wis< : ~'~ to 
In while, ":h to make white, to wash, (b) Frequently 
Pael has merely the Bense of exhibiting, rega/rdmg, or treat- 
ing n person as being or doing what is expressed in Peal ; 
e. g. yi2 to lie, -~? to regard am as a liar, to con/vict one 
of falsehood, (c) Sometimes it is privative ; as 1*h to 
removt ashes ; -£? to clear out stones, 

(2 ) The characteristic of the 3d conjugation or Aphel 
is s (sometimes n) prefixed to the root, and the vowel - 
(or — ) in the last syllable. In signification it is usually 
(a) causative of Peal (especially in verbs which want 
Pael, though fyoth are sometimes found; e. g. pQD, jn$). 
Thus rnb to put on, ©aba to cause [another] to put on, to 
clothe, ayn to sm y "vprifc to seduce or entice to sin. Some- 
times, {/>) like Pael, it has merely the sense of exhibiting, 
<$5C., e. g. p^s to show [ci person] to he righteous, to treat 
as righteous, to acquit. 

Note. The same conjugations are not in use in all verbs. A lar^e 
number appear only in Peal, others in Pael only; for examples of the latter 
compare iai, "on, rso, nbo. Where the same verb has both Pael and 
Aphel these two conjugations, for the most part, have different senses; 
e. g. rfeiq to advise, Tj^x to constitute a king. 

5. The Passives of all the conjugations are character- 
ized by the prefon native syllable na . The n of this pre- 
fix is sometimes assimilated to the succeeding letter, or 
transposed with it, as follows. 



32 § 10. VERBS ; DERIVATION AND INFLECTION. 

(a) When the active form commences with 1 , t: or ri , 
the M of the passive prefix is assimilated, and expressed by 
Daghesh forte in the following letter ; e. g. W8 , ttstpK , 
"Dfttf , from W , nstj and inn . Less frequently, and only 
in the later Targums, does the same assimilation take 
place before other letters ; e. g. araypsi ^ i? written, for 
atresia , Eccl. 12 : 10. 

(5) If the ground-form commences with a sibilant [T , 
D, s ? to or tij], the fi is inserted after that letter; e. g. 
panes . But after T , it is changed into *i ; as I^Ttf from 
■pQT ; and after ar into tt ; as ^jraa from rra . 

The signification of these forms is not merely passive, 
but sometimes reflexive or reciprocal ; as ^ttinsi to consult 
together ; frequently, even in the sense of the Greek mid- 
dle voice ; e. g. lanoa to get an advantage. 

Moods and Tenses. 

6. All these conjugations have, in both active and 
passive voices, the Praeter and Future tenses, the Infini- 
tive and Imperative moods, and the Participle. The ac- 
tives have two participles throughout. All these arise 
out of the ground-form, mediately or , immediately, by 
the insertion of formative letters, or by a different pro- 
nunciation of the radicals, or by both together. The dif- 
ferent persons of the Praeter and Imperative are formed, 
as in Hebrew, by suffixes, and the Future by prefixes and 
suffixes, originally fragments of personal pronouns. 

7. Verbs are either regular or irregular. The former 
class includes all those verbs, the radicals of which remain 
unchanged throughout all their inflections ; the latter, 
those which suffer a change or omission of one or two 
radicals. 



II. i:i 01 i.\i: \ i BBS J imi.i I D< 

g 11, Inflection qf the Regular Perb. 

1. Most nearly connected with the Praeter stands the 
Irrvperative, from which the Future is derived. The tm- 

ttive of Peal is characterized by the vowel— ; those 
of Pari and Aphel are like the Praeterof the same conju- 
gation. 

2. The Fiitiu-r is derived from the Imperative by pre- 
fixing' 1 ; which is pronounced in Peal with -,in Pari 
with — , in Aphel (where the x suffers elision) with — . 
and in all the Passives with — [n^]. 

8. The Injmiti/Vi is formed from the Praeter in two 
ways, (a) In Peal by'the prefix tf. (L) In the other 
conjugations and in all the Passives, by the suffocative 
syllables S-— . 

4. The Pa/rticiples are also derived from the Praeter, 
and are formed, (a) In Peal, by merely changing the 
vowels, b-jj: , b'rojj ; (/,) In all the other conjugations and 
in the Passives, by prefixing e which is pronounced in 
Pael with — , in Aphel with - and in the Passives with 
— , na . Of the two Participles in the Active forms, the 
first has _ constantly in the last syllable, and is active ; 
the second has — in the ultimate, with a passive significa- 
tion. 

5. The formation of the persons is more simple in the 
Praeter and Imperative, in the Future more complex. 
The following table exhibits the letters and syllables em- 
ployed in forming the different persons. 

Sin- 8. in. 8. f. 2. in. 2. f. 1. c. PI. 3. m. 3. f. 2. in. 2. f. 1. c. 

Praeter. — P— H— Fi— r— *— S— JW*— -,P— x:— 

Imperat — i— : 5 — nj — 

Future — ■« — n — n "p.— n — x ?— "■ "17-^ V - r *— n ~ : 

6. When sufformatives are added which take the 
tone, 

* 3 



34 § 12. REGULAR VERBS ; NOTES ON THE PARADIGM. 

(a) The vowels — , — and — (the latter only in the 
Fut. Peal) of the final syllable of the ground-form, are 
droj3ped, provided the sufformative commences with a 
vowel. Those which precede *i and K— of the 3d person 
plural Praeter, and the termination of the Imp., since 
these sufformatives do not take the tone, are retained. 

(h) In the 3d pers. fern, and 1st pers. com. sing. Praet. 
in Peal and Ithpeel, where two consonants would, accord- 
ing to the above rule, come together without a vowel, 
Hhireq is introduced to facilitate pronunciation. 

Note. The principal variations of the Chaldee, from the mode of form- 
ing the persons in Hebrew, are, that, in the former, the 2d p. sing. Praet. 
has, generally, no distinction of gender, while the 3d p. plur. has; and that 
the 3. plur. fem. Fut. takes * instead of n for its preformative. The suf- 
formatives of the Future (e. g. "j— ) are capable of an easier explanation 
than in Hebrew. 

§ 12. Notes on the paradigm of the Regular Verbs. 

I. Generally. 

1. Forms with — are often written fully ( h — ) or even with — , e. g. 

a. 1 sing, and 2. f. plur. Praeter; as r^sia Gen. 3 : 10, (PWB Pseudo- 
Jonathan,) •pnins' Ex. 1 : 18. Ps. Jon. 

b. Pael and' Aphel ; e. g. -p'sri* 2 K. 6 : 23. t&*£a Ps. 16 : 2. 

c. The Part. act. in Pe. e. g. rns Dan. 4 : 10. 20. h^33 Gen. 3 : 15. Jeru. 
Targ. *nt3 Gen. 3 : 9. Pseudo-Jon. should doubtless be read "DO . 

d. The Participle Peil sometimes, though seldom, appears in a con- 
tracted form ; as bpri Dan. 5 : 27. 

2. Praeter. The 2. p. sing. masc. sometimes as KH^P Prov. 23:8. 
2 Sam. 14:13. The 1st pers. sing. m. sometimes appears in the form 
n^ap, Gren. 3:10, 13^ Pseud. Jon.; or even like the 2d person; e. g. 
xn^ips , Gen. 3:22. Pseud. Jon. The 3. p. pi. m. sometimes in the later 
Targums takes a paragogic ) ; e. g. ^"O? Gen. 3 : 7. "pinaia Ps. 148 : 7. 
The fem. sometimes appears ending in "j-— ; as V35* Ruth 1 : 10, fjBX 1 : 19. 

3. Future. Instead of the formative "• the Targum of Proverbs, in ac- 
cordance with the Syriac, exhibits also 3 ; e. g. feW'73 Prov. 16:10, etc. 
Compare Dathe. de ratione consensus version. Chald. el Syr. Prov. Leip- 
zig, 1764. pp. 16. — Instead of V , appears 1 as termination of the 3d p. pi. 
m. Ez. 4: 12. 53nv 

4. Infinitive. The biblical Chaldee has H— sometimes instead of K— r 
termination of all the Inf. excepting Peal. Dan. 2:12. 14. Ez. 7:14. 
Dan. 6:4. In the Targums sometimes appears r*i (without suffixes) 
Esth. 1 : 5. Ps. 102 : 23. Sometimes the characteristic ending X— is 



/ 12. BBGULAB VERB8J W0TE8 OM im. PARADIGM. 35 

omitted; as 1 Sam. 26: Pael, Aphel and the P ivt have 

sometimes a ~ prefixed to the Inf e. g. Kaina Sol. S. 1:7. x-x:- 
Deul Ferusalem Targ. Forms like win Lev. 13 : 7. Jon. "•ij'inrH 

Job i : 13] '•Biop^ Deut 11 : 10. Jer. T., with | "— - . . are more 

rare. 

5. Pct88ivea. Instead of the preformative rx the biblical Chaldee fre- 
NjiirinK exhibits rr; (Ez. 6:2, &c); the later Targums in the 1st. conj. 

e.g. ic.r; l Sam. 23:7; (agreeing with the Rabbinical conj. Nith- 
pael); and in 'the Inf. of all the conj. no; as »oj?9n» Ex. 21 : 20, Jer. T. 
xp'rr.q^ Dent. \\i : I. Jer. T. On the other hand Proil Winer in the second 
ed. of his grammar remarks that the Participles sometimes drop their ini- 
tial a, and cites as examples St^asTK Job 28 :21, and £*avnnM ( ren. 31 : 15, 
J. T.j but Walton's Polyglot! has in these passages 6HO»a and wawnnM. 

II. Notes on the several eonjogattons. 

1. Peal. a. Some verbs, especially such as arc intransitive, take — ("— ) 
or — (■'— ) and a few i as the characteristic vowel of the Praeterj e. g. 
rxz to be evil, attta to be good, zr^ to ait, -"=r to lie (recline), t)pR to be 
strong, ~" -"} to sleep, Gen. 2 : 21, aiiri to be dry. These vowels remain in 
those persons where — is usually retained; e. g. Pbst13 Prov. 30: 7, x:bxd 
Ez. 5 : 9. "pbc 1 : 12, Wl^n Jer. 49: 4. The 3d p. sing. rem. also retains iis 
vowel; as rboa K/.. 1 : 24, naiin Ezek. 26:2.— Such verbs in -or - 
form the. Imp. in — . — or — ; as vzb I K. 22: 30. bix Gen. 22: :i. anpj 
Job 2 : 5 ; the Future in — , — or 1 ; as ttJaaR Dan.5 : 16, 2^nri Deut. 28 : 30, 
Cp'prr (Jen. 31 : 35. When two forms of the Future, as — and —.or - and 
■ coexist in the same verb, they have different significations; «\ g. -~~"! 
Num. 1:51. [who] will approach, (Future.) -"£"? lea. 5:19. let [it] ap- 
proach. (Optative.) etc. But verbs in i form the Fut. in *) ; e. g. 7i*-1") 
Ps. 121 : 1. 

6. The Infinitive, in the later Targums, has sometimes the termination 
X 7 ; e. g. K^SOB Ps. 118:7. Sometimes it has the form bttpjB . Job 29 : 6. 
Ruth 4:6; less frequently like the Heb. biu^ or b";ap ; e. g. Gen. 49: 6. 
Ruth 2:1. Ps. 105 : 14, (even with suff..) or as'lnf absol. ^TOJ3 Lev. 13:7. 
Pseud. Jon. 

c. The Imperative exhibits, in a few instances, the full orthography 
brj£, 2 Sam. 13:20. Ps. 31 : 24. It sometimes occurs with Hholem in 
accordance with Hebrew analogy ; as *pna Ps. 26 : 2 ; especially with suf- 
fixes ; e. g. "^bi-Jp 1 Sam. 20 : 8. 

2. Ithpeel. The last syllable sometimes takes — ( n — ) ; e.g. F^ncn 
Dan. 2 : 44. comp. 2 K. 7 : 4. Prov. 3 : 5. Gen. 9 : 7. *3WnK Eccl. 12 :' 11. 
Sometimes — ; as :53r\x Gen. 14: 15. — Preformative sometimes rx . 
Dan. 7:15. 

3. Pael. N preformative of 1. sing. Fut. has sometimes — ; e. g. ^&a&j 
Isa. 42 : 9, DSbOK 63 : 3 ; and even ^— ; as b^q^bX Deut. 32: L Jon., where 
the Jer. T. has b*&»K .—As in Hebrew. Daghesh forte is sometimes 
omitted when the middle radical has Sheva. 

4. Ithpaal. Final vowel sometimes — or -7; e. g. -2Qrx Hos. 4:11. 



36 § 13. PARTICIPLES ; PERSONAL INFLECTION. 

rfSJina Ps. 105 : 25, $3ima Gen. 3 : 15, Jer. T. Heb. Pua] forms occa- 
sionally appear instead of this conjugation ; as ^TE Isa. 53 ; 5, * ( *^r^ 
Gen. 28 : 17, Jon. T-*?? Gen - 37 : 3 > Jon - 

5. Aphel. In the biblical Chaldee. and occasionally in the Targums n 
appears, as the preformative of this conj. (b^pn ), and even in the Fut. 
and Part, after the characteristic prefixes ; e. g. ^P^r] Ez. 5 : 12. W^ari 
Dan. 5 : 29. bairrn 7 : 24, p^t:nn Ez. 4: 13, pa^iia 6: 10.— Hiphil some-* 
times takes the place of Aphel in the biblical Chaldee; e. g. ^FWrt Dan. 
5 : 20, 7 : 22. 

6. Ittaphal. For this conjugation, which indeed elsewhere is seldom 
found, the biblical Chaldee constantly exhibits Hophalj e. g. Ez. 4: 15, 
Dan. 4 : 33, 7 : 1 1, (with Qamets Hhatuph or Shureq.) 

§ 13. Personal inflection of the Participles. 

1. The Participles of all the conjugations, in order to 
supply the want of a Present tense, are, as in Hebrew, 
construed with the separate Personal Pronouns of the 
first and second persons ; e. g. tfJK bpp I Mil. Beside this 
mode, the Chaldee has one peculiar to itself, viz., to inflect 
the Participle by the addition of pronominal fragments, 
thus forming in fact a new tense. The two Participles 
Peal are, after this mode, inflected as follows. 

First Participle. 
Sing. Plur. 

2 m. nbpp * T^bpp 

2 f. ^nbpp inbpj? 

1 m. ajbpp pbt:)? 

1 f. tfjtfbpp ijbtpjj 

2. In the biblical Chaldee a kind of passive preterite 
tense is in use, formed by appending the sufformatives of 
the Praeter to the Part. Peil. It takes the place of Ith- 
peel. 

1. c. 2. f. 2. m. 8. f. 3. m. 

r^P!? ^t?j? ari-r6">pi? nb^pp b^pp Sing. 

tf?b^pjp in^pjp pPfrtpj? abipi? *ib^pjp Plur. 

* Qcltelath, not qotlath, § 2. 9. a. The learner should bear in mind that a 
knowledge of forms alone can enable him to distinguish Qamets Hhatuph from 
Qamets. 



JSeco? 


ic? Participle. 


Sing. 


Plur. 


nb^pp 


pn^oj? 


ifib'VDj? 


■jnb^pp 


ajb^pp 


ir^i? 


ajab^pp 


Ijbipp 



■ ' 1 I. l.">. \ BBR6 w I in 01 i M i:\i 9. 87 



,,,,. Dan. 5:27, 28, 30, 7: I. 6, LI. Ezra S: 14. Thai I 
nn , t.» be considered forma ol P »ter Peal with — ia plain, partly from 
tl,,.,,- | unification, and partly from the facl that oth« r fbrmi of the 

same are usually employed in the Praeter in an acthri 

§ l \. Unfrequent Conjugations and Quadriliterah. 

1. As in Hebrew, certain unfrequent conjugations 
occur, some of which are confined to particular classes of 
irregular verbs. 

</. Pod and likpoal, characteristics, same as in He- 
brew ; e. g. ppic Hos. L3 : 5, --'c Num. 11 : L2 ; especially 
in verbs "" ; as roi«, crairrtja . 

h. PM and Tihpold^ in verbs if*; e. g. morn Ps. 75 : B. 
Dan. 4 : 34, Dtfrttjajl Dan. 5 : 23. V>. 101 : 25V 

r. /V,/;m.l TihpaJd; as tra^D^lWK. 

rf. Patpd^ formed by repeating £he first and third 
radicals and IthpoJjpal ; e. g. '"'"- Gen. 11:9, DTOM , 
(from wo) Judg. 3:22, *n?3 (from tpn) Ps. 143:3. 

mp.§§ L9, 22. 

e. ShapM and TsTdcuphd : e. g. bb:>tr Ez. 4 : 12. Gen. 
49 : 10, innate Gen. 49 : 10, bhagti? Kz. 4 : 13. 

fiWBi Ez. G : 15, is Shaphel from K2f; . Gen. 2 : 2, without X. *X*ti ; 
Passive "S^irrx to procure the completion of a things, tojinish. 

2. QuadrUiteral verbs follow usually the form of Pael ; 
e. g. STOg (Syr. ^\i i. q. xarrryoQelv) Job 37 : 20, baiO 
20:15, nrin to interpret. The origin of these verbs is 
to be explained, for the most part, as in Hebrew. See 
Gesenius Lehrgeb. p. 861, seq. 

Note. Altogether peculiar is the verb S^ttj (r-t-r) Dan. 3 : 28. Fid. 
WV*tin Isa. 53 : 11. /«/. n:r: Dan. 3:15. Pare. SPptta Dan. 6 : 28. Pass. 
rrrrx Gen. 32:30. Syr. ^]^jL . This Chaldee form should however 
be regarded rather as a kind of Poel than as a quadriliteral. 

§ 15. Verbs irith Gutturals. 
1. The gutturals (», fl, n , 2, and to some extent also, 
*i) present the same peculiarities as in Hebrew. It will 



38 § 15. VERBS WITH GUTTURALS. 

be sufficient therefore to give examples of the most im- 
portant forms. 

2. Verbs Pe guttural. Peal, Praet. "D? f. trw 2. m. 
rrq? 1. c. rrn?, Imp. in?, to?, Ya$, bra, (^7$), "Wi* 
Ex. 4 : 4, fern, ^n?, (^a« Gen. 12 : 13), Plur. rrnig Ex. 
5 : 16, ™* Ban. 2 : 9, Inf. Wa tisja''; Fut. ^irrn, lasn, 
12*1! , p'njp , Participles nn? , Tp? . — Ithpeel, "rnigns , "Qgnai . 
— P<m£, Praet. nay , Fut. ^a?? . — Ithpaal, ^awna . — 4?M 
Praet. "DS^ , lonx , a-nna ? Fut. cpbrp , esrn 5 Part, qbn-a . 

3. Verbs Ayin guttural. Peal, Praet. fna f. narn y 
1. c. n^rr ; Imp. ^na ; (fina) ; Inf. inati ; Fut. }na;> ; Part. 
^na , ^na . — ItJipeel, jnasna , ^naris . — Pae7, tthn , Inf. xanp . 
— Aphel, inaa . 

4. Verbs Lamedh guttural. Peal, Praet. rptj fern. 
nna^ ; Imp. fiarc ■ TO© ; Fut. fia^ , nbtj? (:ra^) ; Part. 
nat), rnptj. — Iikpeel, npnrca , • fern, nrrprncs: . — Parf Praet. 
na© , Fut. naE? ; Part. act. ra©£ Dan. 4 : 34. — Itkpaal, 
nanraa , — Apliel, r\ym , rrafta , 1st. pers. msm . 

Note 1. When the first radical of a verb Pe guttural happens to be it, 
this letter is frequently dropped in Ithpeel when it would be without a 
vowel (i. e. would have a composite Sheva), and by way of compensation, 
r of the prefix takes Daghesh forte; e. g. ^nfrK instead of 'iflKPfit Num. 
15: 13, 35:33. 

Note 2. Verbs Lamedh guttural have the Praet. 3. sing. fem. some- 
times terminating in — — or — — (the latter only in verbs -ft) with the 
tone on the penult; e. g. Max' Gen. 30:16, hHxJtf Dan. 5: 10, r^OT 
Gen. 16 : 3. 

Note 3. When the 1st radical takes a ccmp. Sheva. verbs KS and 
ri's usually have — , Dan. 2:9. Sol. S. 5:3.; verbs Ha and SB, gene- 
rally — . 

Note 4. Forms like "pGnn Dan. 7 : 22, belong not to Aphel but to Hi- 
phil, and are Hebraisms. 

Note 5. Occasionally verbs with N for their second radical, exhibit * 
instead of that letter in Pael ; as b*ti from bw&] ■)*» from ^KUJ. See 
§ 6. d. 



' 16. EUEGtJLAB VERBS WITH SUFFIX PRONOUNS. . 89 

^ hi. Regular Verbs with suffix Pronouns. 

1. of the ^uili.\<'< given above in fche t<-ii>!< . 

those which begin with a vowel, are generally appen led 
to verba] forma terminating in a consonant; and via 
versa, those which begin with a consonantj to verbal 
forms terminating in a vowel. The Imperative and Par- 
ticiples must be excepted, as they frequently take those 
suffixes (of the 1st pers. sing, and plur.) which have no 
union-vowel; as ^boj? , Kjbojj . 

2. The changes which verbs undergo in consequence 
of the accession of pronominal suffixes, rc-pect chiefly 
the vowels, which are sometimes dropped, sometimes 
transposed. Sec Paradigm II. 

{</) /Vr/7, Praeter. Before suffixes which have a 
union-vowel the 3d pers. Bing. niasc. lias the form btjj? ; as 
Sfbtpj? In hiUed tin,, Kjbttj? he killed us, V^ttg he MUed them 
| tJiOSi ni< ii ]. Before fb and "j? the original form remain-. 
The 3d pers. plur. masc. becomes *'*-", (before fia and J5, 
ybv$ ,) the fern, which is rare, b-jj? ; as ^bcp , ^nbog , the 2d 
masc. wfcttjj. The 2d pers. sing, remains unchanged, 
though in a few cases we have for the fern, ^Sp, Jer. 
1"> : 10. The 1st pers. sing, takes the form r'™, (rarely 
"T^i?, as Num. 23 : 11, Jer. 30 : 14, or tfrvg Gen. 3 : 22, 
Pseudo-Jon.) The 1st pers. plur. has the form jbttj? and 
takes suffixes for the most part with the union-vowel — ; 
e. g. ^ T -^P we hilled him. 

In the Venice Polyglott. and occasionally in Walton, the 3d p. sing, 
masc. Praet. retains its vowel under the second radical ; as finblB for ftfibflj . 

(b) Future. The 3d fern., 2d masc., and 1st pers. sing, 
receive suffixes precisely like the 3d pers, masc, and that, 
for the most part, with Nun epenthetic. The 2d and 
3d persons plural fern, take the form of the masculine, 



40 , § 17. IRREGULAR VERBS GENERALLY. 

i. e. with suff. these forms are common. See Job 19 : 15. 
Gen. 30:13. Ex. 1 : 16. 

(c) Imperative. Forms with — in the 2d pers. plur. 
masc. throw this vowel back to the first radical before 
suffixes ; e. g. ^rybix Ex. 16 : 25. 

(d) The Inf. and Part. Peal, having the form of 
nonns, may take the suffixes either of verbs or of nouns ; 
as ^tp|tt and ?*£$$ . 

(e) In all those persons of Paiil and Aphel, which ter- 
minate in the third radical, — is dropped before suffixes 
which have a union vowel. The same takes place, (on 
account of the tone being thrown forward,) in the forms 
Step ? $®£? • The 2d pers. sing, fern., the 2d pers. plur. 
masc, and the 1st pers. plur. in the Praeter receive suf- 
fixes as in Peal. 

(/) The Infinitives of all the conjugations except 
Peal take before suffixes the termination tr\ ; e. g. frprnbap, 
i^rffrajja'. (Sometimes, though rarely, this ending ap- 
pears out of the suffix state. Ps. 102 : 32. Num. 9 : 17. 
Est. 1 : 5.) 

Note 1. An epenthetic 3 is frequently inserted between the verb and 
the suffix. This is most common in the Fut. and Imp. ; rare in the Praet. 
(ex. Ps. 16:7. Isa. 63:9. Gen. 6:2. Jud. 13:23. 2 K. 20:13;) and 
still less frequent in the Inf. (Prov. 22 : 21. Sol. S. 6 : 11.) 

Note 2: In the Targum on Prov. appears an epenthetic "> ; e. g. ?£35ilJFi , 
n?pan, 4:6, 8. 

§ 17. Irregular Verbs generally. 

1. Of these there are, as in Hebrew, two general 
divisions, defective and quiescent. The irregularity gen- 
erally respects but one letter. Verbs which exhibit irre- 
gularity in two of their radicals are called doubly anoma- 
lous, § 24. 

2. The first general division comprehends two classes, 
viz. fb, and &■ ; the second, four, viz. as, 4 (is), y$ (fh>\ 



,' 19, tBR] QULAB \ I BBS ; .w i.n hui BLED. 1 1 

ancLrfb. The last include also such verbsasiu Hebrew 
belong fco the class Kb . 

Note. The division of irregular verbs into defective and v" «a nf, ia not 
pecial importance, and la neglected by the most recent grammari 

§ 18. Verbs Pe Nun. 

The irregularity in these verbs results from the Bame 
cause, and is almost throughout the same as in Hebrew. 

1. The letter D, where it would otherwise terminate a 
mixed syllable, is assimilated to the succeeding consonant ; 
e. g. pE^2 for psjtt. 

2. In the Iniper. Peal, where : would regularly stand 
without a vowel in the beginning of a syllable, that let- 
ter is ordinarily dropped; e.g. pE fbrp&J, (^M, Jer. 25 : 2t.) 
Beside these, which are common to Hebrew, 

3. Some forms have, usually, a different characteristic 
vowel from that of regular verbs: thus the Future is 
generally like ps^ or pis'?; Aphel p^. In the Imp, the 
forms p-s , p"'s and pfi are about equally common, though 
not ordinarily found in the same verb. 

4. Ithpeel, Pael, and Ithpaal present no irregularity. 

Note 1. From No. ]. there are many exceptions, chiefly in verbs which 
have a guttural for the second radical; e.g. Dina? Isa. 5 : 9. ">"ri:~ Prov. 

29:13. (But rn: is inflected according to the rule above; as Fut. r:r,^ 
[instead of ~*^" , j. Aphel rnnx .) Also in some others; e. g. "1F137 Dan. 
2 : 16, ir:n Ez. 7 : 20. ptt* Ps.'91 : 7, pwn Ez. 5: 14. 

Note 2. The verb *r: takes — in the Fut. as its characteristic vowel; 
e. g. IPX Ex. 25 : 16, )V\T\ Deut. 21 : 8. Once — , ■)&£ Dan. 2 ; 16. 

§ 19. Verba Ayin doubled. 

The anomalies of these verbs, which accord only in 
part with the same class in Hebrew, are particularly the 
following. 

(a) The root is a monosyllable, with its vowel be- 
tween the first and second radicals, in Peal, (excepting 
the participles,) and in Aphel ; and bo, either 



42 § 20. IRREGULAR VERBS ; PE YODH. 

(1) No trace of the doubling of the second radical 
remains ; as is the case in Peal Praet. 3d pers. sing, masc, 
2d masc. and fern., and in the 1st and 2d persons plur., in 
the Imp. masc. sing, and fern, plur., and more rarely in 
the 1st Part. ; e. g. p^i , pil , ttj?^ ; or 

(2) It is indicated by Daghesh forte in the 2d radical 
in those persons of the Praet. and Imp. Peal, the sufform- 
atives of which commence with a vowel ; as tip* , tf ^ ? 
*fpk ; or, finally, 

(3) It is compensated by Daghesh forte in the first 
radical in the Fut. and Inf. Peal, and throughout Aphel ; 
as p^$ , pw ; or even sometimes, in Ithpeel, in M of the 
preformative syllable fitf ; e. g. pina . 

(5) Instead of Paiil and IilypacH, which are regularly 
formed,' (see Dan. 4 : 10, 7 : 20. Ps. 35 : 15, 42 : 6,) Pal- 
pel and Ithpdl/pal are generally used ; as pyg* , p^at , 
Job 9 : 17, 30 : 14. Isa. 21 : 9 ; or Poel and Ithpoal ; e. g. 
Dan. 4 : 15. Job 9 : 6, Sprint!. 

The Participles of Peal are usually regular. The second, or Peil, ap- 
pears once in the form p" 1 ]"?^ Ex. 32 : 20. 

An example of Ithpeel regularly formed, is titans Am. 7 : 1. Jer. 
50 : 27. 

The following from the Biblical Chaldee are Hebraistic forms. Aph. 
■^SH Dan. 2 : 24. ^p^Si 6 : 25, p*ffn 2 : 40 ; Hoph. h-'H . sfepn Dan. 5 : 13, 15. 
For such forms as nbssh Dan. 4 : 3, and nVwn Gen. 19 :'l0. Jon. ; see § 2, 7. a. 

§ 20. Verbs Pe Yodh (Pe Vav). 

1. There are three classes of verbs which, in the 
ground form, have *> for their first radical, viz. (1) Verbs 
originally IS ; (2) Verbs properly 4 ; and (3) Those in 
which the ^ is not treated as a quiescent, but is assimi- 
lated like the : of verbs fa . 

2. Verbs originally IS, which constitute the most 
numerous class. 

(a) In the Imp. Peal, which is generally pronounced 



I. [RRE01 LAB \ ERB8 ; PB rODH. LS 

with —, drop the firsl radical ; <•. g. T\ from rr, an from 
nn\ :rn from aiij, 

(A) In the Future Peal retain it quiescent in — , in 
consequence of which the Lasl syllable takes — or n — as 
its characteristic rowel; e. g, ~'-"" , CpV 1 ?, In accordance 
with the remark § 6. c (4), the quiescent ^ is, in these 
forms, frequently dropped; e. g. Prow 11 :25. Ps, 104: 4. 
Job. 8:4. 

(c) Resume their original l, which quiesces in Eho- 
lcm, throughout Aphel and Ittaphal; e. g. "~""\ r-c-, 
Cjcipu*. Comp. nr-n Bqph. Job 33 : L9. 

[thpeel ;uul the wholi of the 2d conj. are for the most part regular. In 

the latter, some verbs retain * as their first radical ; e. g. W^HJ P • vv : 13, 

5<nr"rs Reel. 9:3. In Ajilicl forma with h, after the preformatrves of 

the Put. and Part., arc not uncommon: e. L r . Witon Dan. 2:5. 5:17. 

: II. 

3. The first radical of verbs originally 4 quiesces, 
{«) Iu Put. Pe, ordinarily in - ; e. g. IjT! 1 'J Kings 

1 : 1-4, to*? Ps. 102 : 12. But compare 30* Isa. 7 : 18. 

(J) In Aphel, in -; e. g. n^ Ps. 49: L9. Jer. 
10 : 5. Mic. 1 : 8. But compare W^ Zech. 11 : 2. 

The difference between these two classes of verbs is not, however, so 

great as to prevent their forms being frequently interchanged, especially 
in Aphel. Tims we have, at the same time. -"ifX and -'J'X Gen. 17 : 16. 
b^ix and b-»an, Ps. 66 : 6, -£*x and igia , pa* , (in Heb. ""Dj becomes in 

Aphel p^rx. 

4. A class of verbs ^b assimilate their first radical to 
the following letter, in the Inf. and Fut. Peal, and in 
Aphel ; so that they are in these forms entirely analo- 
gous to verbs )h . To this class belong nr , Aphel ir*3M ; 
*??, Aphel rarn, Deut. 34:6, Jon.; C|p?, Aphel epp»; 
also in some of their forms, TV] , nn^ and '"?; ; e. g. Inf. 
5*jri Gen. 15 : 13, 3Pfia Ps. 133 : 1, bs* Num. 13 : 31. Fat. 
VT± 1 Sam. 20 : 30, (even VW Is. 4 : 15. Dan. 2 : 9,) also 
*T3 ; MK 2 Sam. 16 : 18, to? Ezek. 7 : 19. 



44 §§ 21, 22. IRREGULAR VERBS \ PE ALEPH ; A YIN VAV. 

§ 21. Verbs Pe Aleph. 

A few verbs a© are treated not only as gutturals, but 
at the same time as quiescents ; viz. 

(a) "TDK , fea , ana; , 1^ . The a of these verbs, in 
the Future and Inf. Peal quiesces in — ; e. g. &&iy, and 
sometimes is even exchanged for ^ ; as *p\? , W'a . 
Throughout Aphel it becomes i; as bsia, "Dia. (b^a 
Dent. 32 : 13, is altogether peculiar.) An instance of 
Hqphal, l^n , occurs Dan. 7:11. 

"pax in its third conjugation takes the Hebraizing form "potf! , (as if by 
contraction from "p»Nrt ,) Gen. 15 : 6. Job 4 : 18, 15 : 22. Pass. Ma^iW 
Gen. 42 : 20.— For KPa'see § 24. 2. 

(h) 12$ : , qb& and aoa frequently take in the Fut. and 
Part. Pael, the contracted form ^btf tf , qbtftt , in consequence 
of which a is frequently dropped. 

(c) The a of some others is dropped in Ithpaal and 
compensated by Daghesh forte in ri of the prefix, which 
also receives the vowel which belonged to a ; e. g* "ian\8 
for naana 1 Sam. 2 : 5. Ezek. 47 : 11. 

§ 22. Verbs Ay in Vav (Ay in Ybdh). 

The commutation of 1 and i , in these verbs, is more 
abundant in Chaldee than in Hebrew. The following 
particulars are worthy of notice. 

1. In the first conjugation (with the exception of the 
1st Part, which has the form Dtfjj) and in the third, these 
verbs are monosyllabic throughout ; as D]? , D£ft , D^pSj . 
The preformatives of the Fut. and Inf. of both conjuga- 
tions generally have — , though in the later Targums, they 
are not unfrequently pointed with — , — or — ; e. g. ffifcK 
Euth 1 : 17, m Gen. 27 : 4. The form SfijJ , Fut. Peal 
from Jin , Ez. 5:5, 6:5, is entirely peculiar. 

Note. The 2d Part Peal is sometimes like the Inf. Dip, Dan. 6 : 18. 



§ 2'>. ERR] i.i i.\i: VERBS; j.wimi ai.iimi. 45 

2. In lih/ped, the firsl radical is pronounced with - , 

and fche n of the preformative doubled, DpxjH . In the 

later Targums occurs also the lengthened form DgPTO* Ex. 

IT. EChireq sometimes takes the place of Qamete ; 

. DT?n« Jer. 33 : 23. Gen. 38 : 26, Jer. T. Dan. 4 : 9. 

:;. PatldxA TthpacH arc regularly inflected from the 
groujid-forms D?E and D?griK. Many verbs, however, 
substitute for these conjugations Pold Dfgip or Pdl/pA 

I. Apliel lias occasionally the form of verl>s *"s ; e. g. 
DT?i» Ps. TS : 13. Gen. 18 : 1G, Jon. pwjiil Ts. 14 : 2. See 
1, of this section. 

5. The following verbs are inflected as "fr; 

(a) nfn, rf>tt, a*, D*n», and tpr, in iW; thus 
n^o, n:r>o, rwv?, etc. Gen. 27:1. Prov. 23:22. 
1 Sam. 12:2; Imp. n" 1 '^, ^te, Ez. 4:41; Fut. Spr 
Dent. i:>: 6. 

(b) TS in Mptfdf, folly, l^na, or contracted, inns, 
Job 28 : 23, 11 : 12, 37 : 14. Ps. 73 : 17. 

Note. Those verbs which have 1 moveable for their middle radical, (a.s 
b*n. "fin, 603 etc.). do not belong here, but are regular. The number of 
such verbs is greater in Chaldee than in Hebrew. Some verbs with the 
same radicals exist in both forms, and in that case have differenl Blgnrfica- 
tions ; "^n to look at, ">*n to be while ; nnd to sink clown. ftVB to sprout. 

§ 23. Verbs Lamedh Alt ph. 

This class includes all those verbs which are compre- 
hended in Heb. under the two classes rib (including verl >s 
originally ft and ft ,) and fcft , the difference between the 
two classes being entirely lost in Chaldee. Rarely, (and 
almost exclusively in the biblical Chaldee), the radical 
form of these verbs terminates in ft- ; e. g. Dan. 2:16, 
4:8, 6:3. Num. 5 : 26. Frequently, and in the later 
Targums, uniformly, they end in V or V . Their chief 
anomalies are the following. 



46 § 23. IRREGULAR VERBS ; LAMEDH ALEPH. 

1. In those forms which terminate in the 3d radical, 
(a) In Peal Praeter, and Inf., as well as in the Fut. 

Imp. and 1st Part, of all the conjugations, that radical is 
almost indifferently a or ^ ; as x)l or iba , tfbj or ^ , »&£ 
or *£ . 

(5) In the Praet. and 2d Part, of the other conjuga- 
tions and in the Imp. Peal, ■> ; as ^ana , *>| , ^ba , $ao . 

2. This a quiesces in the Praeter Peal in — , in the 
Inf., Fut. and Part, in - ; the i iu the Praeter of Ithpeel 
and Aphel usually in — , in the Imp. and Part, in — ; in 
the passive Part, of Pael and Aphel only, is i moveable ; 
^ , ibyo . 

Note. For examples of the Praet. Peal with *— see Gen. 2 : 18, Jon. 
Deut. 30 : 9 ; of the Praet Aphel with ^— , Ps. 78 : 11. 2 K. 8 : 8 5 of the 
Futures with ^— Is. 30 : 26. Jer. 51 : 8. 

3. In the course of inflection the 3d radical is 

(a) Dropped, before the sufformative n_ of 3d fern, 
sing. Praeter Peal, before *ji and "p— in the Fut. of all the 
conjugations ; before the sufformatives of the Imp. (in 
which i generally occurs instead of *i) ; and in the 3d 
pers. plur. masc. Praet. Peal before i , which, in these 
verbs, takes the place of the regular 1 ; e. g. nba , iba , 
■ptanpi , fbp ; 

(b) Exchanged, for ■» moveable, before the sufformatives 
n_ and tf — , 3d fern. sing, and plur. Praeter of all the 
conjugations except Peal, also before 1— of the 2d and 
3d pers. fern. plur. Fut. ; e. g. *$\ , irjbjw , )$V ; for * 
quiescent, (quiescing sometimes in — , sometimes in — ) be- 
fore all the sufformatives which begin with 3 or n , and 
before 1 of the 3d plur. Praeter (which is here moveable) 
in all the conjugations except Peal ; e. g. r^ba , jvri?| , 



; 2 I. vi BBS DOUBLI \.\< >\i ai.<»i B. 



A/bie* on the Paradigm of n r6* MtV 

I. Praeter. The 3d per. Bing. fern. Peal sometimes appears with tin: full 
orthography ; aanstbo, Dan*. 2:35. Sometimes il follows Ihe analogy of 
tin- other conjs. ; thus rwja Job. 17 : 7. (or like rr^ I . I : 7. or r&l Dan. 
.. i : 19), The 2d per.sing. m. is sometimes written/u%, terminating 
in x—. The :><l per. pi. ra. follow-, in some copies, the Hebrew fori 
•-- Lam. I : •'!. Sol. S; 3: 1, ibft Num. 26 : 64, or the analogy of the oth.T 
conjs. ; as *"-"} Dan. :: :21. The 3d per. pi. f. occurs in tin; form fbi I >eut 
2:11, or *,xbr. Ruth I : 17. Finally a few instances occur of tin' Praet. Pe. 
with X prosthetic; e. g. ■naa Prpv. 20: 12, I'WJfi? Dan. 5: I. In the other 
conjugations the3dper.pl. Instead of v— sometimes takes r *"— ; Ezek. 
33: I". Is. 11:1. Jer. •»: 11. 

:j. Future. The 3d per. m. sing, terminates indifferently in "•— or x— . 

It sometimes appears even with (linnets; e. g. i*""" 1 ' s - '>'■>: 'i. ^~~" 

Zech. G: 12. (according to Buxtorf) The 3d per. pi. sometimes takes the. 
termination "Jl instead of "ji. Comp. Dan. 7:26. Is. t;:> : :i.\. Ex. 22:31. 
3. imperative. The 2il i*. ring, ends sometimes in x— ; as Gen. 10: 32. 

The form x^n . Gen. 24 : GO. is anomalous. 

I. infinitive. In Peal it sometimes takes a paragogic x; e. g. BOX3B 
Prov. 25:17. Esth. 5:14. Ez. 5:9. The regular form is employed as 
Inf. absolute Is. 61 : 10. Am.5:5. Gen.26:28. The Inff. of the other 
conjugations, in the biblical Chaldee, terminate in •"!"—; e. ir- Dan. 2: 10, 
5:2, G : S, more rarely, in the Targnms in *ji j e. g. ^vrr'rx Num. 
Jon. 

for the Participles of verbs x"b, see below. § 31. 

Note. Apocopate Futures and Imperatives are less frequent in Chaldee 
than in Hebrew. The following are examples. 

Fut. apoc. ivrn Hab. 2 : 1G, *r\-> (*rrj Eccl. 11:3. like the Heb. -"nr-). 
-nn. ',-nn Ex. 22: 31. from x;n , (elsewhere fully, RJQJ. x.^n Gen. (7': 1. 

2 1 : 11) ; W . ^nn , ^nx . ^nn , »na . from x^n , Deut. 4 : 1." Prov. 15 : 27. 
Gen. 20:7. 2 K. 1:2. 8: 10. These forms have generally an optative 
signification. 

Imp. apoc. n'JX . with X prosth., Gen. 24 : 14. Pael, ltt Gen. 44 : 1. in 
Gen. 37 : 1G. Aphel, ^nx . 

An apocopate participle, Aphel, is Tra instead of " , "n , a Deut. 32 : 39. 

§ 24. Verbs doubly anomalous. 

1. is and tfb (nb). These unite the irregularities of 
both classes ; e. g. tf£3 , Aphel, TO8 . 

2. sib and aft . E. g. Kra* , ana , xtx , xctf . Peal Fut. 
V2 Deut. 29 : 20, W? Gen. 33 : 14. Inf. tm (8TO) Dan. 

3 : 19, TO Dan. 3 : l.—Itliped, XQ* Lev. 13:18. Fut. 



48 § 25. DEFECTIVE VERBS AND MIXED FOEMS. 

Tcmft Lev. 13:2.— Pael, ^ Part. ^ 2 Kings 20:5. 
Ithpaal i&fcK 2 Kings 5 : 13. 4pM, *b?8 Gen. 4 • 4. 
Part, we Gen. 6:17. Imp. Peal in one case, by Aphae- 
resis, *nn (Lond. ed. tfi&) £6>m<? yg, Prov. 9 : 5. Elsewhere 
ir», Dan. 3 : 26. 

3. 4 and a"b . E. g. an? (rrt^) 5 «nj , «h? . Peal, Fat." 

*tfi Ps. 50 : 16. 4pM ^ Ps - 75 : 2 - Inf - n $^ Ex - 
12 : 33. Part. *Jta Prov. 28 : 13. Imp. W'a Gen. 19 : 22. 
Vffo Judg. 5 : 2. 

Note. Those verbs xb which have 1 for their middle radical are regular, 
so far as 1 is concerned, i. e. the 1 is always a consonant ; as ^"n , &on i, 

§ 25. Defective verbs and mixed forms. 

1. Bnt few verbs actually exhibit all, or nearly all, 
the moods and tenses. So far as this deficiency is occa- 
sioned by the fewness of those remains of the Chaldee 
which have reached our time, it does not belong to a 
grammatical treatise. Those verbs only must be noticed 
here which, though cases frequently occur where certain 
forms would naturally be employed, constantly supply 
their places by forms borrowed from different themes. 
The following are examples ; 

2n^> and }ir§ , to give, the former occurring in Peal 
Praet. and Imp. and in Ithpeel ; the latter chiefly in Peal 
Fut. and Inf.— pbo and pos to ascend, the former being 
used in Praet. Peal, in Pael, and the Passives of the first 
and second conjugations ; the latter in the Inf. and Imp. 
Peal, and in Aphel. Deut. 9:9, 10 : 1, 2 Kings 17 : 4 — 
«rro and apt? to drink; a*™ in Peal, x%w in Aphel. — }bn 
and tpn to go; the former chiefly in Pael, the latter in 
Inf. and Fut. Peal. 

An example of double inflection in the same word is 5>^ . The Future 

is commonly 2-P like verbs ")£).. The 1st per. sing, only follows the 

analogy of verbs ■* "a , 5^K Ps. 39 : 5, 101 : 4, though 3^3 X also occurs, 
Dan. 2:9.. 



/ 26. [BE] SI LAB VKRBB W VTB sri-i I 48 



2. The following which have been called mixedfcrrMl^ 
Mr improperly so designated r^-Erx Dan. 7: 15, and 
c-c-rrs Dan. 4: L6, are but Syriac pointings of the Prae- 
tor; and tin' Future 1st sing. DW Jud. 15:7, (Ven. 
ed.) for F}?™j ifl not destitute of all analogy; comp.in 
Hebrew ©77$, Geseniufi Lehrgeb. p. 312. ¥$* Hoe. 4 : 2, 
can hardly be called a mixture of Fut. and Part.; for; 
(as the Future of this vert) lias the form ^), iv? may 
be considered :id pluT. i'eni. analogous with ]??n Jer. 3: L9. 

§ 20. Irregular verbs with suffixes. 

1. The forms of most irregular verbs before suffixes 
do not differ essentially from those of the regular verbs ; 

and, so tar as verbs ]E , VV , ft, and 4 are concerned, may 
be learned from § 16. The following examples will illus- 
trate this remark ; 

(a) lib, Peal; fpfo judg. 20:32; SJJ*^ Ps. 91:12, 
^b-j:n Ps. 28: 3.— Aphel; "pspfiS Ex. 32 : 12, Wjjtoa Job 
10 : 18, KJinjpDK Num. 20 : 5. 

(i)&, Peal; "jwra? Jer. 20:5. — Aphel; n^n with 
epenthetic 5, Dan. 7:23, KJFDBK Ps. 4-1:20, ^jn Dan. 
2 : 24, &r6?g Jud. 19:3. 

(c) ft, Peal ; nvwato Gen. 50 : 26, TOir Ez. 5 : 14, nrr-ir. 
Dan. 7 : 23.— Paol ; tnm^ Ps. 105 : 10.— Aphel; W^K 
Dan. 3 : 2, x:^P: Hos. 6 : 2, Kiinvin Ez. 5:11. 

(</) *, Peal ; $pp Ez. 28 : 19, arcfr Deut. 22 : 2.— 
Aphel, &23HVW Dan. 5 : 7, ^?!?<Hin Dan. 2:13, wsTinb 
Dan. 2 : 26. 

2. The forms of verbs sfb before suffixes differ more 
widely from those of the regular verbs. Thus 

(a) a and ^ final quiescent are commonly dropped be- 
fore suffixes in the Praeter and Future ; while the former 
takes suffixes with the union vowel — or — , and the latter 
with 3 epenthetic ; e. g. "crn lie saw me, 2 Sam. 1:7, "^jn 

4 



50 § 27. nouns ; derivation of nouns. 

he saw Mm, Jud. 19 : 3, ?ebt$ Is. 42 : 5, h|in; Lev. 13 : 21, 
■??|P2J Ex. 33:20. Sometimes tliey are retained ; e. g. 
■Wj? Prov. 8 : 22, sarn Gen, 38 : 15. Aph. Sfcpj* Deut. 
4 : 36, SfW Obad. 3, WPtpa Gen. 3 : 13, Pseudo-Jon. 

(5) * final quiescent in the Imp. of all the conjuga- 
tions is retained ; e. g. WEI Ex. 4 : 3, KJ^ns Ex. 33 : 18. 
(But Jer. 36 : 15, arnp for arnnp). 

(<?) The i of the 3d pers. plur. Praet. Peal, and of the 
Imp. is generally changed into 1 ; T*— into ^ ; e. g. ^yflpn 
Jon. 1 : 12, arnrn Lam. 1 : 7, pgjffll Is. 3 : 12. 

(d) The persons of the Praeter in tP-? and W— remain 
unchanged ; e. g. WTon Jon. 2 : 4. 

(0) n_ of the 3d pers. sing. fern. Praet. is changed 
into ri?; e. g. TW^o* Hos. 4: 12. 

On the Inf. Peal and the Participles, see below, § 35. 



CHAPTER IV, 

NOUNS. 



§ 27. Derivation of Nouns. 

1. Nouns, in Chaldee as in Hebrew, are either primi- 
tive or derivative. The former are, for the most part, the 
same as in Hebrew, and are regarded as primitive for 
similar reasons. Comp. Gesenius Lehrgeb. p. 478. seq. 
Stuart's Heb. Gram. § 316. The derivatives, constitu- 
ting the great majority of nouns, are formed either from 
verbs, (which is generally the fact), and these are termed 
verbal ; or from other nouns, and then they are called 
denominative. 

2. Verbals derived from the Infinitive are generally 
•abstract in signification, i. e. they express the action, and 



28. N"i Nfl ; sendee un> m mm b. 51 

have tin- forma top, top, top, V#, top, b^J?, *t?p, Vrnp, 
b?K3p , topg , etc. ; those derived from Participles are gen- 
erally concrete^ i. e. express the actor, and have the forms 
top , top , bap , *»qp , b^ojj , feitDp , etc 

3. Denominatives arc generally formed by adding the 
termination V (V), fern. na_ (nv) ; or j-. They are 
generally adjectives, especially ordinal onmerals, or patro- 
nymic or gentile nouns; e. g. ^-? a foreigner, ^tc am 
Egyptian, fano a rebel. Many feminine nouns in r-<_ and 
m are also denominative; e. g. rwsto a kingdom, from 
S|bti a Z.'/y^; rvotfta widowhood, from p$K # widow; mthc 
a rooting out, extirpation, from thto a foctf. 

§ 28. Gender and number of nouns. 

1. The genders are two, masculine and feminine. The 
latter generally terminate in tf— (n_ ), «i (m), ■»_. (m__ ), 
or Th . It should be noticed however that K— is also the 
termination of the emphatic state in masculines. Conse- 
quently, in ascertaining the gender of nouns, the analogy 
of the other dialects and the sense are more certain 
guides than the mere form of a noun. 

Note 1. The termination Pi— is generally to he considered a Hebraism. 
It is regular in Chaldee, only in feminines derived from masculines in " , — ; 
as nNttng fern, from W)3 . 

The employment of n instead of X in these forms is obviously designed 
to avoid the repetition of the St . For a similar reason all the infinitives of 
verbs Lamedh Aleph except Peal terminate in n . 

Note 2. There are a considerable number of feminine nouns with mas- 
culine forms, mostly the same as in Hebrew; e. g. "jSX a stone, rrx a path. 
3?nx earth, "i^X an ear, a^H a sword. Some are common ; e. g. nx a mark. 
VXjire, X3Sia a vine, and the numerals from 20 to 100. 

2. The numbers are two, singular and plural. The 
few dual forms which occur are to be regarded as He- 
braisms. They occur only in the biblical Chaldee, ter- 
minating in the absolute state, in f— . See Dan. 2 : 34, 



52 § 29. STATES OF NOUNS. 

7 : 4. The dual in the other states cannot be distin- 
guished from the plural. Compare Dan. 2 : 33, 41, 
7:7. In the Targums the double members, etc. are ex- 
pressed by the plural, and where the number two is re- 
quired, T^n is inserted. Plurals masculine end in f— , 
plurals feminine in )— . 

To most masculine nouns, viz. to those which terminate in a radical 
letter, the termination "p— : is directly appended ; e. g. "ttB a rock, pi. "p*^ . 
But those which terminate in X— derived from verbs Kb, take T?-— •; those 
in *— or ^a— take "pit— . Feminines in K— change this ending directly 
into "|— ; those in n*i and m— change these terminations into "^ and "^ ; 
e. g. rwsbq , rrnizJB , plural 1;3ba , "CiW? ; and finally, those in m<— from 
masculines in "">— form the plural in "£— ; e. g. riij'anp plur. "pa^i?. 

As in Hebrew, there are also in Chaldee many nouns having the form 
of masculines in the sing, but of feminines in the pi., and vice versa; e. g. 

^s, T?1*5 n ^; T^x; N ^, V^a; xsn. psti> »iaS-, "pati; 

In some nouns both terminations are in use, even in the sameTargum; 
e. g. aax , pi. 'pax and jhaa ; nna, pi. ■j'nna and *pnH3 , (as if from Wrr?) ; 
D^ , pi. yiifih and "jaii , etc. Sometimes the forms with different endings 
have different significations ; e. g. from hp r a voice, *pb|? thunders, Ex. 9 : 23. 
"jbj5 voices, Ps. 93 : 4. These examples should be distinguished from epicene 
nouns, or those which express both males and females, such as DID , pi. 
■pD'ilD and "jlOICi. 

Sometimes feminines plural take an additional plural ending. So in 
Hebrew and Arabic; comp. Stuart's Heb. Gram. § 327. 5. 

Some nouns occur only in the plural ; as "p*fi life, X^aa3 heaven ; espe- 
cially those which designate the different ages of life ; as l pa!b*l35 youth, 
though some of these occur in the singular, with the termination n*l. 
Others occur in the singular only; e. g. the names of the metals, inn 
gold, bns iron, C|D3 silver. But "PBD3 occurs in the sense of pieces of sil- 
ver. Gen. 42 : 25. 

§ 29. States of Nouns. 

1. Besides the absolute and construct, which occur in 
Hebrew, nouns in Chaldee have also the emphatic state, 
in which they originally corresponded, in sense, to nouns 
in Hebrew with the article.* It has however come into 



* So in Danish, Landene, the countries, from Lande, countries. Rask, Danish 
Grammar, p. 14. Also in Albanian, Gour, stone ; Gouri, the stone. Malte Brun, 
Univ. Geog. vol. VI. p. 201. 



mi - of Korars. 

in many case-, where the 3< nse does not require the 
definite article. In Syriac, this liberty baa been much 
more extensively taken. 

Note. The indefinite article is expressed, either -imply by the absolute 
state, or by the numeral in one ; e. g. Dan. 2 : 31, 6 : l& Ez. 1 : 8. 

2. Construct state. Characteristic terminations. 

(i. Masculines plural change y 1 — into " 1 — . The termination of tin: 
construct state of tnasc. nouns in the Bing. does not differ Prom that of the 
absolute state. 

b. Feminines in x— (n— - ) change these endings into r— in the sing., 
into r-- in the plur. const. Feminines in * and " , — resume their original 
P in the COn8t. sing., and in the plur. change ',' and )* into m and pi. 

:». The emphatic state is characterized, in Loth gen- 
ders and both nnmbers, by the ending X— . (Masculines 
in i— , which take ~_ in the emphatic state, constitute the 
only exception). 

a. To masculines singular (except such as terminate in X— or *— ) this 
termination is directly added j e. g. DID a horse, xoio the hur.se; mascu- 
lines in X— substitute the letter ** lor their final syllable, and those 
which end in " , — change this ending into Mfit— j e.g. K^a, X^bj ; n '9* 1 I?, 

6. Feminities in X— change X in the emph. sing, into pj e. g. xsb^a , 
emph. RPSfco ; those in nx— change this ending into n^-j e. g. nx":i~ . 
emph. xr-"2"|^ ■ finally those in *! and i— appear in the emph. state, with 
their original full endings P*l and I"P— ; e. g. KP42&V. . 

C. In the plural, the masc. endings p— - and |*-; are changed into 
X^— ; as K*?ta. px— (from sing. i— ) becomes ^X— ; as "pMS^g, emph. 

TOBIS. 

(/. In feminines plur., the emphatic state is formed by adding X— to the 
construct; e. g. RPS^IB, KPI^HB, Xr^ba. But such as terminate in the 
sing, in ^x— (from masculines in i— ) resume here their original "»j e. g. 
xr )?7~£ from fix^i?. 

4. Before suffixes [m the suffix state], nouns exhibit 
the following modifications. 

a. Derivative masc. nouns in "»— change this ending into X— before 
puff.; as ~x^-i£ from "W"?!?; those in X— (from verbs x"bj change this ter- 
mination into "> moveable ; as n-br. from xbj. 

b. All masc. plur. nouns drop the ending p— (p— ) and then take the 
autf. of nouns plural. 

c. Feminines in X — change X into P in the sincr. : as nr-b~ from X-b~; 



54: §§ 30, 31. nouns ; first declension. 

those in 1 and *- take the construct form before suffixes ; as fnniiaba ; those 
in SO (radical) change this ending to m— : ; and those in HX— (from masc. 
in V- ) resume their original i; e. g. Pin'TO'lp. 

r/. In the fem. pi., suffixes are appended to the construct state; e.g. 

§ 30. Declension of Nouns. 

Since no vowels are dropped, except those of the final 
syllable of ground-forms, (comp. § 7. <?.,) and since 
changes of any kind are less frequent than in Hebrew, 
(the first vowel of the ground-form remaining through- 
out invariable, except in monosyllables and segholate 
forms,) fewer modes of declension would naturally be 
expected, than appear in Hebrew. Accordingly we 
reckon in Chaldee nine declensions, six of masculine, and 
three of feminine nouns. 

§ 31. First Declension. 

The first declension includes all nouns which have all 
their vowels immutable. It comprehends, 

(a) Nouns which have v- , V , i or *) before their final 
consonant; as "pa a fish, ni* 1 a day, JPT) a head, a*i)? near. 

In a few nouns which would seem to belong to (a), the quiescents are 
treated as fulcra. Such belong to Dec. IV. e. g. ifi*K Num. 25 : 15, Pseu- 
do-Jon. instead of iE£< . 

(5) Nouns which have — in their final syllable ; as na 
good, as* a thief. 

Note 1. Nouns with ~ in the ultimate are chiefly of six classes. 

(1) Nouns derived from verbs fs$ e. g. bp , aa (Heb. bip, ai'j) ; 

(2) Nouns of the form ans , obta (Heb. oibd) ; 

(3) Nouns of the form bap . (Arabic JuS, Heb. with —impure;) 

(4) Nouns like bap , (Heb. with — pure ,) and burp ; 

(5) Nouns which have the formative ending )— ; as frfe (Arab. 

(6) Nouns of the form baSp ; as *ixis , naw . 

The first three of these classes retain — in all the inflections, and con- 
sequently belong regularly to Dec. I. 



; BBOOND and THIRD Dl l LBN81 

Nouns (»!' tin- fourth, fifth, and sixth i tead 

of — in the construct sing., and before the Buff. yfaand yfn. Elsewhere 
ti u . - ig retained. The punctuation of these nouns ia however variable; 
and ;i- they present no other irregularity, and are no! irery numerous, they 
iu.i\ better !•<■ regarded as exceptions from Dec. I- than as forming b 
rate declension. 

Note 2. There are also ;i few nouns, (principally of il"' form '"'-_- 
having Qamets in the penultimate, which are sometimes varied according 
to the ffrsl declension, but sometimes <ln>i> their penultimate vowel, out of 
the absol. sing. 

s< :;_ ) . Second Declension, 

The second declension includes nouns with final — or 
-, either monosyllabic, or having the preceding vowels 
immutable; as T, d©, dV?, "i$w?. This - or— is drop- 
ped before pronominal suffixes or formative syllables, be- 
ginning with a vowel. 

Note 1. Form with a guttural T3JB . with suffix WW* Job 28 : 26. 

Note 2. Forms like "pbttg (— shortened into — ) from fcojs, 1st part. 
Peal. e. g. TOST] Gen. 3 : 5. etc. are to he set down to the account of ir- 
regular punctuation. Analogy requires V'ttg. 

Note 3. In this declension may be reckoned fcpB, emph. xbTlQ . etc. as 
if from bns. 

Note 4. Before yb and ""in, monosyllables, as in Hebrew, take — , — , 
or — ; e. g. "jinw Zeph. 1 : 17, 'jis'l* Isaiah 1 : 15. 

The form "pu:n from V^ Ezek.' 27:2, is peculiar. 

§ 33. Third Declension. 

This declension includes all nouns which correspond 
to the Segholate forms in Hebrew. They may be written 
in Chaldee, as in Hebrew, either with two vowels, the 
second of which is always considered a furtive vowel; as 
sfVo , nbn j (these forms almost exclusively in the biblical 
Chaldee,) rpa , (irnp ;) or with only one vowel, which be- 
longs between the last two consonants ; as SfMa , *zz . 
They are inflected, for the most part, as in Hebrew. But, 

a. In the Plural absol. the forms "^ and ISO become, as they do in 
most, other inflections, "i"? and "?so . 

b. The form ttH'p sometimes follows the analogy of Hebrew ; as KB^Pj 



56 §§ 34:, 35. nouns ; fourth and fifth declensions. 

Dan. 2 : 37 ; sometimes takes — ; as K'bns Ez. 5 : 8. Very rarely, Hholem 
is retained ; as % h TfaJ*Vi8S , Isa. 53 : 2. 

c. In a few cases the * of the form frt-a remains moveable in its inflec- 
tions; e. g. an?3 Ez. 5 : 3, jja?? Sol. S. 4 : 8. 

d. Nouns of the forms T\?."0 and "^20 in the course of inflection, generally 
take — or — under their first radical, according to the paradigm, Tin, 153, 
D ^.D j " l 1? ant l some others take — . Comp. Dan. 4:6, 5 : 12. Gen. 32 : 16. 
Isa. 53 : 2. Nouns having gutturals for their first or second radical, natu- 
rally take — ; as B3JB , KE3>B ; W-. fiftn? . 

e. Participles Ithpeel, with a few nouns, not properly Segholates, fol- 
low the analogy of this declension; e. g. bwpnn, inflected precisely like 

§ 34. Fourth Declension. 

The fourth declension includes all nouns which double 
the final consonant when they receive accession. They 
are mostly monosyllables derived from verbs 5&. The 
long vowels, — , i and (for the most part) \ are exchanged 
in the course of inflection for the corresponding short 
vowels. In some nouns — becomes — ; as ns, aria ; *i% y 
arc* Ex. 19 : 23, baba , ]^ab| Dan. 7 : 9. 

bb has in the emph. st. x!b3 etc. with the tone on the penultimate ; but 
with surf, which draw the tone forward, )iti\s Dan. 2 : 38, 7 : 19. 

§ 35. Fifth Declension. 

The fifth declension includes nouns, participles, and 
infinitives, derived from verbs aft and terminating in tf — , 
i_ j ■»_. or ?-, ; as aba , xba , ■»;& , *»bife , ^banp . The i gene- 
rally appears, in the course of declension, as the third 
radical, displacing the substituted tf in forms like tfba . 
The termination f?— of the plural absolute is sometimes 
contracted into )— . More rarely it follows the Hebrew 
analogy, and terminates in "p— ; as Job 1:13. Lam. 1 : 3. 
Sometimes, perhaps by mistake of transcribers, it is 
pointed ^— ; as ^jto Dan. 7 : 3, )?m Gen. 3 : 15, Jeru. 
Targum, where the connection decides that these forms 
are masculine. In the const, and emph. plural, no trace 
of the radical ^ remains. 



. 87. nouns ; siktii \-. in dboi 57 



Motel. Peculiar forms of this declension. *yt PI. wit! ----- :■ 

la. 10 : 2. -:r Plar. ■'-- Lev. L9: 10. - t* PL "r: I)*' 1 "- r >- '■'■ • ,,r - T 
-z- PI, n;i~ Kuili :>: 21. 

Note 2. Infinitives Peal of verba x"b arc Bometimes regularly inflected 
in thM declension. Comp. Dan. t:23. 2 Bam. 13:6. Bz.5sft Bui 
sometimes the x is dropped} as ™? I K. 18: m. -;"- 2 Sam. 13:5, 
V=-tr:-2 Josh. 3: :: WM« Qen. 23: 2. 

6. N/./-/A Declension. 

Sere belong the derivative nouns terminating in the 
formative syllable v (■«-=,) compare § 27. 3. They are 
mostly <j< ntih or patronymic nouns, or ordinal numerate, 

a. These nouns, when they receive accession, change their final * into 
X . which la likewise moveable, and commences a new syllable. As a con- 
sequence. — is here changed into — . 

h. The plur. emph. terminates in *— , agreeing in form with the con- 
struct, as lias been remarked above § 29. 3. c. 

Exc from b. K^UJI Dan. 2:5, K^RBR Dan. 3 : 2, 3. Vt^VX\\ Dan. 3 : S. 
Bz. 1 : 12, :. ; :!. 5: 1, 5. This declension includes also some derivatives from 
verba x"? which terminate in ''—but are not passive participles. (Comp. 
the preceding decl.) ; e. g. m \v , pi. ^3 Gen. 1 ; 6, Jer. T. Ps. 104 : 13, "W . 
emph. hXSt . pi. 1"»«3T Jer. 19 : 4. 

§ 37. Seventh Declension. 

The seventh declension includes all invariable femi- 
nities, i. e. all nouns with the feminine endings tf— , " , — 
and si, the final syllable of which commences with only 
one consonant ; as tf"E3 height, as? counsel, fcHias strength, 
8^3na a roS, WO goodness, we a nurse. 

Whatever vowels precede this termination are immu- 
table ; so that the paradigm exhibits all the changes of 
these nouns in accordance with the principles stated in 
§§ 88, 29. 

Note. In forms like a, if the penultimate be a simple syllable, the 
Sheva which takes the place of the final Qamets in the emphatic and 

suffix states singular is silent; e. g. m&lhma, emph. medhlnta: if the 
penultimate be a mixed syllable, that Sheva is vocal ; as iiiegilla. emph. 
nietnllethd. 



58 §§ 38, 39. nouns ; eighth and ninth declensions. 

§ 38. Eighth Declension. 

The eighth declension includes all those feminines, the 
final syllable of which commences with two consonants ; 
e. g. asto a lip, ^t?Etf (i. q. arolri) a robe, pj purity. 

a. Nouns in 5<— of this declension must evidently supply a vowel in the 
emph. and sufF. states ; for otherwise they would exhibit the impossible 
forms Knsto , Kn^aifc* , etc., viz. with two vocal Shevas in immediate suc- 

t : : ' t : : : - ' ' 

cession. This supplied vowel is Hhireq or Pattahh, (the latter with gut- 
turals ;) more rarely Seghol; e. g. XSto, KfiSb, XES , xn^, K«n , Mftsn. 

fc^S belongs here, and is treated as if written K^s ; e. g. emph. st. 
K*3^*'2 but the vowel of the first syllable is dropped for the sake of 
euphony. 

b. The paradigm b. comprises all feminines in X^ , derived from verbs 
fitb 5 which have a consonant without a vowel, immediately preceding this 
termination. The supplied vowel is Hhireq, in which *> quiesces. 

c. Those in i— and *i are regular in the sing, like Dec. VII. In the 
plur., as becomes necessary, they also take a supplied vowel, Hhireq or 
Pattahh. 

§ 39. Ninth Declension. 

Here belong feminines in nx_ derived from mascu- 
lines in ^_ of Dec. VI. Comp. § 28. l/Nbte 1. In the 
emphatic state and before suffixes, a is exchanged for 1 
moveable, though ordinal numerals, for the most part, 
take i_ or "u or entirely drop it ; e. g. «n^t?n Lev. 25:22, 
attjprMj Deut. 15 : 9, atpyatf v. 12. (but comp. an^nj , 
Dan. 7:19.) The same substitution of ^ for a occasionally 
appears even in the absolute ' and construct plural ; as 
#33*P Gen. 13 : 15. 

Note 1. As in Hebrew, the fem. forms are sometimes so mixed that the 
singular is of one declension and the plural of another; e. g. Kb 3? pi. "iJ^S-j 
as if from **>» ; r^Wr? , pi. ft^a and ^feho . 

Note 2. When feminine nouns are formed from masculines by adding 
the terminations K— , *i and >1 — : , the changes in the ground-form are pre- 
cisely the same which appear in the emph. st. of masculines. 

Note 3. Segholates in D— — are rare. They are inflected precisely 
as in Hebrew. 



§§ 1 1-. [BB. BT0UN8 *DJ1 m mi ELAL8. 59 

' g in. Irregular and Defective Nouns. 

These arc doubtless such as were in mosl frequent 
use. The following are the principal, -a, n», zs, *&$, 

c:a , TO} } -na , ana , n?a , na , na , on , '6b , T , arz: , BP , 
■n^D, "np, th"i and ee or witf . Their anomalies arc 
given in the vocabulary. 

§ 41. - [effectives. 

The most frequent forms of adjectives are ^tJjj, bnsjp 
and b^fflg; less usual are bBJ3 and tep . They are in- 
flected like nouns. For the oompa/ristm of adjectives see 
§64. 

Note. Adjectives of the first, third, and fourth declensions have theii 
feminities generally declined according to the seventh; those of the sec 
ond and fifth, according to the eighth; and those of the sixth, accord 
ing to the ninth. 

§ 42. Numerals. 

1. Cardinal*, a. These, from 3 to 10, present the same anomaly as in 
Hebrew, the masculines being indicated by fern, forms, and the feminines 
by masc. forms. See Par. XI. 

Note. "HPI sometimes takes suffixes, and then appears in the form 
yy$ ; e. g. Tirn;nn both of them, Gen. 2 : 25, V 3 " 1 ^ 1 ? uoth °f V ou >. Gen - 
27 : 45. 

b. From 11 to 19. The units are prefixed to IDS for the masc, and 
to "^o? for the fern. It must be remarked however, (1) That the units 
appear somewhat di lie rent from the regular form, (comp. the paradigm.) 
and (2) That, in the later Targums. the units and "^0? or "nor are 
contracted into one word. These forms are presented in the paradigm in 
parentheses. 

c. The tens from 30 to 90 are. as in Hebrew, simple plurals of the 
units 3 — 9; e. g. yr%n thirty, y ?2* X forty, etc. Eighty is somewhat ir- 
regular, viz. ",3^n [i. e. T?3»n] or "j^n, Jer. 41 : 5. Ex. 7 : 7. Twenty is 
expressed by the plural of ten, "pTOS oryHW. Though masc. in form, 
these are all of the common gender. 

d. The intermediate numbers 21 — 29, 31 — 39, etc. are expressed by 
simply placing the smaller number after the larger, connected by 1 ; e. g. 
masc. "irn T'lbS, fem. x*irr ynDS twenty-one. etc. 

e. One hundred nx*2 . 200 "~n"9 , "jnaw . 300 nx? nbn . 400 Tftxa rz~x . 



60 § 43. ADVERBS. 



etc. the prefixed units being feminine ; 1000 qba , 200.0 "pebx ■pnB , 3000 
"pB^K xnbn. etc. the prefixed units being masculine; 10.000 fen, i20,000 
"iW ^.9? '^n ) J o n - 4:11. 

2. Ordinals. The first two have peculiar forms, viz. first ^^ , second 
r^m, (comp. Heb. c?3ir). 

a. From ffaW to te?i/ft they are formed from the cardinals, and ter- 
minate in *— C 1 !*— ; ) emph. •"!&$— for the masc, and <~t£<— , emph. tfri— or 
an? for the fern. 

b. From eleventh to nineteenth the units are prefixed to ^DX , but 
contracted, into one word ; e. g. ^K^O^n eleventh. Num. 25 : 8, "^p^iri 
twelfth, etc. In designations of time (as the fourteenth year, &c.) the car- 
dinal numbers are generally employed. 

c. Above 20, as in Heb., cardinals and ordinals are the same. For the 
mode of designating distributives and numeral adverbs see § 65. 4, 5. 



CHAPTER V. 
PARTICLES 



§ 43. Adverbs. 

1. The following are primitive ; "jtf where? ^tyn when? 
5j» afoo, star? £Am?, *6 w#£. 

2. Derivatives with characteristic ending ; Ha J £y <fe/, 
ajE-n to-day, tfJ^ECS carefully, trw$ in Aramean QAqgc- 
fzaiari), rv^arriOB hastily, rittjjjn again. 

3. Other parts of speech used adverbially / 

a. Substantives, either with prepositions ; as *i*l2£*JD3 ?w sAoW, shortly 
KMttJsipa iw £m/!/i, Zrwfo/, I**? immediately ; or without them ; as bbs wholly, 
fctnnn below. 

b. Verbal forms, viz. Inf. and Part. ; as ?nsa backwards, S*lft again, 
once more. 

c. Adjectives, numerals, and pronouns ; e. g. 13 [/rm] ZrwZy. tfftws, etc. 
S^t! 3 . [ as °^J together, ria3 [Z?"A;e what? - ] how! how very ! 

4. Compound adverbs ; ' T^X &ow ? ^^a wto ? StS-^S [7o Acre] 
hitherto, !"!2e [/rora /tere] Ae?zce. RaWie whence ? onE thence, mb [n-'X &6] 
^<?r^ is rcof. For the mode in which the last, as well as n^, takes pro- 
nominal suffixes, see S 8. 3. II. Note 4. 



: i, i:». prepositions ; i 



61 



r>. 1 rimpk (juration is expressed by the prefix Q, (before a <■■ 
mint with Sheva, simple or composite, ft), Pronouns or adverbs expre 
an interrogative sense by prefixing -x ; <•. ._r. )va -x wh * "x who? 

Comp. v 9.3. Before interrogative adverbs ^j is intensive^ a wa 'x 
to which I believe our language has nothing precisely equivalent, ui 
it be the colloquial phrase, where in the world? 



§ 1 1. Prepositions* 

1. The following are origindJhf prepositions : 

(a) The inseparable ?, ?, and b prefixed to nouns 
and pointed with — before simple Sheva ; as "TOSi ; be- 
fore a word, the first letter of which has a composite 
Slieva, with a corresponding short vowel; as tpj83, ^<} 
In the latter ease, contraction sometimes takes place ; as 
anbab Dan. 5 : 23. 

(b) The separable monosyllables nib 9 mas \ rjj3 , 
which before nouns, appear as separate words. They 
take pronominal suffixes without change ; as Vfib with 
me. 

Instead of 3 prefix, appears the separate form ^fi, Sol. S. 1 : 9, 13. 

2. Words employed as prepositions but originally nouns or other parts 
of speech; viz. xba without, (compounded of the adv. xb and a,) yo 
[ jxtrt] from, of baj3 and DTp before, "pa between. r'sn instead of. r-~- 
under. brjTD and blttBK o?j account of These, (with the exception of the 
first.) and some others, are originally nouns, and conform to the analogy 
of nouns, in receiving suffixes ; sometimes. 

a. Having feminine forms ; e. g. fiMFDlttE . But blEE retains the masc. 
form before "Jin and "pa ; or 

b. Having plural forms ; e. g. Spbs , Wp , ^H"^ 1 ?? , etc. 

3. Compound prepositions ; cip rt )iq , ba^b , "»3B^a . 

§ 45. Conjunctions. 

1. Primitive conjunctions are 1 rt?icZ, a o.s, b that (before Fut.), ",ri ?y. 
*ia since, ""jX. b-'cause. "ix o/\ Borrowed from other parts of speech D'lS 
Ottt "na so. -n that. Compounded xb -n or Rob* Mai ftof, ^ ir mw'//1 
^ rbn and "n b"»*13 because. T'n b? therefore, "n "va q/?er. 

2. The inseparable conjunctions 3, 7. and b are prefixed like the 
prepositions. § 44. 1. a. Vav. before, consonants with Sheva, also before 3, 
E, and E, is pointed 1. When b is prefixed to the Fut. the prelbrma- 



62 § 46. INTERJECTIONS. 



tive of the latter is dropped ; e. g. bsapb instead of ^IBp?^ . See be- 
low § 50. 2. 

§ 46. Interjections. 

* 1. These are for the most part primitive ; e. g. fctii lo 1 ^h, "W^ would 
that ! oh that ! *>1 wo ! (comp. Lat. vae.) 

2. Some are borrowed from other parts of speech ; e. g. ian come 
on! (Imp. from ah 1 ?), ^aa I pray ! [lit. fw entreaty'], biatn. wo / (from 
ban fo destroy.) 



PART 111. 

SYNTAX. 



CHAPTER I. 
SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. 



§ 47. Personal Pronouns. 

1. The separate pronouns sometimes supply the place 
of the substantive verb, or at least render the use of that 
verb unnecessary; e. g. isn Bjn5« we are [lit. we they], 
Ez. 5 : 11 ; KJTTJ ft* I [am] the seer, 1 Sam. 9:19. Most 
frequently is the verb omitted when the pronoun is joined 
to a participle. 

The reason of this omission of the substantive verb, in such cases, 
seems to be this. These pronouns have a certain strength, an inherent 
emphasis, (so to speak), unattainable in English, on account of the fre- 
quency with which we are compelled to use them in the ordinary inflec- 
tion of verbs. 

2. The suffixes are used in Chaldee as in Hebrew. Compare Stuart's 
Heb. Gram. §§ 470 — 472, Conant's Gesenius § 121. The pleonastic use of 
suffixes, where the noun to which they relate immediately follows, is more 
frequent here than in Hebrew. Thus nbx "H iJYPiaS servants of God. Ez. 
5:11, bspsna na in Daniel Dan. 5: 12. 

Note. Even the separate pronouns are sometimes used in the same 
manner. 

3. Anomalies likewise are the same as in Hebrew ; e. g. masc. for 
fern. Ruth 1:8,9, "pass , (referring- to the daughters-in-law of Naomi;) 
suff. of pi. nouns appended to sing, nouns, as in Num. 24: 7, rfTOabv his 
kingdom, the latter probably a result of the full orthography, * being only 
a mater lectionis. 



64 §§ 48 50. SYNTAX OF VERBS ; TENSES. 



§ 48. Relative and Interrogative Pronouns. 

1. The relative pronoun i*j , (as a prefix 1,) corresponds to the Hebrew 
id 2$. ; e. g. with noun suff. forming a Gen., praiyib S'a'IJft &<b "fn , whose lan- 
guage thou shalt not understand ; with the adverb of place, "jan . . . . 1, 
sometimes 'jan , n = Hebrew Dia . . . . id 5* , where. 

2. The interrogative appears as a Genitive, where a noun immediately 
precedes it in the construct state j e. g. nx "ja P2 whose daughter art 
thou ? Gen. 24 : 23. 

3. In respect to the compound possessive pronouns "&*$ my, fnb^l his, 
&c. see § 8. 3. note 3. 

§ 49. Mode of designating pronouns for which specific forms do 
not occur in Chaldee. 

1. Reflexive and reciprocal. These senses are indicated, 

a. Simply by passive verbs ; 

b. By the personal pronouns ; e. g. Judg. 20 : 40. The Benjamites 
looked 'pmiriS behind them [i. e. behind themselves, the English usage 
being analogous]. 

c. By dBD , 2b or fira ; e. g. MtfSi myself, ~2*?2 upon thyself, Ex. 9:14; 
&WT3?aa Gen. 18 : 12, Sarah laughed within herself. So tt^ia^a himself, 
Ruth. 3 : 8. 

2. Indefinite. Some one 12J3K , something nana, xaana ( = Hebrew 
123) and cria . So 7io owe 1B3K &6, in Kb . nothing cria J*V. also i^a xb 
Job. 6:6. 

3. Demonstrative. Sometimes by Mil , fcPfi . or with the Hebrew arti- 
cle K-lfria , fcfiTin . — A peculiar mode of designating the same idea is to at- 
tach a suffix to the preceding word; e. g. &Wat pia Dan. 3 : 8, a? JAa£ fiwie, 
(lit. in it, the time), comp. K*BI &*in ^2 Sol. S. 1 : 13. 

Other forms might be mentioned, but they will occasion no difficulty 
which the analogy of the Hebrew will not readily solve. 



CHAPTER II. 
SYNTAX OF VERBS. 



§ 50. Use of the Tenses. 

1. The same variety of signification exists here as in 
Hebrew. Thus the Praeter sometimes, (especially in 
verbs of existence or condition,) corresponds to our Pres- 



,' 51. BTN1 \\ OF \ EBB8. 



cut, sometimes to our Pluperfect ; and the Future to the 
Optative, Subjunctive, or [mperative mood. Jt some- 
times expresses even past time. See Dan. 1 : 9, 33. 

2. When the Future is used in an Optative, [mpera- 
tive, or Subjunctive sense, it not unfrequently takes the 
prefix b that, ut, and the preformative 1 falls out; e.g. 
r--b sjb Sfnjxjta thy presents be to thyself \ Dan. 5 : 17. «*"- 
Spjhttjwith the beasts of the field shall be thy dwelling, 
Dan. 5 : 22. Though in the latter ease Gesenius ( Lehrgeb., 
p. 7S7,) considers &rnb as Inf. instead of K3«79^, ;lI1( ' com " 
pares the frequent use of the Infinitive for finite tenses in 
Hebrew. Oomp. Stuart's Heb. Gram. § 543. 

To this use of b with the Put., corresponds entirely the Arabic J 

Rosenmuller's Inst, ad fundanh Ling. Arab. p. 331. Compare also the 
French que. 

Prof. Winer in his 2il ed. abandons this explanation, on the ground that 
this use of b is found nowhere else in Chnldee. and prefers, with Beer, to 
consider the b as an unusual preformative of the Future tense, (not unfre- 
quent in the Talmud) instead of"'. He quotes two passages from the 
Targums to which he considers this explanation suited; viz. Ex. 10:28. 
Jer. T. T^b SOttj ^nb xb* rw»i ^zs . (Pharaoh) desires to die, mid not 
to be listening to your words; and Ex. 22: 24. Jon. ^rj^J *ibs yrrr xb 
V~!l\Q *&* ? V e shall not impose upon him that there should be witnesses 
against him. But the old explanation seems to me preferable. Is not this 
very idiom the basis of the Talmudical use of b as a preformative of the 
Future ? 

§ 51. Peculiar mode of designating certain finite tenses. 

1. A Pluperfect is formed, in the later Targurns, by 
prefixing KJH to the Praeter ; e. g. pt: 81H he had gone 
out. The Arabic has a similar usage. 

2. A kiud of Paulo-]) os t-f ut ure, to be about to do amy 
tlii tig, is expressed by prefixing Tr? [ready] to the Inf. 
with b ; e. g. ynssnKb JJ W, Jehovah is about to ptmish, 
i. e. will speedily punish; by «?n; e. g. b^ttb KWQtt enrn 
Gen. 15 : 12, the sun was just about setting. In the lat- 
ter construction, the sense of the Inf. active sometimes 

5 



66 §§ 52, 53. use of participles. 

becomes passive ; e. g. Deut. 31 : 17, fe^ "jiTPJ ^«/ <?A<2$ 
speedily be destroyed. • 

§ 52. Z7se o/* tfAe Imperative and Infinitive. 

1. Of two Imperatives connected by 1, the second 
must often be rendered by the Future, being a promise, 
of which the first was the condition. So in English we 
say Do and live, i. e. If ye will do, ye shall live. 

2. The use of the Inf. governed by verbs indicating 
desire, purpose, &c. and sometimes by nouns, with (or 
without) b 1 , is* more frequent than in Hebrew; e. g. Ex. 
2 : 15, b-j^b wz he sought to Ml; Gen. 29 i 7, taM# *0$$ $b 
it is not time to collect, b is sometimes omitted, espe- 
cially when the Infinitive is governed by a noun ; as Josh. 
10 : 27, Kflftai? bipn f$ 7 the time of sunset. 

In other respects these moods are employed as in Hebrew. 

§ 53. Use of Participles. 

1. Participles joined (a,) To the substantive verb, in- 
dicate generally the Imperfect ; as injih nm Dan. 2:31, 
Thou sawest [or, wast looking /] also with the Future, 
-pinn -jfcop Kb Kuth 1:20, Ye shall not call [be in the habit 
of calling] me Naomi. The same indefiniteness seems to 
be given to the sense, as in the corresponding construc- 
tion in English. This usage is more frequent in Chaldee 
than in Hebrew. (b) Joined to the personal pronouns and 
rrw 7 they designate generally the Present tense ; some- 
times others ; e. g. kj« bw Gen. 32 : 11, I was afraid, 
p*ns ^rpsi n» Judg. 6:36, if thou wilt save. 

Note. Sometimes the subst. verb is omitted in this construction ; e. g. 
Job 1 : 13. 'pnig.J yba* "^ hi 8 sons (were) eating and drinking. 

2! Participles govern nouns ; either, (a) In the Geni- 
tive, the participle being in the construct state ; as ^bsa 
5-fths 1 K. 2 : 7, $000 who eat at thy table; or, (b) In the 



5 I "><:. m ntw 01 V8RB8 J OPTATIVE, re . '17 

cas( governed by the verb from which they arc derived ; 
a& r'mina jphb Ex. 25 : 20, stretching out tJiei/r wings* 

< r, [. Opttotive i>>>»><!. 

This is indicated in Chaldee, either, 

a. By the simple future (compare : 50 ;) «>r. 

b. By questions expressing desire ; e, <j. Judg. 9:29, x^r r^ ~c~* ■- 
who trill deliver this people to me? i. 6. would that this people were under 
my control. Especially is the formula "in- 1 ■)« (cotnp. Heb. -,rp to) em- 
ployed in this optative sense; e. \s,. Deut. 28:67, x~2'j "r" 1 "pa . CM //<<■// ft 

rrnin>j. lit. toAq ?/•/// ^mw evening f 

c. By V^? with the Future, when the wish respects future time; as 
'ififfD BJgl^ *]b, may he stand before thee! Gen. 17: 18.— With the Prae- 
tor when the wish regards time past; e. g. Num. 20 •. 3, R3I1TO1 \b . O/t 
/Aa/ we Aar/ died ! 

§55. Agreement of the verb with its subject. 

1. The general principles, as well as most anomalies, 
are the same here as in Hebrew. See Stuart's Ileb. 
Gram. § 479, seq. Conant's Gesenius, §§ 146-148. 

2. When a verb has several predicates it is generally 
put in the plural. Sometimes however, especially when 
the verb precedes the predicates, it is singular ; so Gen. 
8:16. Num. 20:11. 

§ 56. Impersonal verbs and verbs with indefinite Nominatives. 

1. Impersonal verbs are, as in Hebrew, simply the 
third person singular of personal verbs without any 
Nominative. They also take a Dative ; e. g. 1 Sam. 30:6, 
yii* r £?, David ivas distressed. 

2. To express the idea of a verb with an indefinite 
Nominative ; 

(a) The 3d person singular is sometimes employed 
exactly as in impersonal verbs ; e. g. E|D+fi Tea said (some 
one) to Joseph ; 

(h) The 3d pers. plur, ; which frequently must be 



68 §§ 57 — 59. syntax of veebs ; regimen, etc. 

rendered by the passive ; e. g. Dan. 4:13, [English Ver- 
sion 4 : 16,] ffelg? ft 55b fe£ A& heart he changed, lit. fe£ them 
change his heart 

(c) The 2d per. sing, sometimes expresses the same 
idea, Is. 41 : 12. 

(d) Also the plur. Part. ; as plJMi Dan. 3 : 4, $ & 

§ 57. Regimen of Verbs. 

The use of the simple Accusative or Dative, of two 
accusatives, and of verbs with prepositions, may be 
learned from the Hebrew analogy. Comp. Stuart's Heb. 
Gr. §§ 508—513. Conant's Gesenius, §§ 138—140. 

§ 58. Verbs used for Adverbs. 

In Chaldee, as in Hebrew, two verbs are often so 
connected that one of them may be best translated by 
an adverb. The verbs most commonly so employed are 
Cpoia to add, for again, more; i^tpi** to make good, for 
well ; W% to precede, for before; iw to return, for again ; 
Tiitf to hasten, for quickly ; e. g. sya ft? ^sni nn , Isaac 
digged again (lit. returned and digged) the wells, Gen. 
26:18. * 

So in English we say, make haste and come, for come quickly. 

§ 59. Gonstructio praegnans and Ellipsis. 

1. Gonstructio praegnans. Comp. Stuart's Heb. Gr. 
§ 566. Conant's Gesenius, § 141. a^rrfo aab JJ *pb ^) , 
and Jehovah changed (his heart and gave) to him another 
heart. 1 Sam. 10 : 9. 

2. Ellipsis is not frequent, except of the substantive 
verb. Ps. 120 : 7, Ma^i "pan nbrc aja ? / (desire) jpaocra, 
fey (are) /or w#/\ 



g 60. SI m U 01 HOI : I L81 9. 69 

CHAPTER in. 

SYNTAX OF NOUNS. 



§60. Designation of ('"xes. 

1. The Genitive is indicated, 

(a) As in Hebrew, by the const, state of the preceding 
noun ; e. g. BWta ^ ///<- words of the hi/rig, 

(b) By the prefix *J (or *?,) in which case the preced- 
ing word is ordinarily in the emphatic state; e. g. ttdta 
srs- //^ Z-//^ of the earth, KSbtt *h Ktt^tf £fc /t7//y\ cdp. 
/W//, Dan. 2 : 1 5. 

(e) In designations of time, by b; e. g. an-pb kev 1 Gen. 
8 : 5, the day of the month; 2 Kings 12 : 1, 23E r:rn 
■tvrt m the seventh year of Jehu, 

Note L. The case b. may be compared with the Hebrew b "£\x . and 
"H be regarded as a real relative; thus Nsbo *"t KBikttj miirlit be rendered 
/At* captain who (belonged to) (he king, xzb'o might be regarded as a Da- 
tive (b being omitted by ellipsis), or as a Genitive governed by "H in the 
construct stale. 

Note 2. In the later Targums the characteristic prefix of the Genitive 
is sometimes omitted; e. g. Esth. 1:9, s<;'^3 KBOB banquet of the women. 
Iii some instances, on the other hand, the characteristic of the Genitive 
ease (n) is inserted after a noun in the construct state. 

Note 3. The form of the construct, especially of the const, pi., some- 
times appears in the Targums instead of the absolute; e. g. Gen. 1 : 10. the 
collections of water ij£ X*f5 . he called seas. 

2. As in Hebrew, ) prefixed forms the Dative. 

3. The Accusative takes either b t (like the Syriac, — 
and this is almost universal in the Targum on Proverbs;) 
or frj (i. q. Heb. rx ;) or it has the simple form of the 
Nominative. 

4. The Vocative is generally expressed by the form 
of the emphatic state. 



70 §§ t31 ? 62. SYNTAX OF NOUNS ; USE OF CASES, ETC. 



§ 61. Peculiar use of the cases. 

1. The Genitive is often employed instead of an adjective qualifying 
the preceding noun; e. g. Dan. 3:5, xsnn dbx an image of gold. i. e. a 
golden image. 

Note 1, Sometimes the first noun qualifies the second; e. g. *P CflpnSS 
with a strong hand — lit. with strength of hand. 

Note 2. The Hebrew student will not be disappointed to meet in Chal- 
dee with phrases like X'abn ■''na Gen. 37 : 19, lit. master of dreams, i. e. 
interpreter of dreams; xnd "i3 son of a year, i. e. a year old. 

2. The Accusative of place answers the question, where? and must 
consequently be translated by at or in. The simple Accusative is also 
sometimes employed, by synecdoche where we must render, in respect of; 
e. g. IWJ ^ip^ao ruddy in respect to complexion, or of a ruddy complexion, 
Lam. 4 : 7. 

This construction is less frequent in Chaldee than in Hebrew. Instead 
of it the Targums sometimes employ 3. 

3. The case absolute, either the Nom. (Avhich is most frequent), the 
Ace, or even sometimes the Dat. (with \ signifying quoad,} is employed as 
in Hebrew. Comp. Stuart's Heb. Gr. §§ 415—417. 

§ 62. 'Use of the plural and repetition of nouns. 

1. The plural is sometimes employed where only one of the things des- 
ignated is meant. Judg. 12 : 7, Jephthah was buried, nsjjjj "^Hpa , in one 
of the cities of Gilead ; Gen. 8 : 4, The ark rested on one of the moun- 
tains, etc. 

2. £**ia and ■pSiSQ are employed as plurals of excellence or respect 
On the other hand TH^X has always a plural sense. In the biblical Chal- 
dee only, occurs "pSV'btf , the Most High, as a name of God, Dan. 7 : 15. 

3. The double members, etc., which in Hebrew require the dual, are 
designated in Chaldee by the plural. When the dual in Hebrew is em- 
ployed to designate definitely two persons or things, it is rendered in 
Chaldee by the plural with yijjg . 

4. The immediate repetition of a noun indicates, 

a. Multitude. Gen. 14 : 10, TT3 "p"i n 3 many wells. 

b. Partition or separation, expressed by each, etc. ; as Gen. 32 : 16, 
NW KW each particular herd; Esth. 3 : 4, Kbi^ xai"' every day. 

§ 63. Construction of Adjectives. 

1. Exceptions from the general principle " that adjectives agree with 
the substantives which they qualify in gender and number" are the same 
as in Hebrew. Comp. Stuart's Heb. Gr. § 449. 

2. When an adjective is the predicate of the sentence, it stands gen- 
erally after the noun. Rarely, and only when the substantive verb is 
omitted, it precedes. 



I. 65. BYKTAX OF aiui < 1 1 vi.~, i i. . 71 

3. Adjectivee used as simple epithets, follow their nouns. 

1. The neuter gender is usually exjfa ised l>y feminine adjectu 
l*s. ^7 : I. t-:-- xnn one tliim r have I desired. 

An adjective ia pat in the construct stale before ;i noun expressing 
the thing in respedt to which the quality is affirmed; e. g. Prov. 16 
rjn btd 0/ a humble spirit, lit. humble of spirit. 



§ 64, Comparison of Acfjeotives. 

1. The comparative is formed, either 
(a) By pa siinpl\ , as in Eebrew; or 

(Z>) By inserting ■ , nT , or T»P£ (<tlu n<hnit. but here in 
the sense of more) before pa; e. g, I's. 119:103. ppM 
KtDafi pa tpp sweeter than honey^ lit. sweet more than etc, 

2. The superlative is designated as in Hebrew. Thus 
D^':s bfiffl Dan. 4 : 14, ^ Zws&stf 0/ ra£>&/ »;»« ■»»« Lev. 
24 : 9, $6 highest heaven; etc. 

§ 65. Numerals. 

1. Numerals from 1 to 10 arc placed either before or after nouns. Gen. 
8 : 10. r~' n ^"^ • Dan. 3 : 25. x?2-ix ynaa . 

2. From 11 to 100 the numerals precede the substantive in the plural. 
Jud. 11:33, """"k '"r" • But the /ens sometimes follow their substan- 
tives. Gen. 32 : 1 1. 

Note 1. In a few instances the substantive appears in the construct 
slate before its numeral. 1K.8: 63. Kisn "H^r* "prnn *viPl 220.000 oxen. 
Comp. § 60. 1. note 3. 

Note 2. When ft* precedes the numeral, the noun is in the emph. st. ; 
e. g.\2en. 1 : 16, x*nin3 -j-nn p? the two great lights. 

Note 3. In designations of weights and measures the noun expressing 
the weight, etc. is often, though not so frequently as in Hebrew, omitted. 
Thus Gen. :>7 : 28 3 rcr T^O^a for 20 (shekels) of silver. So in designa- 
tions of time. N'S'P is still more frequently omitted. Comp. Gen. 8 : 13. 
Lev. 23 : 32. 

3. Instead of the ordinals from 1 to 10 the cardinals are not unfrequently 
employed. Gen. 8 : 13. WTVi Tfia , on the first of the month. 2 K. 12 : 1. 
N'n-b 5SC ";~2 in the seventh year of Jehu— lit. in the year VII. of 
Jehu. 

4. Distributives are expressed by a simple repetition of the cardinals 
Without 1; as KSSEJ x: ;^-! by sevens. "p^Fi "p^n two and two. by pairs. 
Gen. 7 : 2. 9. 



72 §§ 66, 67. syntax of particles ; adverbs, etc. 

5. Numeral adverbs are of two kinds. 

a. Those of degree or intensity. These are expressed in Chaldee by 
prefixing in to the cardinals ; e. g. Dan. 3 : 19, xssiz? "in , sevenfold. 

b. Those of repetition. These are expressed, precisely as in English, 
by times. *f 3at ; as Josh. 6 : 3, Sual son, one time, once. Ex. 34 : 23. "pat 
nbn three times, etc. 



CHAPTER IV. 
SYNTAX OF PARTICLES. 



§ 66. Adverbs generally. 

1. The repetition of an adverb expresses 

a. Intensity. Dent. 28 : 43. xnnnb xnnnb very low; 

b. Repetition or continuation. Ex. 23 : 30, IW "PSt by little and little. 

2. Adverbs sometimes qualify nouns by being placed before them as 
nouns in the construct state. Gen. 18 : 4, X*a -nst a little water. 

3. Adverbs sometimes take prepositions before them; e. g. TiSS instead 
of TX simply. Comp. Gesenius' Lehrgeb. p. 828. 

Note. In the last three cases, 1. b, 2 and 3', these adverbs maybe re- 
garded as real nouns. Thus X*E W| a small quantity of water, TX2 at 
that time. And so of many other cases. 

4. Many adverbs are expressed by periphrasis of verbs. See § 58. 

§ 67. Negatives. 

1. The same distinction exists between xb and n^b , as in Hebrew be- 
tween xb and "pS ; the latter, in both languages, implying- the substantive 
verb. * 

2. bb. . . xb none, nobody, nothing. So in Hebrew. Compare Gesenius' 
Heb. Lex. word X'b . 

3. In oaths or strong declarations. "X or CX . if, takes the place of a di- 
rect negative. Thus Is. 62 : 8. ",nx ex / will not give, lit. if I will give. 
So xb nx affirmatively, Josh. 14 : 9. 

4. ; ' That — not " is sometimes expressed by ba before the Inf. e. g. Lev. 
26 : 19. I will make the heavens strong as iron above you X'naa xnnxba, 
that they may not send down rain, (lit. from that they should, etc.) For the 
signification cf b alone prefixed to the Infinitive, see § 50. 2. 



; 68. OTTBRBOG \ n\ i: PABTR LE8. 



^ 68. Interrogative Particles, 

l. The direct question is indicated by Pi , or has no peculiar designa- 
tion. 

i. The double interrogation ia generally expressed by DK . . . . M; e.g. 

Num. 13: 20, Mi^a ex BtaBttrt, whether eoodorbad. 1 K. 22 : 15 h^:n 

::•:-: =x. shall we go up t<> Ramoth Gilead to battle, or shall ir> (>,,- 
la ar .' 

3. The question with x~r; , being employed simply to excite attention, 
is frequently better rendered by behold! Comp. x^n under tin- word x~m 
Gesenius' Heb. Lex. Tims Deut. ll :::<». xp---i x—rs piM xrn behold 
they are on the other side Jordan, Mt. are they not, etc. So also the fre- 
quent expression, i"*r: ",":x x'^n behold they arc written. 



PARADIGMS. 



Paradigms of verbs, nouns, and numeral adjectives are here subjoined 
accompanied by relerences to the corresponding sections in the Grammar. 



74 Par. I. Eegular Verbs. §§ 11—13. 





Peal. 


Ithpeel. 


Pael. 


Praet. 3 m. 


^1? 


bfc or teprtj 


^?E 


3f. 


nbtpp 


n^pna 


nbtap 


2 in. 


an or nbt:p 


snbtipnss; an 


or ribtop 


2f. 


£$3? 


frbtipna 


**§$ 


1 c. 


nb&p 


^E*?$ 


ri^E 


PL 3 m. 


*&!? 


&%>*?? 


*Ie 


3f. 


#E 


abtDpna 

t ••>; : • 


^Ie 


2 m. 


■pffitejj 


^nbtipna 


T^B2 


2f. 


J5§3? 


^nbtipria 


$Nfi 


1 c. 


**$li? 


t : ••'; : • 


&%p. 


Inf. 


^!?^ 


abftpna 

t tI; : • 


abtap 


Imp. 2 m. 


itajj 


%>$>*?$ 


^E 


2f. 


^?%? 


- i%^ 


h ^E 


PL 2 m. 


*&i? 


*&e.^ 


*ibp 


2f. 


**?^i? 


ajb&pna 




Put. 3 m. 


%?? 


^ty 


^E" 


3f. 


btjpn 


^1?'^ 


^?E*? 


2 m. 


Sogn 


^w? 


^E 1 ? 


2f. 


i^i? 1 ? 


■pbtppnn 


•pbtpgn 


1 c. 


N^ 


^SI? 1 ?? 


^?E$ 


PL 3 m. 


l*t>]r 


■j^bpgrij 


fm 


3f. 


te 


ibfcptr 


• i^e: 


2 m. 


ipfei^fi 


■pSagriH 


■pbtopn 


2f. 


#?!?*? 


1^12^ 


te 


lc. 


fe|?5 


i?J?rd 


^E5 


1 Part. m. 


% 




btgga 


f. 


•fcB 




»btspa 

t : >- : 


2 Part. m. 


!wg 


tegrfl? 


btaps? 


f. 


t • »: 


abapfi/j 

t : <— : • 


sbtfpft 



Par. I. Regular Verbs. §§ 11— 13. 





[thpaal. 


a p 


Ltaphal. 




bttgna 


^3M 


^8?OT 




rbtsgnij 


rfcttp« 

_ . i. _ 


P&tpJ?FN 




~' : eP~>> 


wsr or pfibpM 


^3?W 




rbeprx 


^J5« 


r ^">? 




1 rbsprx 


r ^K^ 


rtffiPW 




ifegnj} 


*&m 


•lxupr s 




xbiprs: 


»b6p« 

t •• i : — 


»bttpin« 

t — ' : — • 




"prbeprx 


■•rbcps . 


■-rb-jprs: 




"rb^p_rs: 


■r^p? 


-.rb-jprs; 




t : — i— : • 


arbips 


KSvttpriK 




*£to0W 


r t': - 


abtspma 

t t': - • 


1 


begxpt 


. bt:£S 


bufprx 




"bfegnaj 


"r^i?** 


TupF N 




•biprx 


sfifepa 


*&I?W 




xibiprs: 


kA&dm 

t : ••': — 


srbiprs: 




^2^ 


Sgp 


^3?ffi 




^E^fi 


ittjjw 


b-jprn 




^SBWrl 


^3?5 


topPFi 




■pb::prn 


r^i?^ 


■pb^prr, 




b^prx 


(b-j^nx) bttpH 


^3?5* 




"ib^pr^ 


T*i: 


Ae 




ter 


" bl ?p: 


■jk&B 




■pbtapnn 


"i-^p* 


V— ™ 




-bispnn 


$we 


■fetigpfi 




tegro 


5*82 


b-jpr: 






b::pa 








B ^9?9 








Par. II. Regular Verbs with suffixes. § 16. 



Suffixes. 



Sing: 1 com. 2 masc. 



2 fem. 



3 masc. 



3 feiD 



^btpp t£t?p_ Tjbtpp ftbpg fibq; 

'Wbftp &c. Same as 3 f. except that it does not take 

wbfcjp TT^9? , »™f 9? 



3. Pr. 3 m. 


3f. 


2 m. 


2£ 


lc. 


L 3 m. 


2 m. 


lc. 



^_ Tj&btij? flnbfcp nfrbttp 



tgbEj? sjfcgj tjbtajj ahjbtti 



Inf. 



Inf. with I 
3 epenth. j 






3 m. with 
3 epenth. 



Fut. 3 m. tpbt^ 

3 m. ^bttjr ?g4ttl?? ^3*1 t]^btpjr 

Imp. 2 m. I 5_ ^3- 






pi 



t • : »: • 



PL 



2 m. with ) 

3 epenth. j 

it 

2 m. 
2f. 



h »bttp 



^btop nh- rnbt^p 

tyib&B tfri*fcp 
^b^p »nfitap 

•t : v ': tt : •• ': i 



Pa. Praet. 



Tabttg Tjbtpp •'■ t]btop 



fibtop 



fibtap: 



Inf. 



wbttg 'qmbEig tjnibtag wwbag atvteri 



Par. II. Regular Verba with suffixes. § L6. H 



P/tir. I com. 



2 in i c. 



:i fern. 






P=£?i? P*Bp 



r^Si? 



:; Pern. 



wbtop 


■jibb^p "jDbTajD 


■•:b^ 


|??»E 


wnbtsp 

r t : ->: 


7':rbr:p isrtep 


"-r-~p 


™^P 


Suffixes (»f the second person. 






srnbtip 

t • : — ': 




■prrbsp 


T^P 










|?wE 


1- *&& 


sm »sir6t5p 

rr t : — ': 




■pr,nbt:p 


»•»•»«.._, 

P^??!? 





jbtap 



t t : ': • 



'It* 



T^sW? 



pbttpa rtlbttpE irtttpja 



x::b^p- TbAdpa 



-r:bt:pt) 



:,rr 

"P^Pr 



T^apj 



tuaAaon llDDbtDp 



*W. 



Ttf. 



'I'. 



«33*ap- Tto&dp'' 



1??^I?r 



ir-*ppr 



■#» 



«rbt:p 

T \>: 

s::bt:p 



WbtDp 



a:nfep 

T T tI- 






T^&b 



ta&« 



ffibDg 

•prbtip 

■pMboj? 



febtpg 



to: 

vbaor 



"r^P 



II^E 



ffanftafi ^ibtpE ^inrnbEg l~r^2 



78 



Par. III. Verbs Pe Nun. 8 18. 



Peal. 



Aphel. 



Ittaphal. 



Praet. 3 m. 
3f. 

2 m. 
2f. 

1 c. 

3 m. 
3f. 

2 m. 
2f. 
1 c. 



PL 



PI? 



an or npsri 
*ipip 



P?a 

few 



npsa 



i]pStf 



^P?FH 



KpStTO 

i T — . 

awpBFia 

t»: • 



Hp&PSK 
It t — • 

psnx- 

^lp|ps; 



Inf. 



P?E 



apBtf 



Imp. 
PL 



Put. 



PL 



2 m. 
2f. 
2 m. 
2f. 



3 m. 
3f. 

2 m. 
2f. 

1 c. 

3 m. 
3f. 

2 m. 
2f. 
lc. 



PB, p2 
*)pB 



PS?, p?: 



p? 1 ? 



P?r 



P?N 






pe 



P?5 
P?*$ 

■ppfc 

IP?: 



p?f; 



psrn 

rpsFn 



■ppenn 
psr-a 



1 Part. m. 

f. 

2 Part. m. 

f. 



p-S5 

air?? 



apra 

"t : — 
P?^ 



pjgSaa 



Pm 


. IV. Verba Ayin doubled 


§19. 


Par. V. 7:< 

Verba is. §20. 






Peal. 


Aphel. 


Ittaphal. 


Praet. 


;; in. 


P3 


P?S 


p~~>> 


PeaLPr. * 




3 1: 


rpi 


r )I"^ 


r™x 


&c reg. 




2 in. 


n rp- 


rp"8 


rp-rx 


Inf. -r- 




2f. 


ws 


r p"K 


r?~~^ 


Imp. l5 




1 c. 


np^i 


Fp"8 


f^w^ 




PI 


:\ in. 


i • - 


"??.*? 


^55$ 


I son an ) 




:>, f. 


i — 


»B?» 


i r _ _ . 


Fut. -b- 




2 in. 


TO 


■pngliH 


"•rp-rs 


1 Part. -:■ 

••T 




2 f. 


"P!! 

< 


< 


■""™ 


2 Part, vb" 




1 c. 


»;pi 


s:p-s 


sipina 








-i . _ 


t ' : •• — 


T i . _ _ . 


IthpeeL "bxx 


Inf. 




PT-? 


KOT» 


^p^na 








T T — 


r T — • 


PaeL Pr. i£ 












Imp. 


2 m. 


p*l 


pM« 


p-ra 






2 m. 


S|Sf 


^8 




Fut. -r- 


PL 


Ithpaal. "irrs 






1 


i . _ 

< 


> 




2 f . 


Kjptf 


*'">.* 


Wj^FNI 





Fut. 


3 m. 


pt 


PT. 


P5T): 


Aphel. Tbi» 




3f. 


p'-Fl 


PI® 


p~~^ 


Fut. -rbr 




2 m. 


p'lFl 


P 1 !!^ 


p^nn 










2f. 


"P^ 


rae 


■fpnnFi 


Par. VL 




1 c. 


p'-*5 


P? 1 * 


P3*3K 


Verbs -3. §20. 


PL 


3 m. 

3f. 


iP?: 


T«pT 

"Pi: 


TPFsc 
TO 


Peal.Pr. zv~ 




2 m. 

2f. 


■pp?n 




■ppwn 


Fut. 2"j" 




Pael.Pr. MT 




1 c. 


p%n 


pi= 


P353 


Fut, z^" 


lPart 


. m. 


pp? 
»BP S 3 










f. 




Apli.Pr. -"j-^ 


2 Part 


. m. 


PTJ? 


psg 


P3M 


Iuf. K3D"» 

T T 




f. 


«BT?? 


*m 


Kgwm 


Fut. ttr 



80 



Par. VII. Verbs Ayin Vav. § 22. 





Peal. 


Ithpeel. 


Pael. 


Ithpaal. 


Praet. 3 m. 


*S? 


dpna 


d*p 


d^ria 


3f. 


m 


n^pnis: 


f^fi 


tiajE>j»i 


2 m. 


n rrap 

t : : »t 


tt?i?$*? 


*?S32 


n^priK 


2f. 


*m 


n^pna 


WE 


waapiS« 


1 c. 


nt?J5 or n^ji 


haprw 


ftSJB 


P95BW 


PL 3 m. 


to§ 


^5^ • 


^?.E 


^gr« 


3f. 


' »*£ 


»apn« 

t >t : • 




»5!EP» 


2 m. 


■psftB 


^n^m 


■jnnaag 


■priK^re 


2f. 


J3^E 


■jn-jpna 


"TO 


•jn^rpnis; 


1 c. 


wed 


&C/5pna 


m*& 


»:£*pri» 

t : — t— : • 


Inf. 


(rip# d$3. 


t't : • 


^;e 


^;ew 


Imp. 2 m. 


d^p 


dpna 


d?P 


d^pra 


2f. 


^p 


^Fl» 


h ^*B 


^*e*?*? 


PL 2 m. 


ttnp 


w|sj« 


*3?E 


^pra 


2f. 


»3fflp 


*tt/jpna 

t : »t : • 


t : ■■*— 


KKa-yana 


Fut. 3 m. 


d^ 


dpir 


d?e: 


dipr; 


3f. 


d^ipn 


dpnn 


ojpn 


ft>pTp\ 


2 m. 


d^ipn 


dpnn 


d.^pn 


d^pnn 


2f. 


■pSpFI 


p-^Firi 


■pB*pn 


■p^pnn 


1 c. 


Q^pK 


B 2^ 


&;£$ 


d^pna 


PL 3 m. 


' fffiWfT 


TO? 


t*?E? 


ihe*?: 


3f. 


tw 


■&E 


he: 


1TO 


2 m. 


yv&pQ 


^RFI 


^ppi 


l^prin 


2f. 


"j#S 


KB*$ 


he*? 


T9?E*?fc 


lc. 


cepb 


BI?FI? 


d :P? 


dggM 


1 Part. m. 


&$,&»!? 




P5E9 




f. 


t : 't 




a^pE 




2 Part. m. 


dt? 


DjJljfi? 


d!P'^ 


d^pri/j 


f. 


swt? 


sapna 

t't : • 


t: '— : 


r: ' : • 



Par. VII. Verba Ayin Vav. g &2. 81 



Aphcl. 


Ittaphal. 


Polel. 


Itlipohil. 


D"ptf 


BT?™ 


D'^P 


c-rprx 


(E) n?T?« 


rrrpria 


roanip 


natripna 


p rwpa 

t : : ••• -: 


P^T^PH 


WW 


na£ripna 

t : - ' : • 


FraTja 


na-prrsi 


FlBtfip 


nrraipn» 


(K) totj« 


r r"P^ 


ronljp 


raaipria 


WRfl 


wfrW 


vr:-'p 


fafripna 


tfa*p8 

t •• -: 


«-r pna 


tfEaip 


Kfrprx 


V^7K>* 


fimpna 


■pn--r'p 


■j-.r.-r'prs; 


Bffl2!| 


•rrrpna 


1WP 


■jn^pr« 


*99B» 


K:irpn« 

t : '• : • 


»wfiip 


fctttiaipna 

t : — i 


t »t -: 


tf-jpna 

t't : • 


atttfip 


t t ' : • 


D-'pa 


D^pnx 


trartp 


DHipna 


vp* 


TP™ 


"r'^P 


"2'2'Tr^ 


^pa 


vrprs; 


wqr^p 


rz-z-prs 


x:^p« 

t : >•• -: 


au-rppia 


t : •• I 


M9r£lpnM 

t : — ' : • 


BPpJ 


D-prr 


Mipj 


dariprr 


D^pn 


DT?Wl 


DtfipPi 


dttipnFi 


D*pn 


n^pnn 


tflft*? 


cwrtpnFi 


TTO 


■prpnn 


patfpp 


l^raipnFi 


B"pa 


°"pr^ 


Bcri^Mj 


&?pr«$ 


T«w 


twW? 


■parflpj 


-vrfprr 


m 


rrp^r 


IrrTr 


W^'P*?: 


j»w 


prpft 


fmgipn 


fratfipniFi 


WW 


"WW*? 


Vff'P 1 ? 


wft*ft 


D"pp 


°"P^? 


C';ipp 


Ds^ipna 


D*pE 




DHip^i 




warra 

t m : 




a-fripE 





flOpB Htinra aaataa M&srbra 

H : t '• : • t : I : t : ' : • 



82 Par. VIII. Verbs Lamedh Aleph. § 23. 





Peal. 


Ithpeel. 


Pael. 


Praet. 3 m. 


^_ \ t aba 


h ^?^ 


*s 


3£ 


nba 

r : 


n^awj 


n *T-r n ^5 


2 m. 


rr^J rsjfs 


P!?V}$ 


0^5 


2f. 


^r- M?? 


rrbsna 


n "r? 


1 c. 


^r ^3 


rrt??r^ 


T n ~ fi'ba 


PL 3 m. 


ib? 


rtstjij 


^r vita' 


3f. 


rnaba 

t t : 


KjbVjJJ 


»sjTa 


2 m. 


■pH^? 


ittrtaji$ 


ft) -prt» 


2f. 


■jrrta 


"p"*?W 


@ rt 


1 c. 


t •• : 


armaria 


(b) ar^a 


Inf. 


t : t •• : • 


nabsntf 

t t : : • 


riaiba 

T T — 


Imp. 2 m. 


*_ **_. *b$ 


• a_ ^stjs 


SI- ^Z 


2f. 


h _ aba 


*&»*$ 


aba 


PL 2 m. 


*i 


ftana 


iba 


2f. 


w^l 


awbana 

t t : : • 


wyi 


Put. 3 m. 


v s6?r 


% abarv 


N KjS- 


3f. 


i&F) 


absnri 


abari 


2 m. 


j*&5^ 


HbariF) 


K-fifl 


2f. 


t^ 


"bsnn 


T^M 


1 c. 


*&3§ 


^?^S 


*&3$ 


PL 3 m. 


■fto* 


T&3*?? 


•fibrr 


3f. 


$?: 


1*5*?? 


t£ 


2 m. 


■pbsn 


"pbr,nn 


■ffean 


2f. 


"b;.n 


rbsmn 

"t : - : • 


fbjn 


1 c. 


^?? 


ab?ft? 


n^2? 


1 Part. m. 


? - **5?5 




■*- &6SS 


f. 


aria 

t : t 




srt?? 



2 Part. m. S *sS V ^5$$? ^ 

f. arba arbana arbaa 



Par. VIII. Verba Lamedh AlepL § 23. B3 



[thpaal. 


ApheL 


Ittaphal. 


% "'^nx 


% ^JM 


*bap« 


rrbaria 


rrba« 


r ^"-. r i' :: ~^ 


rriawj 


rr_ n*! ivbaa 

• t t • : — 


rrb:rx 


rrbana 


rrtaK 


rrbara 


r^ana 


•n- rrbaa 


r-b;rx 


rbawa 


^1 rbaa 


^r : ~^ 


nifbarto 


x-b:a 

t • : — 


x-b':rs 

t • : — * 


1*n^3n» 


■pr-b;x 


■prrb:rx 


■jrrbans 


■;p-b:x 


■p-bars: 


M^ana 


xrb:a 

t • : — 


M-barw 


t t — : • 


n«ba« 


nxbana 


k_ *bana 


a- ^ 


x^ -bars; 


scans 

t— ; 


aba a 

t : — 


xbrrx 


ftari« 


ibaa 


ibana 


wSriK 


K?§3* 


Krb*am« 

T " — • 


% "- ^.5P? 


•»- % «ba; 


*_ *_ sb:r; 


Kbarin 


atban 


Rbarri 


abanpi 


*&}5 


KbjFFI 


VbainFi 


■pbsn 


T^JPB 


»bari« 


Kb?*? 


«b?F!« 


pan; 


j&r 


■jibarr 


rt»r 


ifc: 


#»: 


■jibanin 


■pban 


""br.rr, 


rbann 

It : — : • 


#» 


"' : '™ 


*feW 


aba? 


Kbana 




% *J}« 






arbya 




4 *tewa 


"%?9 


»b?rai 


fcrtano 


x-b:-: 


a-barra 



84 Par. IX. Declension of Nouns masculine. 

Sing. Abs. Const. Emph. Suff. 3 s. m. Suff. 2 pl.m. 

Dec. I. Singular. § 31. 

(a) -raS ^fita arfitt iwib 'fte'tifi 

(*) "£*$ i^kor^ ajb^ n?b^ ^jV« 

Dec. II. Singular. § 32. 

(a) Db? db? *ab? rrab? pEb? 

V.^ — t — t t;it •• : it | : — t 

(P) in? in? ajra ^?m? i^n? 



Dec. III. Singular. § 33. 



0) 


M 


Tear 


t : • 


"T?. 


!fi*S?T 


fe> 


dbn 


b£q 


awaSh 

t : v 


w^O 


pjbbn 


w 


ir? 


r? 


T " 




pr? 


(*) 


^p 


wp 


*N?7i? 

(or Rlfi'lg etc.) 


WtWg 


pvn 


(/) 


^i?^ 


^!?rt? 


abttgfta 


riSjbgpt? 


pbtpgra 






Dec. IY. Singular. § 34 


. 




(a) 


^5 


3 5 


T — 


tta§ 


■fbaa 


(») 


T? 


*? 


S&F? 


rw 


p-T? 


w 


DS 


Dk 




N5a§ 


Tfe^t 



Dec. V. Singular. § 35. 

(a) aba aba a^ba prba -rtrba 

\ y •• t •• t t : t •• : t J • t 

■ 

Dec. VI. Singular. § 36. 

**?7B h ^7E ™"?7P w &?75 'p^7P 



Par. IX. Declension of Nouns masculine. 85 



Plur. Aba. 


( Jon 


Bmph. 8u 


ff. 3. b. no. 


Saff. 2. p 






Dj» . I. I'll KM.. 






■nfa 


■nWD 


T — 


Wft%) 


•;:— j 


■p^TJ 


•• r 


K 3b\X 

t — r 


T 


1 •• T 






J)i:c. II. PLUBAL, 






■pj^ 


•• : it 


t — : it 


rrrabs 

: it 


1 •• : it 


twp 


■WtD 
.. _. T 


mm 

T— "J T 


■ntona 

~S T 


1 - .-'.:? 






Dec. III. 1'i.i;i:ai,. 






T9§5 


T^B 


Kjabg 


•tfstyi 


T^T^S 


1"-" 


T-I 


r— : • 


TTteT 


Tfrroj 


ra&n 


"abn 


K;**n 


■*Jfe$0 


l^'rr"; 


TffS 


■w 


T— •* 


Trtr* 


"0-'.-"' 




(w) 


(KJS' 1 ?) 


(■ri-rr) 


(r=T~) 


r*» 




t — : >r 


^rra-p 

• : 't 


T 6 ^ 


yitpgrra 


iPJRp? 


arbtapnB t 

t— : •— : • 


T&tjgna 


"pb"bi:pntJ 






Dec. IV. Plural, 






rw 


"58 


•J58 


--I35 


T^g 


Tfl 


"!? 


T— • 


rrtr? 


7-"-!< 


■pw. 


^ 


T — \ 


TT^ 


yirrK 






Dec. V. Plural. 






*S1 


*ba 

•' T 


»*ba 

r— t 


-nibs 

• T 


T*$* 


^ 


"%?» 


K*?S 


17&?8 





Dec. VI. Plural. 

rWTB -W?32 *^r72 tJ*«9iB pW& 



86 Par. X. Declension, of Nouns feminine. 





Abs. 


Const. Emph. 


Suft'. 3 s. m. ! 


8uff.2p].m. 






Dec. VII. Singular. § 


37. 




(a) 


t • : 


w*m #$Fjn 


Wfii^TO 


^Sft'rT? 


(?) 


111Z37J 


rrnizja arnica 


Fiftnica 


ybrr-ym 


00 


%b m q 


: — r : — 

Plural. 


fin^ba 


■jfen^i 


(«) 


W™ 


nrta anna 

t • : tt • : 


vrirwa 

• t • : 


rfererta 

? :t • : 


(*) 


It : : — 


mizia tfmtia 

t : : — tt : : — 


%7iinnrca 


fbt\^y4'2 


V) 


"T3?^9 


rvsba ^ni3b/j 

t : : — tt : : — 


tytejaba 


fbmpba 






Dec. VIII. Singular. § 


1 38. 




(a) 


abana 


rf>tf?K artba^a 


w§rn» 


^bnb/jnx 


(i) 


a ta b3 

t : t 


rvbs «rrbs 

- : T T • T 


•• • T 


T^?^? 


(o) 


toy 


: t : 

Plural. 


nnw 


"fbtvpj 


(a) 


■jbans 

it : : — 


rtarss *?!??$ 


"rtriHjs 


TtonbajK 


(J) 


r*>3 

It : t 


rvbs arrb-> 

t : t tt : r 


• t : t 


f^lrrbs 

' : t: t 


0>) 


"'* 


t :— tt : — 


^'rtdr 


V^si 



Dec. IX. Singular. § 39. 
Plural. 

|tt;I- t t : '— tt t ; I— • tt:'— I :tt:'- 



Par. XI. Numerate. 



87 







Par. 


XI. Ni mi.i: LL8. 






A. 


Cardinals from 1 


i ^o i". 






M:i-ul 


inc. 




Feminine. 






Abs. 




Con 


Abs. 


< loost. 


1 


in 




in 


t -: 


r-r 


2 


xy\ 




^ 


PsOT 


*™ 


3 


nnbn 

t t : 




nnbn 

— t ; 


t : 




4 


nsr\s 




raana 


*snK 


W^ 


5 


Kitan 




inston 


"^™ 


•• t : — 


6 


T • 




ntrij 


rraj 


.. r 


n 


t : • 




T&2W 


ynizi 


•• r : • 


8 


»;?» 




MEFI 


"Sp 


••r: — : 


9 


t : • 




n?tin 


ran 


W1BF 

•• T 


10 


xnoy 




mc* 


X? 


*n-cs 



11 

12 

13 

14 
15 

16 

IT 

18 

19 



Jj. Cardinals from 11 
Masculine. 

WJ^J "" : TT: 

- - • I no* amc 
T™ ) ~~ ! T ' 

Ctnn) j n S ««? 

( TBj tf T " =ri 

x? toot 



to 19. 

Feminine. 

\ .. : .. : _/ •• : — t : _ 

(^crra) *np3 m? 
(^oniD) " :_ " : 



88 



Par. XL Numerals. 



C. Ordinals from 1 to 10. 

Masculine. Feminine. 



No. 



Abs. 



Emph. 



Abs. 



Emph. 



1 




•575 


n 9?7E 


ri ?'97i? 


sntvwjE 


2 




I:? 1 ? 


tt : • 


tt: • 


T ... . 


3 


( h *?bn) 


Trbn 


narrbn 

t t • : 


arrbn 

t • : 


t •• • : 


4 




— • : \ t 


t/ t t • : 


t t • : 


t : t • : 


5 




*4%V> 


t t • -: 


t t • -: 


t • • -: 


6 


(™) 


wrnzi 


narrrnD 

t t • : 


t t • : 


t •• • : 


7 




•yitj 


naroiD 

t t • : 


t t • : 


arpyaTD 

t •• • : 

. (anshazj) 


8 




wa$ 


tt • : 


tt • : 


awran 

t : • : 


9 




•gwtfpi 


t t • : 


t t • : 


«h^p(^5 


10 




^TD2 


ntfrw 


nanw 


arvTDs 



A 

CHALDEE CHRESTOMATHY; 

CONSISTING OF EXTRACTS FROM THE TARGUMS, ACCOMPANIED BY 

NOTES ON THEM, AND <>X THE BIBLICAL CHALDEE, 

WITH A VOCABULARY. 



There are ten Targums* or Chaklcc translations of the Scriptures ex- 
tant. No one of them, however, includes the whole of the Old Testament, 
and some only a single book or a few books. Daniel, Ezra, and Nehe- 
niiah have never been translated into Chaldee. At least, no Targums of 
these books are now extant. 

The Tarjrum of Onkelos on the 1'entateuch, from which tin; sen- 
tenees in Part 1. are extracted, is the most esteemed of all the Targums, 
both for its faithfulness, and for the purity of the language employed. 
It is so literal that, being set to the same musical notes as the Hebrew 
text, it was read or eantilated in the synagogues on the Sabbath, in con- 
nection with the Hebrew lesson appointed for the day. See Prideaux, 
Conn. Vol. IV. p. 623. Respecting Onkelos little is known. Prideaux 
places him before or about the time of our Saviour. Home (Introd. 
Vol. II. p. 158,) gives the same as the generally received opinion. 
Jahn (Introd. p. 65 of the English transl.) supposes him to have written 
in the second century. The same is Prof. Winer's opinion. Compare 
his dissertation De Onkeloso, etc. § 1. But Gesenius maintains very 
satisfactorily the former opinion, Einl. zu Jesa. §11. 

The Targuui next in value, and probably also in time, is that of 
Jonathan the son of Uzziel, who translated the books of Joshua, Judges, 
I. and II. Samuel, I. and II. Kings, Isaiah, Jeremiah, Ezekiel, and the 
twelve minor prophets. He is generally thought to have been earlier 
than Onkelos. Prideaux assigns him a later date, for the very probable 
reason, that he would not have commenced his translation at Joshua, 
unless the books of Moses had been already extant in Chaldee.' 

There are two other Targums of the Pentateuch, both of a late date. 



* The word is Chaldee, dWHR , (from byipj to interpret), lit. an interpretation, a 

paraphrase. Its use is limited however to the Chaldee versions of the Scriptures. 



90 CHALDEE CHKESTOMATHY. 

To the unknown author of one of these the name Pseudo- Jonathan has 
been applied, because it was long supposed to have been written by Jon- 
athan Ben-Uzziel. The following literal translation of Num. 24 : 24, as 
it stands in this Targum,* shows how little care the author took to give 
the simple sense of the Hebrew text ; while the mention of Constanti- 
nople and the Lombards makes it certain that this Targum was not the 
work of Jonathan Ben-Uzziel. It was probably composed in the ninth 
century. " And wings (ships ?) shall come with instruments of war, and 
shall go forth with great multitudes from Lombardy and from the land 
of Italy, and shall be joined with the legions which shall come from 
Constantinople ; and they shall afflict the Assyrians and enslave all the 
sons of Eber ; but the end of these, as well as of those, shall be to fall 
by the hand of king Messiah ; and they shall be destroyed forever." 

The Jerusalem Targum, so called from the dialect in which it was 
composed, is the other of the two mentioned above. It belongs proba- 
bly to an age still later than the preceding. It is very imperfect, omit- 
ting many verses, and so loosely rendering the rest, that it hardly deserves 
the name even of a paraphrase. It abounds, much more than the Tar- 
gum of the Pseudo- Jonathan, with digressions and fables, which may be 
traditions of some antiquity. No IV. of Part II. may serve as a 
specimen. Both these Targums abound in Greek and other foreign 
words. In the above extract, the word translated multitudes is ■p&siVbK , 
plainly nothing but a Chaldee plural of the Greek oy\o% , and the word 
rendered legions "p^^fe . 

These four are the longest and most valuable of all the Targums. 
The first two are esteemed most highly as affording critical aid to the 
student of the Hebrew Scriptures, and (especially that of Onkelos) in- 
troducing us to a pure Chaldee, nearly resembling the style of Daniel 
and Ezra. Being extremely literal, they also serve to vindicate the He- 
brew text, as it has come down to us, against those who charge the Jews 
with having corrupted it for the sake of evading the arguments of 
Christians. The other two mentioned above, and indeed all the Tar- 
gums, are valuable as affording many expositions, particularly of passages 
relating to the Messiah, which agree with those given in the New Testa- 
ment. These passages many of the modern Jews attempt to explain 
away, so as to get rid of the evidence that Jesus was the Messiah. 
Several examples of this kind are given by Prideaux (Conn. Pt. II. B. 
VIII. p. 639, seq.) One instance will suffice here. 

* The English translation of this passage, which is literal, is as follows : " And 
ships shall come from the coast of Chittim, and shall afflict Asshnr, and shall afflict 
Eber, and he also shall perish forever." 



i;i.m \i:k- OK i in TABGUM8. 91 

"Mioah 5 : 2. And thou Bethlehem Ephratah out 

of thee shall conn forth unto rm />> that is to be ruler in Israel. 
This lb the true translation of the Hebrew text, and this .-ill Christians 
understand of the Messiah] and bo anciently did the chief priest 
scribes of the people of the Jews, when consnlted by Herod. But 
.since thai time, in opposition to the gospel, Jewish writer- have endeav- 
ored to give this texl another meaning, some interpreting it of Hezekiab, 
some of Zerubbabel, and Borne otherwise. 1 > w i Jonathan, who per- 
ohance was one among those scribes whom Herod consulted, gives the 
true meaning oi it b) interpreting it of the Messiah, in the same man- 
ner as Christians do : for his version of the text is: Out ofthei ehaU 
come forth befon rm the Messiah, who shall exercisi sovereign ruli 
over Israeli (Id. p. 6 12.) 

Lu another place (p. 635) Prideanx remarks, thai u the Targnms of 
Jonathan and Onkelos arc in bo great esteem amongthe Jews, thai they 
hold them to be of the same authority with the original Bacred text." 

The other Targums arc, one on the Hagiographa; one on the Megil- 
lot/t or five books of Ecclesiastes, Song of Solomon, Lamentations, Roth 
and Esther; three on Esther alone; and one on the two books of Chron- 
icles, The first has been ascribed to Rabbi Joseph the blind, who lived 
in the third century. But neither the dates Vor authors of these 
Targnms arc known with certainty. The barbarous Btyle in which they 
are written, is considered as affording sufficient proof that they are com- 
paratively modern; though they appear to have been compiled from 
more ancient materials. 

For a full account of the Targums, see Prideaux, Conn. Vol. IV. 
pp. 018—645. Home's Introd. Vol. II. pp. 157—163. Walton, Pro- 
leg. XII. ^ 4 — 20, and Winer, De Onkeloso ej usque paraphrasi Chal- 
daica Dissextatio. Compare also Stackhouse's Hist, of the Bible, pre- 
lim, discourse p. 90, seq. Calmet's Diet, of the Bible, articles Jonathan, 
Onkelos, aud Targum. Father Simon's Crit. Hist. B. II. Ch. 18. Eich- 
horn's Einleitung ^ 213—245. De Wette, Einl. ^ 57— 62. Wolffii 
Bibliotheca Hebraea Vol. II. pp. 1135 — 1189. Allix, Judgment of the 
ancient Jewish Church, etc. Ch. VII. Carpzov. Critica Sacra, Part II. 
Ch. I. Gesenius, Conim. uber Jesa. Einl. § 11, aud Jahn's Introd. to 
the 0. T. pp. 6-1— 68 of the English translation. 



PART I. 

SELECT SENTENCES FOR GRAMMATICAL EXERCISE. 



: *un« m »*w rv *• ana raitia 

it: — ;-: t - : ;- at: -it : J i- :»- : 



NOTES. 

The sentences of this Part are all taken from the Targum of Onkelos 
on the Pentateuch. They stand in the order of their selection, as it was 
thought that any of them would be sufficiently simple for grammatical 
analysis by those already familiar with Hebrew. 

The reader will observe, on comparing the translation with the He- 
brew text, that the sa^ne train of accents appears in both. § 2. 9. b. This 
agreement is not perfect throughout. Where however the train of accents 
in the Targum is different from that of the Hebrew text, the accents are 
still similar. For the sake of comparison with the Hebrew, the accents 
are inserted in these sentences. 

1. Gen. 1 : 1, Y^.P. > P uir - °f D 1P Decl. III. a. comp. § 33. a. 2 prep, is 
prefixed regularly with -7 as in Hebrew. Lit. in principiis. — ^ , § 4. note. 
This is strictly an abbreviation, and must not be read ysya, as though it 
were a distinct name. It is said by some to have been formed by prefixing 
the first letter of rvirn to the last of ^X , thus combining the Q,£ri with 
the Kgthib and saving the trouble of marginal notes. Others affirm that 
its original form, which indeed appears in some editions, was ■,% , i. e. the 
initial of hirT} repeated three times to express Trinity; and that later 
Jews, rejecting the doctrine of the Trinity, have preferred the other form, 
and given it the other explanation. It is pronounced Adho-nay. As here, 
it is generally employed in the Targums to render D^n^tf , when the latter 
stands alone (i. e. without any other name of God) and signifies the true 
God.— n? , i. q. Heb. PS .— x*au? , emphatic state from "pEi2J , not used in the 
abs. form. See § 29. 3. c. The term emphatic seems to .imply more than 
it really means ; and the reader of Chaldee naturally inquires how strong 



h.i.i i i n 1 3. 



rw ■noTrrtt nrp n»b ; ntvi rcaja rrarr '•PflfoTr 3 

,. . .. 1 .. T |. JT . ... rtTT -. _ *■•-:- • : •— 

txjm "jED TP1 DOT R^SNtoa n-r:;u; n©'^ n§*i ;- ti; ; 

♦ Pv? 

it: - - Kt : • : rtT • • v Ijt i-- t : ;- • -;t : — t »•• 

that emphasis ran be, which falls upon three-fourths of the nouns with 
which he meets. Perhaps the term definite would be preferable, if the 
other were not in use. A noun in the emphatic Btate expresses usually the 
same idea which would he expressed in Ilehivw by the noun with the 
article.— KS^N , emph. state. See r-jx in the vocabulary. 

2. Gen. 9:9, KMO, §7. (/. 1.— D*|?a, do establish, 1st Part. Pael from 
0*p, § 22. 3.— 'pS'nna from ina, § 8. 3. II. Note 4.— The first two accents 
in this sentence differ from those of the corresponding Hebrew words. In 
stead of Ilebhia the Hebrew has Zaqeph Ghadhol, and instead of Merka, 
Darga. The two former are both large disjunctives, and the two latter 
both conjunctives, and of course might easily be interchanged. Perhaps 
however the accents were originally transferred to the Targum from a 
Hebrew MS. which had Rebhia and Merka. The remaining accents in 
this sentence are the same as in the Hebrew. Similar remarks might be 
repeated on the other sentences ; but it will be unnecessary. 

3. Gen. 9 : 13, "TOp , with suff. 1. p. sing, from ntip , Dec. III. a.— 
rv^rn , 1. sing. Pr. Peal from arn , I do set. § 50. 1. The Hebrew likewise 
has the Praeter W: .— ^nn apoc. for Kinw 2 f. sing. Fut. from i^H . See 
the note at the close of § 23.— rx , const, state, — being immutable.— " | W , t| , 
pronounced mem-ii, § 2. 3. In sense it is precisely equivalent to the He- 
brew "VJJB? , myself or me. See lO^B in the vocabulary. 

4. Gen. 9 : 27, ifoB?, 3 sing. m. Fut. Aphel from ftnfi . § 6. d. 1.— h , sign 
of the Accusative case, § 60. 3. — And shall caicse his glory to dwell, i. e. 
and he [God] shall dwell.— m— pleonastic suffix, § 47. 2. lit. in the tents of 
hi in. (even) of Shem, "n , sign of the Gen. case, § 60. I.— Servant to them ; 
Hebrew fab *D3 ; Sept. 7rat? avrov' Vulg. servus ejus. But the Syriac, 
Arabic, and Samaritan versions agree with our Targumist in giving a 
plural rendering. 

5. Gen. 13:15, Mil, § 23. 1. note.— -|-;r.x . 1 sing. Fut. from *,r: ; 



u 



CHKESTOMATHY, PART. I. 



|: • I" *r s -: at:- jt : •• : J i- •• : u 

ikmo a^t-M »afltth M^tsa ^ tib jfti 7 

it : - : it • t - : • t — • t : It \ i- • ; ' 

i- t : • 

sD-^rA tr ■fwsfl rte}-a -pt 1 j»8 "rbfci 9 

• it : • : i-t ! «»: — : -: Hj- T -: .— ^ 



-rj t tttisrv^i2 areoi rrrtrp twoi fljb%5 w *gji6 10 

!•>:—:• i-: t : — j* j- • : t : : <••••: — at: — 

it — : — 



: lb it9»i trnn tesbj ibki n 

I it - i- -:- Jt: >•: • : at -:— 



"S 1 - with 3 epenthetic, i. q. ft— ; § 16. note 1. — ~2^b , to #u/ sons. 
See 13. 

6. Gen. 15 : 6, 'pavi , Aphel from ja'^l&K , (see the latter word in the 
lexicon). § 20. 3. b and § 12. II. 5.— ^ awn , *Ae £ord, i. q. W$ , § 49. 
1. c. But this expression, which occurs frequently in the Targums as a 
translation of the Hebrew rvirp , is considered by some critics as desig- 
nating that Word which was afterwards " made flesh and dwelt among 
us."— nacn, He (the Lord) reckoned it, § 16. 2. a.—ttb, § 7. d. 

7. Gen. 27 : 28, 5, sign of the Gen. case, § 60. 1. 

8. Gen. 42 : 38, hSffVj , Fut. of nns , Tseri compensating for Daghesh 
forte, omitted on account of the guttural. — iKWSK , § 6. b. 

9. Gen. 45 : 4, W ^Beam , § 48. 1. W , pleonastic. 

10. Gen. 49 : 10, ''W , for KW , § 6. cZ. 1. — "it&Wi 135 , one exercising 
sovereignty, a ruler. — ""Sa , irreg. see "ia . — fi^ll , (=Hebrew .... ittjx 
"lb), to whom, § 8. 3. II. n. 3. — SWri , the pron. used for the substantive 
verb in the present tense. See § 47. 1. — ■jWQX-NB? , Ithpe. from sais, § 6. b. 
— K*B»? , irreg. see D? . One bearing rule shall not depart from (be want- 
ing to) the house of Judah, nor a scribe from the posterity of his sons for- 
ever ; until Messiah shall come, whose is the kingdom ; and to him shall the 
people hearken, or, him shall they obey. 

11. Ex. 33: 14, inaavi, my glory, doubtless equivalent to the Hebrew 
^a , my presence, i. e. a mere periphrasis for /, used of course only in rela- 
tion to God. Comp. nos. 4 and 13.— Tftn , § 22. 1.— rpMt , Aph. Fut. 1st 
pers. sing, from HW , I will provide a resting place, "b ,for thee. 



-i i.i . n 1 8. 



a:a rbrn rinn ■idnra r-zb-. wicar -':-- n-z-— an'Tr 

ranp-rinpi Vifiki nbxb rbi "~x* rii-z tbsii: —is- 13 

i crjb 

x-Eba r^zn-i:a-7rp-z — is -- z-.r, ian -rr-rzz- ,, 

jt— : — T : • : It't • •• : r: j A - r -: .».:•: 

ihrtr Twra n-z afar rr"~^ Ratafia 15 
: ■: a-i z -nrTw r*« rib *tp-rJ ,,-, 

I- • — Vt -: rr :: Ivt /•• t 

:-- - R3rib» -* bx™ mi it 

it rr: t v t t v: ;t : a-t : • \- : 

: aoartaw rtfiriKtt 'nzb-bsz mb« ■* rr arnw i 8 

1 it : • t : I it :- t ] ' 't • t : Imtv: jt: v - ••- : 

:trtrai fccn^a "punn v-~ — s RTtariv ■ramro 19 

• it : • : /t : — : I v. •• -: | |T- •■ -: at • - ' I _ :— : 

12. Lev. :}<\ : 2, *V?i § S. 3. II. note 3.— T^rn* 1st Part. Pe. from brW — 
"p^HI "Jinn j treat the house of my sanctuary with habitual reverence. 

Such appears to be the force of this combination. See § 51. 1. 

13. Lev. 26: 12, vnx, 1st pen. Bing. fur. Pe. from x-n. instead of the 
usual form Wrm, § 23. 1. b. note. For the plural sulT. of "pa and fflJ3 

§ S. 3. II. note 4. 

14. .Num. 10: 36, ITfothB, a plural, with suffix of the third person sing., 
formed from the inf. Pe. of K"jti, § 35. note 2. In its restings. i, e. when- 
ever it rested. — The frequent repetition of Maqqeph in this sentence is not 
occasioned by any special intimacy of connection between the words thus 
joined. Its cause exists in the train of accents, which is the same as in 
the Hebrew. Three words are introduced into the Targum which do not 
appear in the original — " Dwell in thy glory, in the midst of" — but for these 
there is no accent. It. is for this reason that they are joined by Maqqeph 
to the next word. The four words are, in cantillation. theoretically one. 

15. Num. 24 : 5. •fttpE . thy valley, if we derive it from "ir? . But 
perhaps ■M8J' , B should be regarded as a verbal from fTTJJ . and then we may 
translate it dwelling, habitation. 

16. Deut. 5 : 7. 

17. Deut. 6 : 4. 
IS. Deut. 6 : 5. 
19. Deut. 10 : 19. 



96 CHKESTOMATHY. PAET I. 



ppiBffitt nnpnn ippEfircfti nbsn ttStfiw bfiin tinba *nv 20 



I it : — : /tt v: It: t': v- : t ^-: : • ivtt : • /t |« — t -: — 

: Tiraios tttje too *ra tenotf ttrsn Sa 22 

I 1 •• : ;••: t v- : at : J : • i- — J * 

W*BMTfi it'tes featfci fiTtt2ttfr ba^rartas tffiba rrb 23 

I-': : It-:- : t - : • <••: • : • h-t :• : tt •• *. t t v: /.. &tJ 

20. Deut. 10 : 20, frrtft, § 15. 3— nbsn, Qamets for Pattahh on account 
of a pause-accent. 

21. Deut. 32 : 18, r\n* , plur. const, from Vthn* . Lit. *Ae terrors of ^e 
Mighty One who created thee, thou hast forgotten ; i. e. the terrible and 
mighty One, § 61. 1. note 1.— "X^s, § 26. 2. a.— sn'vSDnx, § 23. note 1 — 
Nnp5^, § 12. I. note 2.— 7ft2? , § 16. 2. a.— CT^n, strong, mighty, occurs 
likewise in vs. 30, 31, as a rendering of the Heb. "VIS. 

22. Deut. 32 : 29, fihsfe^ plural from t)iO with suff. 3. pi. m. defectively 
written, § 6. c. (4.) 

23. Deut. 33 : 26, KttljX , an instance in which the emphatic state, (as is 
sometimes the case with the Hebrew article), corresponds to our indefinite 
article, a or an. — fi'^nsSttJ'n (scriptio plena). § 8. 3, I. note 1. Lit. who, his 
glory, i. e. whose glory, § 48, 1. 



PART II. 
EXTRACTS FROM THE TARGUMS. 



I. History of the Fall. Gen. 3.— Onkelos. 

naw trnba * -2? ^ una it- bbra d-~' -;n K^ni 1 
: sr:r; inn bs ^ ftoti &*b ■" t:s — a Rtttiipa ar.rsb 

r: • It • I : •• t t : — r •• -: t : ' t : • : 

■nr«tt o) : taw «naa"6n *tw a"-b anra maai ■> 
^b^ itto ribati ab - iw wwtwaaa "i &:r» 

t : •• • I j — t t : : r : • • : • • rt ■ 

raa «b »np.»b nn *vast\ i wtwin wii rra flfiHDP 4 
ffiKn W3B fltoTfl fata ■na M "DhD "6a "n« jWftffl 5 

It : - »•] : • 1 : •• : t : •• -: t : t>t: - : •• -:< I : 

1. "E n*ns , comparative, §64. 1. a. more cunning than. — Kd, every. — 
JJ . So the London Polyglott. which has been followed in the text of the 
Chrestomathy. Also Buxtorf Bibl. Heb. Basil. 1665. The Paris and Ant- 
werp Polyglotts read w». The title page of Minister's Bibl. Heb. Basil. 
1546 exhibits the form ?"V Compare the note on Parti. No. I. — :t.':s . 
Here likewise the Polyglotts differ, Buxtorf and the London edition giving 
constantly the Hebrew form, and the other two mentioned above. Xribs . — 
•jiibs^n. § 21. a. 

2. rnBQl. § 15. note 2. — fc»^5 f Fut. expressing the sense of the Eng. 
Potential mood, we may eat. 

3. flangR, Future Pael instead of pa^gR, § 2. 7. b. Buxtorf has IWlgR; 
the Antwerp and Paris Polyglotts. "JiaipR in Peal. 

4. iWWMa r,*3"2. nn ]\\\'. with a finite verb to denote certainty, as in He- 
brew. 

5. i», Part. Peil from R&l, § 6. d. (1). it is manifest before the Lord — 
VTPlfirv^. Use of 1 instead of another conjunction, same as in He- 
brew. innEr-* . Ithpaal Fut. 3d plur. fem.— "Jinn . Fut. Peal 2d plur. masc. 
from KYI.— -Taw, see an in Lex.— ysan, 1st Part. Peal from e=n § 32. 

7 



98 CHKESTOMATHY. PART II. 

anna mn : ti^b ntt—pa ^abn pm -jinrn $rasg 6 
a:b^a jsrpfi -pp^'b arnca ^ai bs^ab a:b"a at: *]» 
?ng? N^rqa ^ nbsai F£pa°j ro*c:*] jrq ab^ncab 
■psa paVtarg ^a sirr* "in^n w annsnaji jbsa* 7 
bjrrr ^r^ : ^ -p n i %t&\ -ppan. "bto -p'nb sitrtrfi s 
D"x THtwj'j a^r M^b anm ^brira nrrrba jn^crtg 
;"; «jtt jazro -b^a m DTrba £ b?]?."T? trwa&ti 9 
.rrwori trar;rbp~n* nEai : na ia ?rb rsuft orwb G^rrba 10 

•• : • It : 't — r— : it J t •• r- t t : • v: A 

b^b-ab^-a Timps h ^ Kbb h K"jan na ^abt« ■na Tib 

— •• : t : • : I t : >• — • tt • I • -: : at — • : — ■• -: it 

^b torn ^ s n "5a? nnsn^- anna cna i-^ai : rtea irgja 12 
ni2? arrn: annab Driba ?? i;aai : rrtean ajb^arfa 13 
E*nba ^ iaap : rrbsai wtpa a;*H anna magj h 

note 2, knowing [how to distinguish'] between, etc. — b .... "pa For this use 
of b after ^a comp. Stuart's Hebrew Chrestomathy. p. 83. Note on Gen. 
1 :6. 

6. ntn. , 3d sing. fem. Praet. Peal from xm .— tox (a medicine) appears to 
refer to the effect which Eve expected the eating of the fruit to have, in 
opening her eyes to a clearer vision. But all the other ancient versions 
agree with the English translation in rendering B^sb wsn , pleasant to 
the eyes.—lXyq , 2d Part. Pael. ft^a xbsnDxb myq expresses the idea con- 
veyed, according to the other translators, in the previous clause ; desirable 
to behold. FI53 is pleonastic— nS->0? . § 12. II. 1.— fia^xs, see ax in the 
vocab. — nati*'*,, § 7. d. 1. 

7. xnnsnx , 3d pers. plur. fem. Praet. Ithpaal, from nna ,— ^iJfnnSi, § 42, 
1. a. note— rj^n 5 § 12. I. 1. b— r:xn . see xpXfi in the vocab.— "pni , a 
Hebrew form. But Buxtorf points it T'nT . See his lexicon. 

8. "b^x . collective. For the pointing see § 31. b. note 1. 

10. P^b^n'n , § 13. 2. For the insertion of "> quiescent in the last sylla- 
ble of this word, and of n^EUJ , see § 12. I. 1. a. 

11. **n § 12. I. 1. b. But Buxtorf points it here ij8i .-b3"<ab , § 21. a. 
Inf. from bDX : . 

14. sHb, 2d. Part, from wb .— b^nn , Fut. from b]X : , § 21. a. 



i \ n:.\( re PROM 1MB i LBOUH8. 99 

s;z r;- :™i KT3?a - b3E rx D"i an r'zv" -x x;— b 
-^x JQSTI : T"- '-"""bi brrr mEfi b-.T, m"-":" , 

.. . r . It — •• t r ; -: ... It: - 

7Tb tottt KTl KPD3 ra* ttffi rui xrrx 72- -"2 

It • t •• : r T : ! •• lr ; I : r t • I rr 

xnnxb : KSiob rrt-ttrnn n*r rBipbfcirb maJTrra ie 
7:3 ]HbFj vzz ^*JW1 ■?::?::? "ex nxrcx ia» 

?jrnj?B "" ^r?"^Tr $2$3 M 1 ^ 1T*§ $3E *-** 

nsfena b^-n abna x""x utrt we bwn xb *mb 

t • : •• t t : lr • : t : — t • •• • •• t - •• : 

«ao?"rr tor} ^b rrarn ■piat'i 7™ s "■;- # bb iS 
»jn«i awti tj x™b teti »m wra \ Kbpm ^ 

t : — : :• — t:— •• It—: t -:•• ; r • : — : 

ma x-p^i ratoFi &r>B?b*i m x-i™-x wmarw man 20 

t t t»: : \t : — : : — t : — •• -: r •• : ; ■ t • : 

-zn :xi ; :vX~:z bz- x^x nn *ti -nw rfifi n-rr,x cftti 21 

.... TT ..... . T . T . T _. . .... T _ •• : • w * 

rtrteTitftrtp ^TTtitoi rrrtfwta D-xb c-n'bx ^ 

I ••:•!—: — hr • I • : •• : • : t t : • t : 

■wobga 'nrp rrn cn» xn trrrbx -- taai : -prizbx* 2a 
rx z;r k n-T trnJtrrata ww ran ata rrib ""- 



15. Wi, 1st Part. Peal, from nari § 12. I. 1. c. He will remember 
against thee what thou hast done to him.— yW$m , i. q. T»»*1J3 '{0 from the 
beginning — anciently. 

16. nxaox, Inf. Aphcl. See the paradigm.— T'ibn . Fut. 2d siog. tern. 
from iVj . — ^a . prep, a with suff. 2d sing. fern. See the table. 

17. Piibr^n, Fut. 2d sing. masc. from bax with fern. suff. 3d sing, and 3 
epenthetic. 

19. Knjl . defectively written. See X3pT . — PIB»"1 .from which. 

21. "f^ab , etc. garments of honor for the skin of their flesh. 

22. rnsb. Inf. Peal from stj, § 20. 4— rrsn . of himself independently, 
" ildam &as become the only [being - ] in the world [able] of himself to distin- 
guish good and er//." Onkelos seems to have considered the Hebrew 
JI3EIT3 singular, as indeed it is capable of being; and this probably led him 
to render 1HX3. (as one.) by "H' 1 H? only. The other Targumists agree 
with, or perhaps rather follow, Onkelos. Nearly all the ancient versions. 



100 CHEESTOMATHY. PART II. 

anp?"j trfifca ^ ^5|igi j ob?b wj bmi ^5 ^j$g 23 
cna-n h tpfvl J jafoa *tariOT ahs-iarrr rts-jb -fin 24 

,- t - 1 •• t : ! t — • • : : ■ : t : : — - — : • : ! v . •■■ : 

fcarw .1315 M kja^SIa; 1ti?7 an??!? VS^TE^a i^ah 



II. The same. Gen. 3. — Pseudo- Jonathan. 

nrrrbtf ^ ran an| t#i$ ijiQ td- 1 ^ Q h Sn nig k^rq i 
bss vto-n ab DTrba hh ^ttan atfltftpn «nn*6 iehi 

t * ] ; t t : — t : t : > — t : • : — t : 

•jbTS *rs ^^-j *nnb ar\n« maai : a rrttra ib\^ 2 

I- • •• •• — : • t: • : t : • — t -:- t • • |- • a 

nwra wj *«%« ■ftftift :te h ;ab smh ib rra anws 3 
aab^ ^a "pnnpn abi wsti "piton a6 *• Ta» anwa 

t : • ••! : *— : t : •••!:•• tt: — t t • 

"a ^d awawbs cm "flmafi ma &b annate ieki 

t •• t tt t — : ! : — : t r : • : — r: 

however, give the sense expressed in the English translation. — n&il Fut. 
of 2DD . 

23. l^na . . . .V, whence, § 48. 1. 

24. Tf^r) , Praeter Pael, merely a full orthography for 'jj'nn • — N3Bnna ; 
Part. Ithpe. fern. sing, agreeing with 831 n . — laa , Inf. from "iwa . 

1. las 1 }, for the pointing see below, No. III. (7) and (9). It will be un- 
necessary to notice such cases in future. — "n KattJipri, is it true that, etc. ? 
ii interrogative with Daghesh forte euphonic. So in Hebrew sometimes. 
Stuart's Heb. Gram. § 152. a. 

2. rriEX , § 15. note 2. The Qamets is probably the result of a pause 
in pronunciation, though no accents have been appended to this Targum. 
)\ , contraction for sob . 

3. 6W|»''; § 2. 6. c— ""a/n, see '3 in vocab. — &^W, Hhireq is short, the 
* being a mere mater leciionis, § 2. 1. 

4. *VD8< , etc., f/id serpent spake, calumniating his Maker, and said. 
— xn^ai'x 13, (comp. the Heb. Yaiz5 "J3 yrg, a fruitful hill, etc.) the 
thing made, the result of labor. Every workman hates the work of his own 
hands. 



i \ i i:\n- PROW Till; TABOU1C8. I"l 



... | ... . T . _. T . T | T . .. , _. •• T 

: ts-ub z-j ■pa "-:-;b 'ffflm ■pancp r?$S? V'™" 
ffna nm rib^rrfi arris ?ixb^ bx~z rr srrx tram 



::r^ ••:-- fenlnpb x^n ^ica tfnai bjrab wX:r^ z:: 
mi» *irn rtmin w rrewi i b->n pie- nb-zb 7 

-: t • I •• : — •• •• It -:- ; • : - t : r • t -: - : 

PP3 lar-arsi mstta *i ; -,zb to ^bawiKi ttr« rutarrP 

• : : • : t : : I • ::—:•: I • 1 . t • : — 

nan rsn "siwa rinb wem rinrmna ran -rim 

t r : i . .. •• : — . | : • — : 1 : : I- : — I -:- 

b"wt«a D-n'bx ^1 *nena bp it wauft : -pflap rnb s 

: t : — t : •• '— - r : I • •— I : 

Dip « n-nm:^ tna -tarni »trr raab wrwraa 

r'r: I • ••:.•: r t — : • : r -:• r • •: 

trrt» ■" fcTO : Mvwa "fib 1 * rorsnaa crrfc* M 9 

T : tI; r • • •• r • • : • • VJ T S " 

icton -zip \ba nrtn «Bb$ bb a'bn rrb tdki D~ab 

t -: t t 't: • t •• : • r : — -: •• — t : t r : 

a'bn wp to nmamib -pba izo rdm am arrihas 

—. t t't: I • r t : • ; It-: — : ::— I •• : t :• 

: fflprrem sotm m* «i toh a:x rrn istra pom ma 

It: I. - ; T — I • I • I — : ■• T tt — :• ::— : — t 

*Kbw& mt rrtrm nrrwaaa rwool shoto bp rr naffi 10 

• t : — -: • •• : T • • : • t : It : '- - — t : lyj 

: mmd^ to m-iirai *ra mow -ampsn Htrvtra 

t • I • • : • • : • • t -: - •-:!•—: tt ; • 

a-b-a tb to Kab*n pik "ifrtnp tfn» ib -•- 72 itM 1 ! 11 

tt I • t ; • : — • t • : — -■ It •• — I — - t : 

w^rns ni» ion : nbsa ppw torob »Vn sirrpsi l2 

t : • t t — t : : : t -: •• • — •• : t : P» s !• - s 

■W" : rrbzai «ab-» tb to "b rcrr an **aa pom 



ir 



13 



5. "pa'ja'l 'pafitbn, superior angels. — ^OSTT?, who know. See above 
No. I. (5). — 9*W?i lo discern, discriminate. For the form, see § 20. 4. 
Corap. § 2. 7. a. 

6. rrarr. . Praet Pe. 3. s. f. § 23. Note 1. on Par.— rtw , 5> 13. 2. 

7. K^BSia Wab, garments of the color of the "'DO, i. e. purple. — l^on, for 
WU • see § 35, and below on v. 15. — "prinrrja see xra. 

S. "ma^S , Ithpe. from 15QO . § 7. a. (2).-»"'PWS . § 6. a. note. 

9. "OD, § 12. I. 1. c. and the parallel passage in the Jer. Targum. 

10. rHSWB, ^ 12. I. 1. a. and 2.— rrnars. Aph. 1. s. Praet. from 135 . 
§ 12. I. 2.— ssio^a in .for shame, i. e. because I was ashamed. , 

12. "2* = ^. §4. b. 



102 CHRESTOMATHY, PART II. 

so- anna ppw|5 rras? a- he Ktriab trrfak £ 
trb an mx? d™ ttrvb n:nafi »nb rirmbFi D-rfb« 

t t : — t -: t : • : - t : t • : 1 •• t : v: 

b-^ba Krin ^a b? j^^n rvrn b*p$i awra b^? m 
kc^i ":tj Sizjb Kjn rfctBg a™ t^tt^i fcKg^ ^355 
"^nzrj^ 1::^ : *r*rt ■<*#» bs birn ars:^ ffi an+n 15 

•■ — •• t : J«T — •• t •• t : — : It-..: t i v 

... TT : --::- I •• It : — ::-!•■ t : • ) •• It •• 

73-6)3 "W- an^an anYara "pita annan tfn:2 fin? 15 
-Tin «mi*n Knisa rpati -fti -pen by tirr -psm 

•• v: v t:— : tt : • I »• : — — : It- — I tt It: — 

Tjb 1 ] sicx ar»- "jinb era ffrrojto -jinn^ rrafi f3sra 
^n *0|3*?3 «r\^ra 'tgiS "pra frin^i fc» mtp »b 
D^ta ^■sto"? "MS Kapx ^ RfiPOKb : $rra?| «|b"j i 6 
spra ^n rpbsa nibvypn pbri ^25 tp!/)T?i fb^ra 

13. i, 3" 1 ^s3S . probably an incorrect reading for I^SlSS . — "^SBX , seduced 
vie, Aphel from nsa with suffix. § 26. 2. a. 

14. W^K , Aph. from Knx . For the pointing see § 4. a. and § 2. 5. 5. 
— b*aa Ntin , § 53. 1. — tfjn , adverbially, cmce. — Kni'r^ Rb^« dear/Zz/ 
poison, §61. 1. 

15. ^yD"'K j 1 sing. Fut. Pa. from ^W . The lorm is perfectly anomalous. 
Compare "i^ instead of "irx : . — rvjant , plur. const, from ijjht . — ^•■-ii33 , 
1 Part, from 1M . See above No. II. (7).— "p^T™ . 1 Part. plur. from sns . 
This also appears to be a masculine form like ypT& , § 35. Schaai^ (Opus 
Aramaeum p. 308.) points it "pna . y\tv* [j. q. Jtjhj ; so Schaaf ibid.J is 
understood, making it future. § 53. 1. " Operam dabunt ut percutiant." 
They shall make efforts and shall bruise thy head, i. e. they shall do it in- 
tently, and with all their power : — or, they shall be established, etc. taking 
the act. Part, in an intransitive sense. Comp. "pjlSjrra K^xn below, and 
above No. II. (15). — yfchm . § 32. note 2. — "FSSna xinn , ^ow sfcatt be es- 
tablished, or, perhaps, Zftow shall be intent upon injuring them. — n*oa*i should 
probably be pointed msai . See No. III. v. 15.— Wa., this use of Hha- 
teph Pattahh after Seghol, which is not unfrequent in this Targum, is 
probably the result of mere negligence in transcription. — S^p^S i. q. M2p5 . 

16. TpSWO , for ?j?gttb ; and tp^W , for T^yfP, - For the pointing of 



EXTRACTS n:n\i THE i LBOl IIS. L08 

BFrrpffi x:ra tb m rb:x* Tjrr:x wi rbip 
Tib rowi sb- raa ana Ktri rrw b-:-r xb terA 

It - . - T : ! • : tl- r • •■ • •• » - -I 

r-;:n proai raw rspi z m bs nr-brn b^n mh ts 

-:• !.:-: I • : !• t — t r • : -:- It 

--s k m« ■» &ra "EK b"i ksi'w r- b»D-ni Sfrng ---r- 

-t: tt » t tt ••— — : T S • - "•: IT • I ••:— : 

btm arrras ntfrra xb- - tote p rxtru 033 

• : t • : • t — : • t : t : f t T»t: 1 • ! • : — : r : 

tawi t tw6a tptai m wot are "Ban Raw 

... _. ... ••:•; !— ; >•• t.t •• — : T : • 

tP Krira birr, ar Cp rrarta :»rrw "2 rei Nttm 19 

— t ; ••It: — •• : t •:■•:' tt * 

irog^ fc« a;?? wpwj ns-srx wen &oB?b itrprw 
M^rn sr-i irrab wprab thj n:s iro ]Hfj wtifi 
wti tra ktwi : «sn sot Bra ran rra bs br ->n 

t t r': t— t • : : ; — :— — t — " 

■or : »ti5 -33 bs- a rx rihn Kti wtbj npjn rrr.r:si 31 
«;jn tpmj -pa T^? T^ab RPW0»b*i trwjb trrrba - 
sin^ntfOT ■pVp'iBWJ rb- |irnroa ?pcg b? ra ~bcx- 
■*fengi pDJwte ■*? ^S^rih orfthj ;: ibki s ""•■^'■zbs^ 32 
■raiDa w mot Bittti «naa ttp mn m »n 

••:• t • : rr: r : •« t : — : — •: t-: tt t 

ata -pa K*®g§ yrn rrta wpnfi "prig irarfij 
■6*83 D*pi ti ttin rro PffiTps wvtra iaa Am arab 

J- • : - 1 — : — • ••:'•: rr ; • — : • • : 

these and similar forms, see § 7. a. (2). — ~*"""? . contracted from "^"r^ . 
and so Buxtorf points it. ~"'~~ . — -"V~ • § 1~- I« l« c - — : ^" x " r 'l • an obscure 
passage. Lit. he shall rule over thee, to do justice and to commit sin, i. e. 
as I understand the Targumist. whether he does right or wrong. 

17. nbnp, § 12.11. 1. 

19. WTO , for np . § 6. a. note. 

21. nVrx'n, which he (the serpent) put ojF, tPVBfrom himself. 

22. *3">rn , for WW .— -1-J3 ^x, if he had kepi. — rrrn-^D . 1 s. Pr. Pe. 
with suff. 3 m. s. § 16. 2. a. — xrn^s . § 12. I. 2.— ixm^for behold. — "r, . 
Praeter in a future sense, or rather both this and the participle ?"X are to 



104: CHRESTOMATHY. PART II. 

nra am^-gi Ptg ^ k^ b* ]ft^i yvby) "i? *w 
to*r p5j5s^ «b "T? D^ij. "jw an?? "jh ^w, ^rrib? 
T!.Tj tt h ?? H^sn b^a ^ij ^m a^fj ib-a *tb ■pa nsn 
ty$] i7?7 Mnfad tfrta ;■; rrS?^ : p"^?b "i? D^pi 23 
^Bfifc wi SrtJTS n; nb?/^ ppnte n^itsa, am 
■pn "pa f tjgb "p? ^5p?^ ^E? *7^ ^ tria n; wi 24 
art h s rpmK arrnia ana why ^ ab -i3> d^id «^-a 

t:.*j'*: — t:— t: t:— t: t — t't: t— : 

■j-priK ajTips w^gi pri rcgb» arnia ■jfb^a fir*rtj 
■ptpo yitin rfaa jjmti 8D**jb ^^7 tf*?^b oa^a 
■jina Tjab fiflnisOT ■jrrnEfta^ ^r? VP^P"! ^£. IT?*?** 
arnia *rn km »rni« "gb^s "jin^nn rrwi ^?^j| 
arrfesb h ^ r^'2 arapnsH »^ ^-a *tb ra wnbsb 

t : - : t : — — , •• tt » : : — : t — !— 1 • t : - : 

be taken as we use the Present tense in English, expressing a general 
truth : — or, still differently, both may be regarded as Subjunctives, (I use 
the term in the general sense which it has in Latin grammar,) if he should 
eat, etc., he would live, etc. 

23. btx and ST^ (§ 12. II. 1.) are both Praeters. 

24. NV^na'n , 2d Part, from Vno , which is like. Tseri is inserted, like 
Q,amets in i»Nl , etc. on account of the prefix with Sheva, § 7. d. note. — 
■wn, i. q. iWj § 60. 1. b.— xnw, an unusual pointing of RfflB'S or snm, 
(§ 2. 7. c.) emph. state from. K1BK . — 'ivb , § 7. d. note, fto . Inf. of •jsfcl . 
— ■j'itta j w^ft ^e??2, 6?/ means of them. — flnbsb, 1 Part. Pe. The law is 
better to him who observes it. — *ja , than, § 64. 1. a. — D?p , either this word 
should be pointed o*E , or it may be considered as a different form of the 
adjective. " The law is better, to him who observes it, than the fruits of 
the tree of life, which Jehovah hath prepared for him who keeps it [the 
law], that he may be established, and may walk in the paths of the way 
of life, in the future world." 



i \ n: LOTS PBOM tin-: TABOI LOfi 

III. The same. Gen. 3.— Jerusalem Targum. 

: wefin KBptob wsr::n b*ttE (S ) : Bbtasa tini ".":- 7 

r t': : t: • : •• — : V / It : - : • I : t t : 

•• t : t : — t •• :- t t : • t : — t : •• t • : 

rrbi too na mn ---p fcrba Rtfcw bOitin raip -6a 

... _ T ._ I •• 1 — t <t: •: r : t -: — t't: 

: Tin* main wnsra $m an maa run ama ronp "fta 

Itt ••!:—: ri : • • It — : : — : t:— —t't: ••: 

t - I I • : — : t : — : It — : t : • : t - : It: vv — «••*•* 

mtir. ~?) se rtfiw fl$ -?; ot raw cts 

-i-n »«"Pibb vrar sbi «r-iisi Rti"«a kwwi x"2 

•• t — \ 1 : — - t : t : — : r t : • t : • ; r - : 

■53; era "jinn: Ftjfiji ftaagsj finrr tvtoi "pgtjfl 
rrro CPU 4DM tp Kb inn nbi gran K-:ib *id« 

1 • • -: — : t •••.•:••• t t: • It : t : • : tt J • t 

kjbt ajj5 rp'cn *oi??a Mtgwri TSpob ybatb -pi* ^n 

7. H3S1 instead of the regular (brm W3^l . Tin; almost entire confu- 
sion of Pattahh ami Qamets and even Hhateph Pattahh, which prevails in 
this Targum and thai of the Pseudo-Jonathan, appears here. It. will not 
be necessary to notice it in every instance. See § 2. 2. The reader will 
also observe the singular character of this, so called. Targum. It is evi- 
dently rather a collection of Rabbinical and traditionary remarks on the 
text, than a translation of it. — They made, etc. This perhaps implies the 
author's opinion that Adam and Eve made them by divine direction. He- 
brew. The Lord (rod made. etc. 

S. In the strength of the day — probably incorrect, although the 
Hebrew nil has sometimes a signification analogous to this. See Josh. 
2:11. 

9. rvna*! , which f hare created. Regularly r*n an . So. especially in 
the Targum of the Pseudo- Jonathan, 1»« , with the prefix 1 . becomes "HOJC . 
The punctuators probably had in mind the analogous Hebrew form. § 7. d. 
note. — " , b*. . Pass. Part. Pe., § 23. 1. note, is manifest before me. — "GO, 1st 
Part. Peal. 

15. ^rnv And it shall come to pass. The Vav conversive does not ap- 
pear in Chaldee.— "r*?r~ • Part Ithpa. from "JJ?, full orthography. § 12. II. 
4.— l^na . masc. pi. Act, Part, from fittJO , § 35. But Schaaf (Op. Aram. p. 
333.) points it regularly. "pITO .— rvDJ, § 12. I. 1. e.— yiXSB , 1st Part. Aph. 



106 CHEESTOMATHY. PAET II. 

bwrn *jb *xv\ \ f rm] ]^5i : mttde aiba? "iigfta is 
mid ro rm-Q. wis i&ki tn& ^ ana ma^i Mw rr 

I t t »t: I • ! • -:— : t: — t: t t •• t tt •• — i • t ; • - 

•• - : • t : • - — •• : t • : | • 1 t t It: : • t r : 

**??$ h T? "p? f"? ^^51 h ^ rtorta h ?b?^ 153 dsipp ana 
: *n**a "pn*i aiioa h n ■pa ^5jj s tinsg ■grjj ppa*] 
to ^tp m mm tsia an ferrfta h n antra •taai 22 

: • *t "t •• t : t t t • v: t : — t : — -:— *"* 

ra*iK thw a^fta ^iztei ntr tkSm na "nTi ^b? 

J . j , . _. r . .. . . . .. T -:- - 1 •• -:- 

■p* awhsrf> «rn urn* twpn ?toj ppsb aprf* m rw$o 
1$ trp r&i ansa p jtsv nrwi -ta m^ ufeb atj 

— t't: p.* v : t : • ! • -t : • : t ! : • : t 

bfa£) wrn a:b*)$ h ^s p tirip a^i wnS aitis; 1 &b 

from jjpro .— Knjab, suffix pleonastic, § 47. 2.— !]*S>Kb ■)"&« , these to those,i. e. 
one to another. — xn^5i*3, " Prave ut puto," says Buxtorf Lex. art. stnspSIB . 
But whether the reading isnspBia (or &tnspan3) be admitted or not. the 
meaning is still doubtful. Buxtorf renders it a trampling underfoot, con- 
culcatio. Walton gives incolumitas, (probably deriving it from xaui in the 
Rabbinical sense, to be quiet, at peace ;) which the connection seems to fa- 
vor. — i.itfp , suff. pleon. § 47. 2. — iC And it shall come to pass, when the 
descendants of the woman shall diligently study the law and do the com- 
mandments, they shall be established, bruising thy head and killing thee ; 
but when the posterity of the woman shall desert the precepts of the law 
and not obey the commandments, thou shalt be established, biting them in 
their heels and afflicting them with sickness. Nevertheless, there shall be 
a remedy for the sons of the woman; but for thee. O serpent, there shall 
be no remedy. Moreover they shall apply remedies (?) to the heels of one 
another in the end of the last days, in the days of king Messiah." 

18. "Sftfl , i. e. R3nR , the earth shall bring- forth abundantly. — ana ^sxrn . 
which is upon the surface of the field, i. e. the grass. — *33 , Part, used for 
the Praeter. Adam answered, § 53. 1. note. — laRl , see the notes on vs. 7 
and 9 of this chapter. R^'M "pa, Let us not be regarded as though we 
were'q/* the cattle, i. e. cattle. Comp. the French des betes, etc. — ^sba, for 
K5>bi § 23. 1. note. 

22. ms adds nothing to the sense.— "pB^ , see K33X in Lex.— Ntthaab, 
evidently an Infinitive form. Perhaps it should be pointed KUJ'naa, § 12. I 
4.— Kb is B3J3 , before he shall, etc., or while he does not, etc. 



BXTRAOft i BOM 1 nr. 1 LBGUM8. L07 

widJ ra n-r:r- -p- ■nnftn B"W tv t« : nbrb - — 24 

| . . i_ ; | • ■•: • : '- : •• : - : r t - — : f -:- •• • 

moa sb t; DTP KWtt rt-l -•':;■.: Tin ar::b rrtsra 

r : • r — t "r: t - : ! •• : • •■ Iv •• I . • I - : ' • 

Kntoi asma rpnm wmta ma nia rife* ■pn mto 

t : • : t • •• >'•:-: t:— t: I • 1 | • I — !••: r : — 

n-e 15 WW??] r--"7 ^-Tib I™ Nr ^:v ""^ TPH 
Dsna ipnarin »rb» »rmim kivsh re::- to s:b-x 

r • i !'••:— !•• t t : — : t:— : rr i ■ — :• — tt 

rnpp "pjjflj nS?x KrjTZ? *9£$ mxrra mfJJ Kj?^^ 
rranrfp Kjr'fiH? yigxq yyfQf\ B^tfl 7™" fiJOS "jfena 
Ktttoa an^riaa arfisa wa uin by ■•run s-b-b rtisa 

t : — : t:— : tt : • — : t: — ■• T 5 t ; — : ' :• 

Mvbpa nb wi bs «n-nw mn bwpi &*« w» T*ti 

t : — : t — t ; r t:— • t — ! It • ~J 1 •* T 

n-bib WYTta am Rata "-- mAm U*D1 fc ~ -n -,-n 

t : — : t:— • tt ••-: tt*: t <— : — ■• -: I •• t 

: *nm X'z)yb &w?n -jra -75 spfi fti »$?3 



24. 77/ <■ £?7on/ 0/ his presence, i. e. ftis glorious presence. — "fl H3*iBia 
"i" -"?"?• these two expressions are doubtless synonymous, the second being 
explanatory of the first, which sometimes has a different sense. On the east, 
towards the sun-rising, This I think is better in the present instance than 
to consider ■p'G*?^ ""2 as relating to time; although it is evident, from 
other places, that both the author of this Targum and the Pseudo-Jona- 
than supposed the garden of Eden to have been planted before the crea- 
tion of the world. See the next clause. Also Gen. 2: 15, Jeru. T. Gen. 
2 : S, Pseudo-Jon. — W sb ~v tfjjj , two thousand years Ixfore the world was 
created, he made the law, etc. See above (22). — MitiVt by, because they 
kept.— «W« • 1st Part. Pa. fern. sing, from X^ . § 12. I. 3.— Pn'JD , plural, 
contracted for KH"BO; rnap y^tvq K^*B, lit. a sword, destroying from both 
sides, i. e. a two-edged sword. — yngao, 1st Part. Pa. from ~?3-. — VST 1 * 
(Part, from Gtr^t) the world which is coming, or. as we more commonly 
say. the world to come. — X^n . §47. 1. the tree of life is, i. e. represents 
the law. — ^ft, a form of the Praeter (§ 23. 2. note.) here used in the - 
of a present tense, or as expressing a general affirmation. — d^Jg . § 4. a. 
This double "■ originated with an unpointed text, and should not have been 
retained when the points were affixed, l^nbsb for Wnbab, see above (7), 
to him who obeys it. 



108 CHEESTOMATHT. PART II. 

IV. Story of a dispute between Cain and Abel. Gen. 4 : 8. — Jerusalem 

Targum. 

qpSD -to riffi *on "E>ab pisiji ana *sin« bnnb rp naai 

T? >T& ^ ^#? ^3 fE "?? **?? "!*& "p' n 'j>- 
agrafe ntt ^a rt abi rniat cbs rrbi w tvbi 
abi abb* h ^r\N; jwta abi a^iSi "je r©nab abi 

irai -p tva rpb 153^1 bnn ^ swa bspna ab h s^ 
rsnabi k$V*s& nts ^ ■pa irso ftwja ob? rra-i "^5 

"j fjgpi "nasi* jjrg b? raja awn "pats "pai? ht rs? 
awn bapna ab Trs/j-i airci -sia h Era bapna rrn 

t -:— : —I— : • t it • t -:— : • • • r : »■.. — '— ; • It • 

btipii ^na b2n b? jj?g Dpi *rg *mz -pgija jto'W tpi 

rrrfp 



■ "i 1 ?^; Inf- f° r Fut. '' no reward shall be given to the righteous nor ven- 
geance taken of the wicked. The world was not created in mercy, neither 
in mercy is it governed. Why was your offering accepted from you with 
favor, but [mine] was not accepted from me with favor? Abel answered 
and said to Cain ; There is a judgment, and there is a Judge, and there is 
a future world, and a reward shall be bestowed upon the righteous [lit. 
there is the giving of a good reward to the righteous.] and vengeance 
shall be taken upon the wicked; and the world was created in mercy, and 
in mercy it is governed. But it is governed according to ihe fruit of good 
works. Because my works were more upright than yours, my offering was 
accepted with favor, but yours was not accepted with favor. And they 
were both contending in the open field; and Cain rose up against Abel his 



EXTRACTS FROM THE I &RGUM8. L09 



V. Marriage <>/ Samson. J 1 1 < 1 lt • 1 1- — Jonathan. 

: wncbsj n:n-j reara wxrrs; kthi ro^rt ffaai? era , 
raarq -n--- atjFia nasi nrawtbsi woab "pi) p^p 2 
TFQK n-b na»1 : imab -b ~r m sdo 71- wro&B raaE 3 

-: •• :- • : • rr - '- : •• t ; • : t : . " 

b-7K kwi anna -rr bin arm reaa n-b ar foTBKl 

•• t : — : t : • • — t : It-: t : • •• t •• • : 

nrr VPQVb rfotettj tbki &rb-;? "•KfittibBE arra a&ab 

tt • -:- ! : • :- t— ••-: •• t : • : • t : • — • : 

\9T ab rmfi\ TflaHi : ---z rroto KTI "HK "b 1C 1 

I • :t t •• • : • -:- t •• : v v : • •• -: • - ^ 

wwnkb "'n »n ksdcvi n» xt; - Dip ra na 

tt : : • : •• t t 't : •■ -: t : t >t: I • •• -: 

WW : birtrai fiaW wrabs smh Kftztt ■wnfiBO 5 

— : «t : • : I • 1 t •• t j • : •— tt-: ■• t : • : ■ 

«*"« Km naari "ana to irw reanb nnaai •-•:s k Tftftri 

t : — t t : • •• : — — -:- t : • : •• • : • -:- 1 : • 

p ttrtoa rrn "rtbj rrwi : ppnwipl d™ r— x -z a 

I • t : — » -j r ■• t»; • "t it : : — - 

«bi pri-a n-b 0555351 irja 7r""r7 «ns tottjj ;: Dig 
irraiai MjFuaa b"wzft tra : 13^5 rr rrrabi triakb "55 7 

: minn mi ar^an btobsi wvnsm asp am Amen &ras 

t: t : — : t: • : tt: : rl> t: r S — : r : • 

rvfa tfdx nib bjai b-aai bra bjKl irya ~--c:i 9 
«;7^7 K*flBa "^ yinb "- sb* ftaai 7'-: zrr rrra 
1&F) 135 anrx per b? ---ex n-:i : «td?W proa 10 
iw iin na rrm : snaiv viz- p *n« nmfa TWtri u 

••t -: — t -:- t — •• I • : t I •• •• -: t : : • : • 



1. T32, see P3 in Lex. 

2 - p-'Vjj § 12 - !• *■ aml H« 1— *23. Imp. from 303. § 12. II. 1. a.— WW, 
see xns. 

3. Pfl*5a . 3 Bing. fem. from ~"^". § 15. note 2. 

5. irx. 3 m. pi. Pr. from xrx. — nr"-"ipb. Buxtorf gives the pointing 
nWlg, which analogy demands. 

6. n^ift , yitfimj, Pael forms without Daghesh. § 12. II. 3. 
S. P23"2b , Inf. from 2D3 witli prefix and suffix. 

9. bfna , 6 21. a. 



110 CHRESTOMATHY, PART II. 

^bewS ■pnb taap : tea? irn 0nn "pribn ^§?i 12 

- : • tt I - : tt — • t • 1:1-: 

]Tbw ipbjte finbri "jiab -rw "pn^rn otto? w 

Tina -psnni h b nart "tfb^n ab osi j aiztob'n TibBsa 13 

1 — ! :•: • tt — : ! : t •: t :• !t t t : • " 

*m Frb ™*o Kiztob'n -nbt^a rribrfi rwbss rrtn ^b 

:- t :• |tt t : • I«t: I • t: • | »t : 

arprr^ tfb:ra pss «bME ;inb n^ai : ns^tisi srYtfi u 

T J. _ . r . .. I _. T . , T .. J . ._ T . . . . . J TT . L-± 

mm : r^v snbn a*vTin nawrib 6-.P sin «^n psi 15 

t -:— 1 • tt : t • tt — : •: t: t: » — : 

^b» rr ^ui fiwaw nnisxb iraai narnizi wai-a 
sr«a W2» rva rm rprr Tpt ^^b^r «n^n rv *»b ^m 

t:J -: •• -:j«t »• t: • t • - tt ••— • 

-: I :• — • t: t:— ttt) ••>: tt ::— : — 

■gab Kijin arntti l pgarn sbi www Tinb rgasp 

^183 **b **?^ **aab **0 ^ "*ffl?I PJF30 ^ $1 "^2 
■jinb nirj3 awr keiid ■tffo n$2*] : ^™ p^a *fij 17 
na^ni Jrsjjm "n» nb yr\ narnra aa^* njrn tf;raJE 
rnarnuj *arn arrp ■'iztoa irb sraai : nay *mb am^in 18 

tt • : T : t : »— — r v; •• :- t— •• : • t •• iW 

T&xy VFyXQ Bpjag ra «izn*rrq h bn pra &£&& 5wa ab i? 
rrro^i . ^n firatia sb wiaa "fOFigia ■p'sbtea -pnb 19 
■fiireia bg^ "pbp^b rra ■;■; trig. ]& *crca$ n^ Tiibj 
**1P# Stttean ami -inni rr :rctt ^ros ]%)& 

12. Ift&BSK r Buxtorf points it jfrBxa . 

13. nssarj? . Fut. 1 pi. with sufF. 

15. ''V*?^ i Imperative Pael. § 12. I. l.^-jlt^ that he may tell—^pv , 
Aphel from ^*] . — K3n*l330a^n , is it to try (perplex) us ? For the ending 
M see § 16. 2. c. and for the prefix a , § 12. I. 4. 

16. Biqtj , wfo'Ze, etc. 

17. ttWprYn , 3. sing. fern. Praet., with suffix, from pn'n . 

18. xnnp, see *i£ in Lex.— b?a Inf. from bb? : . 

19. ffti^ynt, contrary to the analogy of Chaldee, but according to that 
of Hebrew. 



EXTBAOT8 FBOM THE TABGUM8. I 1 1 

■pzterci nFKJ njrjl i 1WIJ rvoi p<%! ---:•- z m "j. xr-~— . 



VI. Prediction of Messiah's kingdom. Pa. 2. 

■prg (2) : ar-'P™ ■papj t^ffiM] «; = ?? F9PW ""?'? i 
■aarita * D"p KTOb mrtD rrtW 8*atabu5l ntih "b - 

••:•: t: t It: ttt: t-:— ! : — : • t- :•: t : — ••: — 

: Tinfiibtibra usta ptai TirrTHoa rr anna : mnta :- 3 

I : t r : : — tt • ' : • : ! •■ t t v: - — : • • — 

tyPST, T713 (») : T*^ «IW "*~ **r?"? «!Q?r *y!??9 -T T '" 4 
■*6g -rrnn *jsg : pf bnz- rnyrq*i "*?p*rz 7-b 6 

153 3*an na« ;-- a-rp k $ffl$g : 'nc'^a tia b? itj^ 7 

■awi **a "W i wn& ri arr Ams nkst r:x -b asab 8 

1 ..... . . . ... j T .. . ) .. r . . T T _ . . _ . t — : w 

WttfiFi : »5^« *rc -:rjbd srflrta'i rim;:-:* »*aB5 "c-3 9 

1 . : — : t : — m t s *• : I tt -:- It: :— t — : — ■•:• 

rcdta rnyi :fsr«?i t©i ra n*n abra^ fcntwna tin n» 

t -:—'•• : J • : : • — : • |t 1 •• t : : — : t : : I •• 

abrra * Dip ^nb2 :«ma *tm mot™ frab frsftw n 

r -:— :t: t't: — : t:— •••: t :— » •— •: — 

Trninrfi prr nrfrn K5E>b*)» frao : an-m ita i2 

1 : : •• : • t : • t t : • '— t • : • — : 

rnsm bsb wwa trtvn tots) ntr*? broa wt* 

I • : it : t : •• •• : ••: • •• : ; t : 

20. PPnarrib, to the person who was &is companion. 

2. T^j?, 1st Part. plur. from Wp, See the Par.— terya . Inf. Pa — 
■»»:», Inf. Pe. from KXD , § 18. note 1, 

4. aw-l , by ellipsis of the pers. pron., he who sitlelh. 

7. a'QIl, Vocative; O Mom beloved, etc. — hxst , emph. masc. " T« tfiiAi 
purus es." Buxtorf. 

9. Ta . see* ",xa in the vocabulary. 

11. ibs Imp. Pa. 2. pi. from ifc| . 

12. RlJ'lkltl^l'nnn, i: et amittatis viam." Walton. But the words are 
certainly susceptible of the sense expressed in Hebrew. Buxtorf. (Lex. 
under the word ^X), cites several examples in which lain has evidently 
the intransitive sense to perish. — lin*| , Fut. from "nn. . — Fnaw , suffix 
pleonastic, § 47. 2. Comp. Heb. "niax . 



112 CHKESTOMATHY. PART II. 



VII. The praises of Jehovah. Ps. 8. 
*W$ xnna^iin nap wari finite b? »rtati5 

aria afefcS rtawasi trai b^bn to «wi>n ar»ba ^ 2 

T • ~ T • : It: •: T : tt • t t v: t : ' * 

8pidptc!» kwti K*abw kbe : «*eiz) ra b^> jw afceirrci 3 

t : •• : — t»— : : t — • ( • T - : | • .. ] T . T . _ . o 

5*180 i riititai 2*22^ b h » tfbtazb tj-p^a bb:& ra awtiw 4 

: tt: tt: ••: tt— : J '▼ v • : — :•]• t: 

: anrpna ^ j^r&bi *rrro ana-isa *ni? «3tf Ttfir* 

t : *" : — • t — : : t -: • I t t : .: v •• t It: ••:•••: 

rgbpi b%»j aifij *a$ ■faafti lyfe btoj skm ^ rta 5 
Kjftaril »5b*1 «J5«^ti b^bg prj* iteyibm t h ib? 6 

«?5^ ^2 ( 9 ) : Kb^rj ^a linb^i -p'nbto ^in^ ^2 : *&2Q 8 
KMian anba " : a^r -tra* rrbrra -jmbi a^r Wi 10 

tt • tt vr t : t- -T : • ! •• t : |.,ttj • : t- •• : 

tana abtoi Mw m-ia*) b-bn n&3 

t:— t : it: : •: t: 



VIII. Parable of the vineyard. Isa. 5 : 1 — 7. — Jonathan. 

tTtt Stthrib tyt\m bao'urb i?3 *tfis??§ tf T ?3 9g& 1 
barte* jsrtm ■'53? ftw?b 'tarn nraizhn h 5jnn DrrQ&w 

Title. T 1 ^ , b auctoris, as in Hebrew. The mode of writing this name 
with i-, which belongs in Hebrew to the later writings, is in Chaldee the 
usual orthography. 

2. Tjjt , for the ordinary form Tp'1 , § 2. 6. c. 

3. Tpl^a , Part. Aph. from pis , enemies. 

4. ^ ^pa , probably this rendering originated in the false supposition 
that the Hebrew ^3 is necessarily a causal conjunction. It should evi- 
dently be considered here as an adverb of time, when. 

8. i^ln , const, for emph. § 60. 1. note 3. 

Instead of the fine poetical allegory of Isaiah, we are here presented 
with an interpretation. The Targumist has not simply translated the 
words of the prophet into Chaldee, as he has generally done, but has trans- 



EXTRACTS PEOM THE TABGT7M8. 1 LB 

firrra "4"^ m 2 Rivjafl ferma }Ba aacgs ":r.-;r i™™" 

WtflPJ ffnoH] 7'~">*™ ^ K ??3£ r '" r . "'"-"^ "^" 
ta» s ? 2: : rrr-zv ' fttaOM ■pwi ronp rata rnai* a 
arefi ps 161 wrtu r- rraa Strip rva «n riiJ 

t •• : i t t r : t : — I • — : •• t : • •• t I : 

J • — t*tj t • !- : • t : v.v v : : •• :t !-: 

ririb rna* ubn *bj6 Tfr nasai mag s--j; he : *£- 1 

! : •• — -: t : • - : - : v : •• j t t — • — 

: "|Tr-ri;> tohpag -p: 81 729 ---ri;? fnpffl rn»» "- s^ 

lated the allegory into plain language Still, the extract is curious, and 
worthy of B perusal, As it differs so considerably from the original, I sub- 
join the Latin translation of the London Polyglott. 

" Dixit propheta • Cantabo nunc Israeli, qui comparatus est vineae, 
Bernini Abrahae dilecti mei, canticum dilecti mei, vineae suae. Populus 
mous. dilectus meus Israel, dedi eis haereditatem in monte excelso, in terra 
pingui. 2. E1 sanctificavi cos. ( -t honorificavi eos, et sustentavi eos. sicut 
plantationem vitis electae; etaedificavi sanctuariuni meum in medio eorum. 
A 1 tare quoque meum dedi ad propitiandum super peccata eorum : et pre •- 
cepi eis ut facerent opera bona in conspectu raeo. et ipsi inique egerunt in 
dperibus suis. 3. Propheta, die eis : Ecce domus Israel recesserunt a lege 
et nolunt converti. Nunc habitatores Hierusalem et viri Juda, judicate 
nunc judicium inter me et populum meum. 4. Quod bonum dixi utfacerem 
populo meo quod non fecerim eis? et cum praeciperem eis ut facerent ope- 
ra bona, quare ipsi fecerunt opera mala ? 5. Nunc autem annunciabo vobis 
quod ego facturus sum populo meo. Tollam majestatem meam ab eis, et 
erunt in direptionem : conteram domum sanctuarii eorum, et erunt in con- 
culcationem. 6. Et ponam eos derelictos: non erit eis sustentaculum nee 
fulci men turn ; et erunt transmigrantes et derelicti. Prophetis quoque man- 
dabo, ne prophetizent super eos prophetiam. 7. Quia populus Domini ex- 
ercituum Israel est, et viri Juda plantatio laetitiae ejus. Et dixi ut face- 
rent judicium et ecce facti sunt calumniatores ; dixi ut facerent justitiam. 
et ecce ipsi multiplieant peccata." 

1. PPnattJ^ and PlWi, pleonastic suffixes. § 47. 2. — *»ni 3 my beloved, 
1st Part, from crn . 

3. ",2S . contracted form of the act. part. m. pi. from K2S , § 35.— -r"? . 
lnf from »n . 

8 • 



114 CHKESTOMATHY. PART II. 



Pi?** *%$> "ta^ rw m rv fteb ^5 ^ja ^ 5 
: is** jfrn Tini^g n h 5 antuj tau? yir^ finsE tcdid 
^btta -jin^ ^ctttfp abi frgrajaji ab -purt^ ^sjiftgi e 
■n» : riwa: firrbs ^sri; ab'n ipsa kwoj b?i ^TSfift 7 
wwjjj *os? rttsi 1 ; ^$5 barto? rva mans *vn nsg? 
■mn T\^m fm§ -psa arn aw^ ■jTOr-i n^ggs*] 

:pn1n 15DB -pea sin) tot 



IX. Extract from Isaiahs prediction of the Messiah. Isa. 52 : 13. — 
53 : 2. — Jonathan. 

tfsjs (u) : annb Cfjprri h ?D^ tft^ kjttdb *td? rft£ an 13 
■g^a t]TL : ri niq^ ]W$o i^^v barter tra *rb todi 
■parao p^ -135* -jS : a tea isa p'nrti p'rtitfi 8^aag 15 
Kb" ^ fihfc^ b§ -pn h T |^ "f?b/j ^pfiizr M rrib? 
■pari -je : fenotf wad abi^i iin pnb ^wvtia 1 
: n^bafia; ;pg b? -prfe ^3 anto? 55? rp'prn ai asmi'Mb 

5. T3tt Inf. from na. See the Par. It is treated as a noun, plunder, 
and the corresponding word in the parallel passage, p"H_, is a noun. 

6. ^bvbv-n , Pass. Part. Palpel from b*u . 

7. 'j'aba, Aph. 1st Part. plur. from 6UO , § 35. 

13. tf^n.^ , see K^fi in the vocabulary. 

15. ^XiyriUix , they have told, for has been told, or rather, in the present 
instance, had been told, § 56. 2. b. — "U1 iffi , wto ftacZ woZ 6ee?i ?oZ<i //*era 
they have seen, etc. The Latin Vulgate and Syriac versions agree with 
our Targumist in rendering these verbs in past time, they have seen, they 
have considered; the LXX and the Arabic version give the Future tense, 
as does our common English translation. The Hebrew verbs are both in 
the Praeter tense. 

1. "paifi , see figi$ .— lin tp'pn*! , lit. and the strength of the arm of Jeho- 
vah's power. Comp. § 61. 1. and note 1. 



k\ I KA0T8 FHOM l Hi; TABOUM8. 1 1 5 



nWai ib"*^ fmw rib-:! *n TTfanD sp--:: s--r- 8 

:• It-: It : r ; )•::-: r • r It: >r • — r : ; • 

Wft$? Kttftsip nnb*) yi:c; ]i ]"jgi •-;: b? ------ 

rTCTH WWH sb ----- xb— • ;- xb rrt k:":: rvm 

— •• : t : ••:•.• r t r • : t -: — 



X. Aphorisms of Solomon, Prov. 10:1 — 12. 
hifttth ■'tens 

I • : - 

Kb f8 ) i fi^ab V^ana absc ira ^aa ™: kbwi ^a i 

TV/ •• • : ) •• — : t : — t : -: •• :::• t • — — l 

: sc-z «n , ta 7; &3fffJ ^I?7?l ^T^P? , nyfa 7T1- 
: wres *nH wspi wynw ppids] aiiba ibse sb 3 

I : • • — : tt: •• : 't • — : •• : - rr« I •• : — t 

' : r ; — : T •• r i T • t;— T I — : t : — : t ::• 

&ra arana wfl an tortoD *ra atrpa rrtsw 5 

t: r : — : J •• t : tt:: t: t : •— : — •• t : w 

2. R3W, § 23. Note 2.— ''hittJn.ttJ , § 33. b.— rrb. in the land which was 
in need of him, i. e. of the p^S mentioned above, the Messiah. But the 
passage is quite obscure, and the more so as there is nothing in the origi- 
nal corresponding to this phrase. — bz'n, so that everyone who sees him shall 
attentively consider him. 

In the remainder of this chapter, so beautiful in the original, we are 
presented by the Targumist rather with his own views than with a trans- 
lation of Isaiah, and those too. expressed, for the most part, in a dull and 
sometimes quite obscure manner. 

Title. '•'ftrvOj pleonastic suffix. § 47. 2. 

1. "nna , instead of "Hrp . Fut. Aph. from snn , § 12. I. 3.— x?=o for 
stbob, § 32. note 2. 

2. T^ftlB, Part. Pa. from W.—^SCiK, Buxtorf points the construct 
form of this word regularly "^Sis . — Mrota , § 60. 1. note 2. — KJSBO . Part. 
Pa. fern. sing, from StSQ . § 2. 7. c. 

3. CjsiritDSj Fut. Pe. 3d p. sing. § 12. I. 3. 

4. 6W51M3 , Part. Pa. without Daghesh forte, § 2. 7. c. 

5. rp^B'n , Part, with full orthography. § 12. I. He who cultivates, viz. the 
earth. 



116 CHKESTOMATHY. PAET II. 

rinstfisn*! »*p^2ri iD-h b? -pun arania : wnnai3 ^n 6 

I : : t *— • — : •■ •• — It : v v t t : • t t -: — : " 

^hSnfi arazfa Kr\??3 "R^si achfeft : asian *&5? 'jJrtHn 7 
: ihKinB rrnista ab^Dl 8rrp*is> bap" pnai D h 3rr=i : wt] 8 

■•-::• "t : • : t : — ; t t»: •>»■—: •• • • - : It : • u 

: yrro nwrta ■ppra'Ti *rrc:a bra srwara ti^rftfl 9 

t : : • •• t : I t J: - : • : t -: — : •• •• T • : • !••—:• a 

K$S|M (11) : TT«M ^rjJ^flS Ej!^ *0»3 u»T TTD^ TISJ? 10 

tffi&no : Mian h &5p h 3^fc!j ^jtosfl ^^7 a? 5 ® ^rtr 12 
: attinrn ^55-0 ^yrte -jin^s toi ^n :ran 

6. I^fjri, § 23. note.— " , ?^, § 60. 1. note 3. 

8. tfr& D^an, § 63. 5.— a^rhsto, pint, from fiSto, § 39. note 1. 

9. Vpi , for M^ , Fut. of btfit . 



PART III. 

NOTES ON THE CHALDEE PORTIONS OF JEREMIAH, 
DANIEL AND EZRA. 



No. I. Jer. 10: 11. 



Np3, ail adv. of manner, compounded of B and xn (dem. proo., this-.) 
after (his (manner.)— X£-?X. emph. of p*5» » This commutation of r and 
p resulted probably from a pronunciation of 5 in this word like the Arabic 
£ or nearly like our g hard.— n38T , for "p— , § 12. 3. Pattahh is restored 
by Darga. a conjunctive accent. This is not usual, although. I believe, 
similar cases are not wholly wanting in Hebrew. — n^X. probably in appo- 
sition with X;n^j and giving emphasis to the declaration, "they shall 
perish." So Venema. C. B. Michaelis. Rosenmiiller, etc. 

In respect to the authenticity of this verse, three things may be ob- 
served. 

1. It would be remarkable that any author should, in the midst of a dis- 
course, insert a single sentence in a language ditferent from that which he 
generally employed. 

2. All agree that this part of Jeremiah's prophecy was composed seve- 
ral years before. the captivity, and consequently before the Chaldee lan- 
guage came into use among the Jews. 

3. This verse interrupts the connection of the preceding and following 
verses. Verse 12 commences with a participle, rifcJS, which must be read 
in close connection with the noun with which it agrees in verse 10. 
Dinb also, in v. 11, has no antecedent expressed. " Thus shall ye say to 
them, etc." To whom? The text does not inform us. 

" Non sine ratione. aut temere, statueretur, additamentum esse ab alia 
manu. tempore morae in exilio, profectum," says Venema ; and this Ro- 
senmiiller quotes with approbation. 

I will merely subjoin two extracts from writers of different opinions on 
this point. 

" This verse is omitted in one * MS. ... It seems probable to me that 

* 526 Kennicott. 



118 CHRESTOMATHY. PART in. 

some public teacher during the captivity . . . had it inserted in the margin, 
and perhaps usually read together with this section of the prophecy in the 
assemblies of the people, in order that the common people might have 
their answer always ready whenever they were molested on the point of 
religion, or importuned to join in the idolatrous worship of the Chaldeans." 
— Dr. Blayney on Jeremiah. 

" This verse is writ in the Chaldean tongue, and not in the Hebrew, 
that when they came among those that did worship their idols, they might 
openly and plainly profess the true God in that language which the ene- 
mies understood better than they did the Hebrew, and that in such kind of 
language as this; Let all those gods perish from off the earth, and under 
the heavens, that were not able to make either. It is an imprecation 
upon their idols." — Matthew Poole, Annotations. 



No. II. Dan. 2 : 4—7 : 28. 



Ch. II. v. 4. -nn , Imp. from son : . See the Par.— nag , Imp. Pattahh. 
§ 15. 4. 

5. fias and Tax , participles used instead of the Praeter, § 53. 1, note. 
So TDK and its plural "pnax frequently. — Sp^iBsb , the pointing is intended 
for the marginal reading. i&TCSJS , the regular form of Dec. VI. The Ke- 
thib is generally pointed by Lexicographers X?T>53 . Perhaps it should 
rather be KWiBS in analogy with the other declensions. — KntK, a peculiar 
form. It is probably fem. from TfX ; , 2d part. Peal from TjX s , § 12. I. 1. d. 
The — would regularly be impure and immutable. It is here treated as 
if pure and mutable, and the Part, is varied according to Dec. III. a. — 
^sniiin , Fut. Aph. from ST. , § 12. II. 5. For the suffix see § 16. 2. b. 
and Par. II.— "p'sifta , PI. of rP2 with suff. 2d pers. pi.— ■pmteft^ , 3. pi. m. 
Fut. Ithpe. from Mb , see Par. VII. 

6. "jinnn, 2. pi. Fut. Aph. from Kjn , § 12. II. 5. 

7. i"n©s*l , Emph. ri instead of X , a substitution very common in the 
Biblical Chaldee, Intr. 3. note ; unless this word should have been pointed 
WlttJM. 

y. "pnaajn , the pointing is that of the Keri "^anTri , 2. pi. m. Pr. 
Ithpa. from "pat. The Kethib should be read in Aphel, ^Fisatfi, or 
like the Heb. Hiph. 'pnHatti .— tf£» , 1 sing. Fut. from sp^, § 20. 4. and 
§ 2. 7. a. 

10. x^ia? , see above on verse 5. 



v>i EH OS mi: BIBLICAL OHALD1 i . 11 9 



12. Cjxpi 05a, synonymouG terms, used to heighten the idea. Perh 
however P}2ip maj be understood as expressing more violent anger than 
M. — mainij Inf. Aph. from 13$, perhaps derived from an obsolete verb 
Pc V.»,lh. 

1 1. nPSprib, Accusative. § 80. 3. 

16. *W! . Fut. ofina with the \'<>vcc of a Subjunctive, in consequ. 
of the. ■«!, tAai fc loro&J -nv. For the form sec § 18. note 2. and $ 12. I. 1. 

n». i%}, Praeter Passive, 5 13. 2.— ?p», Pael, § 12. I. 1. 6— R5xb, Accu- 
sative. S 60, 3. 

20. x-nb. for x'n^, Put. with i and an optative sense, § 50. 2. 

sr--:: . fem. pi. emph. from pw, deep, tnscrutaWe thinge^ \ 11. 
note. — an^noa , Pass. Part. Pa. fem. pi. emph. Prom ^ro. 

23. "WSTrtj 2- m ' s '"^ r - Praet. Aph. from rn"? with fluff. 1 p. sing. 
Par. II. 

25. brsn. Aph. from bbi;, § 12. II. 5, and § 2. 7. a.— totfl^, this Accu- 
sative with b is of frequent occurrence. It will perhaps be unnecessary 
to notice it again. — "^ in the beginning of a speech superfluous like the 
Greek oVt .— rns'rn . § 15. 4. 

26. ■prWKn, art thou? compounded of the interrogative tt, WM and 
the sullix ~ n — •— "2rrn-nb. Inf. Aph. from yt] with suffix, § 16. 2./. 

27. n^nnb, Inf. Aph. from Kjn, § 23. Notes on the Par. 4. 

28. Nlrfb , must take place, § 50. 2. 

29. ^pbp , comp. the English expression " thoughts come up. arise in 
the mind." 

31. "in, indef. art. § 29. 1. note. 

32. ^n 1 " 1 ^ , a plur. form, see 'j'Hri in the vocabulary. 

33. "*n?^ . />a/Y of them. So the French distributive article du. de la. 
etc. The punctuators seem to have considered brn as necessarily feminine. 
The writer doubtless understood it to be common. 

34. rp^rt. Aph. from pp"?. 3. s. f. Pr. segholate form. 

35. rOBCn , Ithpe. from rtDfcj .— nVn , § 23, Notes on the Par. 1. 

38. ynsw or (Keri) 7*1*3, 1st Part, from 1V». 

39. X>"^x , here, as in all such cases, the pointing is that of the Keri. 
XSitf may have been used in the same sense. See snx in the vocabulary. 

40. sin, 3. s. f. Fut. Pe. from W 1 !, Hhireq of the regular form being 
lengthened to Tseri, on account of the Resh. 

Ch. III. 2. The best critics are uncertain as to the precise meaning 
of several of these words. Neither etymology nor usage sheds much 



120 CHRESTOMATHY. PART HI. 

light on them. Those meanings which are considered most probable are 
given in the vocabulary. 

4. T^it , it is spoken, lit. they speak, § 56. 2. d. 

6. Kpn"^ , fern. Part, from ^J^ , burning. 

8. "(im^np sibaa* , lit. ate or devoured the pieces of them, of the Jews. 
The sense unquestionably is, calumniated, or accused the Jews. The Sy- 
riac usage is the same. The Arabians also employ the phrase to eat th„ 
flesh of a person, in the same sense. 

12. DSJlfl , this word is connected with ^ato , and the phrase signifies, as 
explained in the vocabulary, (see under DSO ,) to show regard. 

13. ^Wftb , Inf Aph. from Kn$ .— iimi , a kind of irregular Hophal or 
passive of Aphel. See xnis; in the vocabulary. 

14. FixpferJ , the regular pointing would be Jiaipfi : . Comp. § 12. I. 1. 
where Tseri and Hhireq seem to be employed almost indifferently. But 
the changes of vowels in Chaldee seem hardly capable of being reduced 
to rule. 

16. 151 tib , the shade of meaning seems to be, " We do not think it ne- 
cessary to return a favorable answer, to comply with thy wish." 

18. Klttb , Optative, § 50. 2. 

*19. njn , 2 Part. Pe. from NJH , literally seven times more than it had 
been seen, or known, etc. 

21. *inS3, Praet. pass. § 13. 2. 

24. "pai , Plur. Part, from X3S . See Par. IX. Dec. V. a. 

Ch. IV. 3. r&S3T& , Inf. Aph. from bbv , § 2. 7. a. 

4. "p^?2 j so the Kethib should evidently be pointed. The Keri, "pSS is 
a contracted form of the same. Comp. rbb$ , Keri r&S , Dan. 5 : 10. 

9. 'pTFP , Ittaphal Fut. 3. sing. m. from "pt . Here, as frequently in the 
poetical style of the orientals, the Future is employed as an Aorist, § 50. 1. 

10. nm , 1 Part. Pe. § 12. I. 1. c. 

11. 1->tt«, Aph. from nn3 . 

12. Baas? , Fut. Ithpa. from 23S. 

13. arn^ , § 12. 1. 1. 

14. n n ^3^ j Hebraism, Intr. 3. note 1. — bstii , in the construct state, the 
base of men, i. e. the basest. 

16. WTO j from KTO , Keri "na from la . 

19. rva'i , the Keri is anomalous. The Kethib, pointed n^n , would 
be the regular 2d p. sing. m. Praet. from TV2*\ . 

28. 'p'TOK , see above on 3 : 4. 



NOTEfl ON mi BIBLIOAL ciiai.di I . 1 21 

30. rcr, Praet 3. 1, f. from EpQ 

Ch. V. 6. ■"■:-. :; pi Pr. IV nn| with pleonastic suffix /'// the I*"- 

//'/•-. compare n rvbr v. '.».— -,— rrt . Part pi. Ithpa. from bnd V.. II. 

8. x-vrci. the pointing is that of WJIjM . 

15. li*n, Hophal, ;l Hebraism not of frequent occurrence, [ntrod. 3. 
note i. See^S. The marginal reading, without Daghesh, seems to be 
required l>y the analogy of Aphel, though Peal receive Daghesh, 

in. b-T. point the Kethibbawt. This and the Keri biasj are both in 
use ns Futures of ba*, q- v. 

30. tf), Praet. pass. § 13. 2.-W5I), 3. m. pi; Pr. Aph. from *-- . 
. fin K3& . These are passive participles Peal, the third and fourth in 

a contracted form, § 1 2. I. 1. d. 

27. xnb^n, Praet. Pass. 2. Bing. m. § 13. 2. 

. no"nn and nrnrr, Praeters Passive :;. sing. f. 
30. iji^toa, according to the pointing, and to the marginal reading, this 
ward is an adjective in the emph. sing, agreeing with K3l>B. 

Ch. VI. 1. "prnn, fern, of yntj-, see Par. XI. 

2. Tfrib "n , 10A0 were to 6e, should be, § 50. 2. 

3. pT3. 1 Part. Pe. § 12. I. 1. c. 

14. iaft" btQa"! ^, as "«J occurs so frequently, its several uses should be 
carefully distinguished. It occurs four times in this verse. In the first in 
stance it is a conjunction, equivalent to the Greek oxt, and, like that parti- 
cle, in the beginning of a speech, need not be translated into English ; in 
the third it is the preposition of or a sign of the Genitive case ; and in the 
second and fourth, it is a relative pronoun, in the former case Nominative, 
in the latter. Objective. 

15. "^b?, the suffix is reflexive, § 49. 1. b. — Lit. the king was displeas- 
ing to himself, better in English, was displeased with himself. 

IS. P'?r ,, !"i . an irregular Hophal 3. sing. fern. Pr. from Nrx . — nolo . Pr. 
pass. 3. sing. fern, from alia . § 22. 1. note, and § 13. 2. 

19. ^ni'br , so in Latin, verbs of taking away are construed with a Da- 
tive of the person. 

24. bx*nb , Accusative, § 60. 3. It is governed by !"i£0?rjb . 

Ch. VII. 3. p». 1 Part. pi. fern, from N3d. 

4. 'IB'HEtj Praet. pass, from I3"ia . 

5. ^atibi, ■notej the Keri, is doubtless the true reading. The Targums 
employ "lOO . 



122 CHRESTOMATHY. PART III. 

15. n^snx, § 12. II. 2. 

20. Mean , § 12. I. 1.— 1« n 1 ] , comparative, as in Heb. § 64. 1. a. 



No. III. Ezra 4: 8—6: 18. 



Chap. IV. v. 10. n^34j according to Gesenius, equivalent to the com- 
mon expression and so forth. His different etymologies do not however 
appear entirely satisfactory. 

12. &iME*iK3*! KPtt'ia , these forms are both feminines in the emphatic 
state from 'tno and Bfrita . § 41. note. 

14. Kar&n . prob. lit. " we eat our salt from the palace," i. e. we derive 
our sustenance from the royal bounty. If the sense proposed by Buxtorf 
and some others be admissible, xba , 'ii must be taken as referring to the 
temple. See nba. 

18. ""}|3 , Praet. pass. The composite Sheva is occasioned by the i . 

Ch. V. 1. «"1K*3? , in this and similar forms of the same word, K, with 
the pointing of the text, must be considered otiant. It might be treated 
as a consonant, and receive the pointing ftit^ , X;j&pn3, etc. See W21 in 
the vocabulary. 

3. nns, const, st. from nns .— fibbabb , Shaph. from tts? No. I. 

8. Bbns , Part. Ithpe. from n*lb .— niasra , Part. Ithpe. fem. sing, of 
the same form with the absol. masc. Dec. lll.f. 

11. ih5a, § 26.2. a. 

13. fcttaVj § 50.2. The pointing of the Keri, (without Daghesh,) is 
doubtless the correct one. 

15. xb . Imp. of aba , § 18. 2. 

Ch. VI. 5. 1£p:j,-Fufc-of 'tprt. 

15. tf^b , Pass. Part. Shaph. or Praet. Passive from XS? . 



No. IV. Ezra 7 : 12—26. 

12. "i" 1 ^ . perfect (peace), according to the common Eng. version. Ge- 
senius explains it as a term of respect applied to the person addressed, 
and renders it learned. 

14. *nfca£ , for "»nba5 5 P 1 - Part from °?! • The frequent substitution 
of Pattahh for Q,amets has been mentioned before . 

24. S;!3?fia , strictly 2d Part. pi. from "jna , consecrated persons, hence, 
those devoted to the service of the sanctuary, Nethinim. 



VOOABTJ LA ]!V 



sx, 2X rn. a father, irreg. emph. 
xsx, with Buff it takes the form 
^-x ; e. g. TJWfiJ thy father, "mix. 
■*na« his father. KrttaN her father, 
x»2X. o//r father, "P="x ;/ow 
(masc.) father^ "jaia^t //w (fern.) 
father, etc. Instead of n -x ///// 
father^ which occurs only Pan. 
5 : 13, the emph. xix is elsewhere 
universally employed. Plur. "jrraK 
con.st. rnzx, emph. xrn^x with 
raff. Tjriax or "~n2x my fathers, 
etc. with the suff. of either sing. 
or plur. nouns. 

;x emph. X2X . X2^X and X2:x m. 
"Dec. IV. b.fruitl 

-tzx to perish — A ph. TSl'S and lain 
to destroy ; also intrans. to perish. 
— Hoph. "Qin to be destroyed. 

■,:;x and "jaN c. g. Dec. III. a. a stone. 

^:x m. Dec. III. a. a reward. 

X"ijx f. Dec. VI 1 1, a. and 

r-rx Dec. III. a. an epistle, a letter. 

71X adv. then. With a prefixed, 
■pixa. idem. 

c*ix m. pr. n. Adam. 

DlK m. Dec. III. a. also 

c*]X and CVX Dec. II. a. also 

cnx and c^x Dec. I. b. i. q. en 
6/oocZ. 

x^snx f. Dec. VII. a. the ground, (he 
earth. 

-nx m. Dec. I. a. the month Adar, 
part of February and March. 

■nx m. Dec. II. a. a threshing-floor. 



"piT2n"lX m. (found only in the plu- 
ral), ch i'f judges, senators. 

^v!"" 1 ^ adv. (i. q. aopturra) carefully, 
exactly. 

r ""? x . c. g. Dec. II. a. (i. q. Heb. ~"~ T 
with X prosthetic.) an arm. 

•nnix adj. Dec. I. a. other, another. 

*,Eb"x m. Dec. I. b. doctrine, inslruc- 
tion. 

•(■cix m. Dec. I. b. an artificer, work- 
man; a maker. 

?:yx and uaiM f. Dec. VII. c. the 
making or doing any thing ; the 
thing made or done. 

■"•s-'x m. Dec. I. b. treasure ; place of 
deposit. 

rnix m. Dec. III. d. a way. access. 

x^nix f. Dec. VII. a. law. 

XJX and njx , 2d Part. XTX . to light, 
kindle. 

-nx i. q. bix . 

bTwX Fur. b^t^j Imp. bt» . b'.rx and 
^T^. : 'o ^o ; to depart. 

nx m. a brother, irreg. emph. xnx . 
with surf, "'nx or ^nx my brother ; 
7|*nx thy brother. Wn^ (^nx 
Gen. 4 : 8, Jer. T.) /u's brother; etc. 
Plur. *," | nx with surT. "nx my 
brothers, 7fr\x and ~nx thy broth- 
erSj "T\'r\s his brothers. This form 
is distinguished from the sing, by 
Hholem while the latter has Shu- 
req. "p's^nx , etc. 

nnx to lay hold of. take, take posses- 
sion of. Ithpe. pass. 



4» 



124 



n^ 



K^ns and xn^HX f Dec. VII. a 
taking- possession, possession. 

rninx f. Dec. VII. a. (verbal from 
n-in to announce, to explain), ex- 
planation. 

rninx f Dec. VII. a. an enigma. 

xsonx f. Dec. VII. a. possession; in- 
heritance. 

"^D 2 * prep.. q/fer. 

""ins Dec. VIII. c. and 'jnfiX Dec. I. 
b. adj. other, another. 

■nrjK f Dec. VIII. c. *Aa£ icfa'cA is 
Zas£; extremity, end. 

"p^nx adv. !p55$ ?»? <^ fas*. 

1?3an^wn« m. pi. Dec. II. (from the 

Persian v_> JL>+> a satrap, perhaps 

with the prefix \J^A excellence,) 
principal governors. 

'rax m. (in the sing, like Dec. I. pi. 
"plax) brier ; especially the haw- 
thorn. 

TpX adv. how? V^X idem. 

"jb^s m. Dec. I. b. a tree. 

xa^x f. Dec. VII. a. terror ; fear. 

■px conj. = Heb. ex if. 

-i|5?X and ^x. i. q. ftgy, q. v. 

rnx or "'nix adv. of affirmation ( = 
Heb. izh ,) £/iere zs, ^Aere are ; there 
exists. *£ ">rnx 7 /mue. It takes 
the suffixes of plural nouns. Dan. 
2: 11, 3: 14. 

p*px i. q. Sj-w q. v. 

bsx to eotf ; £o consume. 

bx adv. tzo^, especially before the fu- 
ture tense, expressing a prohibi- 
tion, etc. 

bit (Keri Ez. 5 : 15.) and 

nibx dem. pron. ^Aese. 

ttbx m. Dec. I. a. God. PI. excel, 
sometimes as in Hebrew DFfrP.St; 

*)bx interj. i. q. >nx . behold ! 

^X.conj. //y interj. oA that, utinam ! 
il&tSft as ?/. 

■Wx and 'pS'&feK or 'psb&X zmZess, 
comp. of ^X , xb , and the enclitic 
syllable "p'S ; i. q. &$, *£ 



T^X and "||x , or fully written rp|a 

and "pbx, dem. pron. plur. masc. 

these ; those. 
?)bx and qbx m. Dec. III. a. a £/*ow- 

semd. 
DX f. irreg. emph. xax ; with suff. 

7JBX. etc.; plur. )trn& ; with suff. 

■pnnrjax, (and with masc. form 

yirn'ax.) a mother. 
DX conj. i/1 
xax : f. irreg. (in the sing, like Dec. 

VIII. a. but in pause sinax ; in the 

plur. 1iTO£'j PiTB«, etc.) a nurse; 

a maid. 
xax and nax fern. Dec. VII. a. in 

sing. ; plur. "pax Dec. IV. a. a 

cubit. 
xax f. plur. *pax , a people, nation. 
iax : ' Aph. "paiii'Vo believe; with S to 

confide in, trust in. Pass. part. 

"aina certain, true ; faithful. 
lax £o speak, say ; to command. 
lax m. Dec. II. a. a lamb. 
i:nax adj. Dec. VII. b. strong. 
"|X adv. where ? whither ? "iSa whence ? 
X3X, less frequently <13X : and ^3X : , 

pers. pron. com. gen. 7. — PI. X3H3X 

we. 
y\5i!t pers. pron. 3d pi. m. they; them. 
D13X and D^lSX. adj. and sub. Dec. I. 

a. violent ; a violent person ; a 

robber. 
&3X to constrain, compel ; to oppress 

the mind, occasion anxiety. 
?)3X m. Dec. III. a. i. q. v)X , face, 

countenance. Dual and Plural 

idem. 
UJ3X, (T2J3X, and by Aphaeresis U33) 

m. irreg. emph. &1B38, X1T3 Gen. 

3 : 20, Pseudo-Jon/; plur. ' 'pd3X 

and "pitta ; const. "H1J3X ; man. — 

UJ3X ^2 idem. 
nsx* (in Bibl. Chal. npi3X , pointed 

like the other form which is em- 
ployed in the Targums, with Si 

in otio. The writers doubtless 

pronounced it, in analogy with the 



•J^s 



srs 



Hebrew, nrpK ) pers. pron. com". 

gen. //<<>". 

vr:s. i. q. )WIJ| . ye. 

*ox and *cx l'. Dee. VII. c. " ///'■'//- 
ci,i<\ something salutary. 

^-rx in. l ).'.-. I. a, bana\ fetter, 

^cx in. irreg. em ph. x;~x; pi. -sx . 
xp'cx . ell-. ; a physician. 

"1D3DX m. pi. n. Asnapper, perhaps 
the same with Bsarhaddoo, or an 
officer under him. He collected 
thr Samaritans from different na- 
tions and settled them in thr hind 

of the. ten tribes. Ez. -I : 10. 
( 'uiiij). v. 2. 

x:~c3X (niilel) adv. speedily. 

"IDS in. Dee. 1. a. prohibition; obli- 
gation. 

x-;3X f. Dec. VII. a. chain, hand. 

ynrnox m. pi. n. Esarhaddon, son 
ofSennacherib and king of Assyria. 

--3X in. Dee. I. b. (from the Latin 
strata,) street, way, path. 

rx (by a double commutation i. q. 
lit b. yv .) m. Dec. I. a. wood. 

I. rx conj. also. 

II. rx. (contr. from r?x) m. Dec. IV. 
a. face, countenance. — X*}2 ^cx 
surface of the field, i. e. simply the 
field. 

X^D-iex m. pi. pr. n. of a people set- 
tled in Samaria and subject to the 
Assyrians, perhaps the Parrhasii. 

x^o^ex m. pi. and 

x^rrnEx m. pi. proper names of 
nations, now unknown, settled in 
Samaria and subject to the Assy- 
rians. Ez. 4 : 9. 

CP2X (only Ez. 4 ; 13.) according to ' 
Buxtorf, treasury. So modern 
critics generally. Aben Ezra ex- 
plains it by rix^n, expenses; 
R. Sol. Jarchi by 0^3. tribute. 

SMW f. Dec. II. a. (PI. -,— and ",— ) 
finger ; with bsn . toe. 

■«b»2SS f. Dee. VIII. c. (Greek otoAtJ,) ! 
pi. "(ib^^x , robe, garment. 



:---x f -:-z-x m. num. adj. Dec. II. 

a. /'/"/■. 

-,;;-x adj. Dec. I. b. purple. Heb. 
: -x Byriac fjo-lfj Arabic 

■-x interj. to ! behold! 

=--x conj. because ; that ; j. q, --x . 

n-x f. Dec. III. d. (pi. generally 

•r-x. ) journey ; way, path. 

•nx and mnsj m. Irreg. emph. x;-x ; 
plur. "*~x. emph. xr;--;x. a lion. 

-~x conj. >>■ cause ; that. 

---x adj. Dec. I. ;\.fit. suitable, pro- 
per, verbal from ~"?x ro be pro- 
longed, to be long ; in Talm. to pre- 
pair, adapt. 

ninx f. Dec. VII. a. prolongation, 
continuation. 

rtTisnx f. Dec. VII. a. knee. 

xonx and xenx f. Dec. VII. a. 
poison. 

yix c. g. Dec. III. a. the earth, i. q. 
Heb. y "X , Gr. Introd. 4. note 2. 

snx adv. below; with Jtt, inferior, 
Dan. 2 : 39. Hence 

^rnx f. Dec. VII. b. what is lowest, 
bottom. 

pnx c. g. Dec. III. a. (i. q. in*,) 
earth. In the biblical Cbaldee 
only Jer. 10: 11, but frequent in 
the Targums. 

CN . Xi ; x m. Dee. IV. b. and 

ETON f. Dee. VII. a. fire. 

TL'x m. Dec. IV. c. foundation. 

r^x m. D.e. I. a. and 

rrx m. Dec. II. a. astrologer. He- 
brew and Syriac idem. 

■p.M'.x m. Dec. III. a. a wall. 

xnrx with prosthetic X, i. q. xr*r 
to drink. 

■vnrrrx m. Dec. I. a. rebellion. 

nx m. Dec. I. a. a sign. 

fix pers. pron. 2d p. sing. m. thou. 

xrx Fut. "r--. W5i etc. to come. 
Aph. WK and in the bibl. Chal- 
dee m ^n to cause to come, bring. 



TIP 2 



126 



*n 



Pass, of a peculiar form, (a kind 
of Hophal,) n n*3 to be brought, 
Dan. 3:13, 6: 18.' 
xnx f. (In sing. Dec. VII. a. but in 
pause biK; PI. y*m Dec. II. a.) 
a woman; a wife. 

I. "pHX pers. pron. 2 pi. m. ye ; you. 

II. "Jinx c. g. Dec. I. a. furnace, oven, 
■vn» m. Dec. III. a. a place. — ^ *in& 

where. 



3 prep, in; fa/; w?7/i,. 

fflwa adj. Dec. I. a. fem. ta^tta- Dec. 
VII. a. evil, wicked. 

tt?$a to 6e 5aa\ £? tigs to displease. 
Aph. to rfo mz a bad or disagree- 
able manner. 

"ipxa prep. i. q. 1f)a after. 

•paa prep, on account of. "n "pia conj. 
6ecai*se. 

J&.53 ?Y/em.. 'n bbsa *a because ; so 
that, rra bbaa jo w%? 

b^ns z'etem. "n b^S so £Aa£ ; /Aaf, z^. 

pna to inquire, investigate. 

"fta Pa. to scalier, disperse. 

Ubiftzi f. Dec. VII. c. ftasto, quickness. 
ib'raa quickly. 

I. bl"i3 Pa. to terrify, lthpa. pass. 

II. bna Pa. to /lasted. Ithpe. Inf. 
fibnanii , as a noun, haste. 

xnnaf. Dec. VIII. a. and 

Nnn3 f. Dec. VII. a. shame; modesty. 

n*3 to lodge, pass a night. 

ft 3 to spoil, plunder ; to depopulate. 

"nna adj. Dec. I. a. choice, excellent. 

bus to cease. Pa. to cause to cease. 

^a sep. prep. i. q. a in, etc. See also 
under n^a . 

"pa and ^^a prep, between, among. 
It takes the suffixes of both singu- 
lar and plural nouns. 

n3">a f. Dec. VII. a. understanding, 
intelligence. 

SO^a f. Dec. VII. a. palace. 

ttJ n a adj. Dec. I. a. £>ad, ei??7. 



n?3 m. irreg. Emph. xn?3 . xr^n. 
(^a Ex. 7 : 21, Pseudo-Jon.); const. 
n?a : plur. "pna etc. like Dec. IV. 
a house; the place in which any 
thing is contained or kept; e. g. 
K*TD5 n^a treasury, RJTOtj n*>3 a/- 
chives. 

X23 to weejo. 

b3 m. Dec. I. a. Aear*. 

xb3 to wear owZ ; met. to afflict, op- 
press. Pa. idem. 

ib3 verbal from xba , excise, tax on 
articles consumed. 

■ja (In the Targums found only in 
the plural), see "ia . 

!"J33 to build; to rebuild, restore. Ith- 
pe. pass. 

■j^sa m. Dec. I. a. building, structure, 
verbal from <"i:a . 

t : 

02a to be angry. 

toioa f. Dec. VII. a. message, annun- 
ciation. 

H3?3 to seek ; to ask, request. 

wa f Dec. VII. c. request, petition. 
to'33 is taken as an adv. or interj. 
I entreat, quaeso ; often followed 
by "ja ; as 7]2a waa , I beseech thee. 

-ii3>a m. Dec. I. a. a brute ; cattle ; 
beasts of burden. 

bsa or bsa m. Dec. III. a. lord, mas- 
ter ; husband. 

-i3>a and Pa. 132} to burn; to consume. 

nsjja f. Dec. VII. a. ra/%. 

ijsa Pa. to seeA\ search. Ithpa. idem. 

ia or ia m. a son, irreg. emph. 503 , 
with sufF. r^a, fcrnaj plur. {^'a 
(from "|3), emph. N^oa , (with pros- 
thetic X , ND3X ,) const, ^a ; with 

sum ">sa, tpia or Sjsa, yia^a. In 

various combinations it has the 

force of the Heb. "ja q. v. in Lex. 

Heb. 
13 j ana without, (foras, — Heb. 

■pn); *ja "ia prep, besides, except; 

as a subst. that which is without, 

the field. 
ana to create. Ithpe. pass. 



it: 



L2 



>7 



2-: 



T\na to kneel. Pa. ~-- /" bless, praise. 
--z and "~- !' 1 >«•<-. ill. I), km 
nana mm nz-z f. Dec, VII. a. bbss- 

ing, /» nediction. 
B">X adv. certainly; indeed; also. 

moreover ; conj. yet, but. 
<itoa m. Dec. III. b. flesh. 
na in. Dec. I\'. a. &o<A, a liquid 

measure, equal to seven and a half 

gallons. 
rz r. a daughter, irreg. Emph. KFH3 

(comp. Syr. Z^S) , rou<(. H^S, with 

sail'. r,r~2; pi. "jaa, (from x:a ;) 

const. r:a ; emph. ^":a . 
l"-rz pi, in. Dec. I. a. virginity. 
■nna prep, after. With sail", it takes 

a plur. form ; as n "}rq . 



-y in. Dec. IV. a. back ; surface. bs 

-a ami TaB bs upon. 
35 ami ''aa, (with sail'. ^sa, -2?) 

prep, tnV/i ; subject to. penes. 
ia in. Dec. IV. 0. pit, den; pit for 

water, cistern. 
en*aa f. Dec. VII. a. courago • 

strength ; power. 
"KM m. Dee. III. a. (PL y^aa and 

r'jaa as if from "lift.) a man; a 

ma If. 
'J'nirij (with the Hat pronunciation). 

i. q. "Han. 
Tia to cut off'; to cut down a tree, 
■na c. g. Dec. III. a. PI. J*!! and 

VJ-JS, a frid. 
13 or 15 m. irreg. const. l"&; with surf. 

HJIj Pl-Jlj nw'ctet "153 among ; in. 

X"a icfem. 

nja f. Dec. VII. a. pride. 

ma and Aph. max to go forth ; to 

burst or break forth. 
fcnnna (not found in abs. sing.) m. 

Dec. II. a. a coal. 
*ian m. Dec. I. b. treasurer. PI. 

V^ata and T^agl. 



r'Tr. in. Dec. I. a. IhreaU ru r ; arenger. 
-t; /-; <•/// /;// ',• /., [thpe. f<> fc 

rut off t detach* d 
•t:. in. Dec. ||. a. astrologer, diviner, 

lit. Part, li'ini "IT1 who nil, is 

u decree. < '< >m p. also x~t; .fate. 

**5Tl i: J tec. \ II. a. decree ; thing de- 
rn id ; in Rah. fate, destiny. 

~~a to laugh ; to deride. 

x-a <>r -a m. Irreg, (pi. rvhJpa) a val- 
ley. 

c:rva or czna, (compounded of *1 a 
valley, and crn prop, n.) //<e valley 
of Hinnom, where children were 

passed through the lire to Moloch : 
hence, met., h> II. the place of future. 
and eternal punishment. 

"iva m. Dec. I. a. a stranger, a 
foreigner. 

"Pa m. Dec. I. a. chalk, lime ; plus- 
tering of a wall. 

xr; . nba and ">ba to emigrate, go into 
captivity; to reveal, mafce mani- 
fest. Praet. Pass, ifel and ty Dan. 
2:19. 30. Aph. ^ban to carry cap- 
live. 

b;b; m. Dec. TI. ;i . whet I. 

iba'f. Dec. VII. c. captivity. 

bba m. found only in the phrase ",ask 
bba. prob. lapis <L vnlutionis. a 
stone which cannot be carried, but 
must be rolled, on account of its 
great size. LXX. choice stones. 

"PBa adj. Dec. I. a. perfect. 

"ja m. Dec. IV. a. and 

x:a f. irreg. (emph. xr:a and xr:; . 
frequently in Targ. Pseudo-Jon. 
xr^rsa or xmrra , const. r:a ; pi. 
"|3a); a garden. 

T3a m. Dec. III. b. treasure. 

ra m. Dec. IV. a. wing. 

"Ea c. g. Dec. III. a. a vine ; a vine- 
yard. 

y& and Pa. a~a to excite, stir up. 

"Ha Pa. to rouse, excite. Ithpe. and 
Ithpa. pass, and refl. 

eia m. Dec. III. a. bone. 



irn 



128 



V n 



oda m. Dec. III. b. and c. body. 
na f. pr. n. of a principal city among 
the Philistines, Gatk. 



■n rel. pron. =Heb. "i^X, who, etc.; 

conj. that, so that; because, etc.; 

sign of the Possessive or Genitive 

case. 
X'n f. demonst. pron. this ; that. 
:n m. Dec. IV. c. a bear. 
33h m. Dec. I. b. enmity, xnnn bss 

an enemy. 
lan/n f. Dec. VII. c. enmity. 
rn^ (comp. Gram. Intr. 4. note 2.) to 

offer sacrifices. 
nn'n m. Dec. III. b. sacrifice. 
P5"n to adhere, cleave to. 
nan and Pa. la'n to 7e«d, conduct; 

to govern ; to take, receive. 
anan f. Dec. VII. a. cause, ttjisn b? 

■<*j so that. 
enaa and KTtt f. Dec. VII. a. a 6ee. 
nnn m. Dec. III. a. gold. 
Tyi^\ to deride. 
izJnto m. Dec. II. a. and ttJaS Dec. III. 

b. honey. 
T'Yn m. pr. n. David, 
yfiifa m. Dec. I. b. memory; a me- 
morial. 
y&i and 'p'n to judge; to adjudge; to 

contend. 
pTn to 6e broken in pieces. 
*Qpl to dwell. 
bn*rc Dura, a plain in Babylonia, 

Dan. 3 : 1. 
fc?ta to freaiZ underfoot, trample upon; 

to crush. 
tft1$n f. Dec. VIII. a. found only Dan. 

6 : 19, according to Buxtorf and 
the Hebrew interpreters generally, 

an instrument of music, from nrn 
to strike. Gesenius renders it a 

concubine, comparing the Ar. L^.£ 
subegit feminam, and the old ver- 
sions food, conjecturaliy. 



bn^} to fear. It refers both to rever- 
ence toward God, and to dread, as 
of an enemy, etc. Pa. brrn to ter- 
rify. 

ttbrn f Dec. VIII. a. fear ; terror. 

prft to press, urge. 

^==^ which see ; also as a disjunc- 
tive, but; it is sometimes redun- 
dant like the Greek 6Vt in the be- 
ginning of an address, as Dan. 
2 :25. 

^ and b^ signs of the Genitive 
case, contracted from ^ " , 'n and b ^ . 

■p^ m. Dec. I. a. judgment ; justice, 
righteousness ; judicial trial ; the 
reckoning or account, given by men 
of their actions in the day of judg- 
ment, Gen. 3 : 18, Pseudo-Jon. ; 
punishment. 

y^\ m. Dec. I. a. a judge. 

&03" , 'n m. pi. Dinailes, one of the na- 
tions which settled Samaria. Ez. 
4:9. 

i* 1 -! m. Dec. I. an inhabitant ; a so- 
journer, stranger. 

ET-! m. Dec. III. c. treading \inder 
foot. 

7fi m. Tj'iJ f- and }tt c. g. demon, 
pron. this. 

Wi (Heb. -OT, Intr. 4. note 2.) to 
remember. 

-id 1 } m. Dec. III. b. a ram. 

nai'lp'n f. Dec. VII. a. and 

pa^ m. Dec. I. b. record, memorial, 
h istory. 

-ft&m or Ti^ 1 !? m. Dec. I. a. (Lat. 
delator,) calumniator ; accuser. 

KTab'n adv. that not, lest. comp. asb . 

pbn to burn, intrans. 

en m. Dec. II. a. 6/ood 

X^'n to resemble. Pa. id. ; to £/iiftfc. 

T|^ , n to steep. 

TH* TU dem. pron. m. this ; that. 

s:"n and nj'n dem. pr. c. g. Zftis ; that. 

bVLftt m. pr. n. Daniel. 

Tj?^ to g"0 out, be extinguished. 



bn 



129 



p~-i (o be broh n in pieces. Aph. r?x 
and in the biblical < !haldee r^n to 

In i ak in pieces. 

f!\ in. I )■•,-. i. ,i. (!■_•>. generation, 
irin-n ,,,. i),.,-. I. b, a thistle. 
^•""7 m - p 1 '- "• Darius, 
r-T i. ,,. Heb. r-.-t, iii. Dec. III. a. 

and "~n I )n\ I. a. <m arm. 

' ■■ 

vn l! Dvr. 1. law j decree; purpose; 

xnbx n* religion^ Dan. »i : 6. 
xn m. Die. III. 1). young i< nder 

hi rb. 
nzr-i in. pi, ^aij^ , jurisconsultuSj 

a person skilled in l<nr. judge : a 

Persian word. 



n 



n interrogative prefix, as in Hebrew. 

xn and xn interj. behold J 

ynatgn m. pi. minister of state, a Per- 
sian word. 

B'i'HH (Gr. lSuoTr]<;,) m. Dec. I. a. a 
loir person : plebeian. — As an adj. 
low, vulgar. 

C"in Pa. to tear in pieces; to divide. 

c^in m. Dec. I. a. piece, fragment. 

W} i- ?. 1*] i &oV. //ie/z. 

"inn Pa. "nn to /io?wr. 

x;n , rnri and ""in . to be. Fut. "tfTIJ . 
apoc. W . Tin . Tix . etc. Fut. with 
b prefixed drops its prefbrmative 
"», and is employed in an optative 
or subjunctive sense; e. g. ",'inb . 
//w/ //*m/ might be, Dan. 6 : 2. 3. 
See Gram. § 23, note, and § 50. 2. 

X^m pron. pers. and demonst. m. he; 
this; that. 

tpn fut. r\rri to go. 

K">n pron. pers. and demonst. f. she; 
it ; this; that. 

VTn dem. pron. i. q. "j-r ; adv. then. 

ipn adv. and conj. as; as if. X^s^n 
and X3D^n id. 

PS^n m. Dec. II. a. temple ; palace. 

yepn , see ",^x . 

t|bn to walk. Pael and Ithpaal. id. 
9 



ij3h in. I dr. |. a. to// paid by pa en- 
. verbal from ~?n . 

x::n and KsVri adv. hither. 

iati and pan m. pi. pert. pron. :m 
pen . ///'//. 

--:-2.-i or "i"~ n mi. Dec. I. a, chain 
for the neck or arm. 83 r. idem. 

in adv. i. <j. "jx whei 

in conj. and adv. if; sign of a ques- 
tion ( n 1 nw, ntim / *n • . . . in 
whether .... or. 

-en to ////•//. [thpe. red. 

^n-n in. Dr.-. I. a. thought, musing, 
cogitation, 

r^z-:rn. see 3*13. 

3 conj. and; but ; &c. as in Hebrew. 
But Pa« conversive does not ap- 
]>ear in CJialdee. 



"|3t to 6?/ ?/ / to gain ; Pa. "2T to self; 
Ithpa. -,2-itx to 6e sotoJ; to 6d 

bought. 

■Pill adj. Dec. I. a. prudent, cautious. 
Lit. enlightened, 2d part. Peal 
from "in* /o sAiwe. 

"pT to feed, to nourish. Ittaph. pass. 

r*T to tremble, be afraid. 

n* 1 ! Aph. TiMl to &e proud, to act 
proudly. 

V»t m. Dec. I. a. splendor, brightness. 
VivrT Dan. 5:6, 9, lit. his splen- 
dors, i. e. the bright and cheerful 
appearance of his countenance. 

n=T to be clean, pure; to be just, inno- 
cent. 

toT f Dec. VII. c. and »1 Dec. VIII. 
c. purity ; justice ; righteousness, 

->?■ , irsi adj. Dec. VI. pure, inno- 
cent. 

Kfl f Dec. VII. a. sweat. 

")*:] m. Dec. III. b. time, period of 
time. 



mn 



130 



b*n 



"jET Pa. to appoint, prepare. Ithpa. 

'^I'l to concert, agree together. 

Aph. join idem, Dan. 2 : 9, Kethib. 
iet m. Dec. I. a. music. 
133T m. Dec. I. a. singer, musician. 
"T m. Dec. II. a. species, sort. 
yv&\ adj. Dec. I. a. and adv. ZiM/e, a 

PS'T to CY7/ OUt. 

p*p] m. Dec. I. a. a spark. 

C1£T to elevate ; to suspend, as a mal- 
efactor on a gallows or cross. 

TTr m. Dec. III. a. a girdle ; a girded 
apron. 

snT m. Dec. III. a. and 

irnT f. Dec. VII. b. seed; posterity ; 
family; plur. families. 



n£*ian, f Dec. VII. a. injury, hurt. 

a^an and a n an adj. Dec. I. beloved. 

ban Pa. to injure; to destroy, waste, 
overthrow. Ithpa. to be destroyed. 

ban m. pr. n. Abel. 

ban m. Dec. I. a. and 

ban m. Dec. III. a. hurt, injury. 

ian and ian m. Dec. III. a. a com- 
panion. 

■tan to associate, unite ; to put to- 
gether, compose. Ithpa. to associate 
themselves, join together. 

nnan f. Dec. VII. a. fem. of nan .fe- 
male companion. 

in , in pause "in , fem. X^n , num. 
adj. one ; frst; before numerals, 
time, times ; e. g. h$ nsaia ^n , 
seven- times more than, lit. seven 
times above. Dan. 3 : 19. 

I. am adv. once, anna together, annb 
very much, exceedingly. 

II. frHn to rejoice, be joyful. Aph. to 
cause to rejoice, to please, gratify. 

nn"m f. Dec. VII. a. joy, gladness. 
yin m. plur. Dec. II. b. breast. 
Wiq" adj. Dee. III. a. (i. q. Heb. tznn) 
raw. 



xjn and ^n to toZZ, declare; to make 

manifest. Aph. it/em. 
ain ra. Dec. I. a. and 
xain f. Dec. VII. a. guilt, crime ; 

T debt. 
"i in to speak in enigmas ; to propose 

(a riddle). 
SOW f. Dec. VII. a. and 
^nn f. Dec. VII. b. a riddle, an enig- 
ma. 
nin f. pr. n. jKue. 
ain to sew. Aph. to repair ; e. g. a 

wall, Ez. 4 : 12. 
"iwin m. Dec. III. d. a staff, a rod. 
GOiri and a^in m. irreg. PI. "j^n ; a 

serpent. . 
bin and b*n adj. Dec. I. a. profane ; 

common. 
arbin m. emph. (found only ill this 

form and with suff. "^blfi); sweet- 
ness. 
-i-jri adj. Dec. I. a. white. 
ysmn m. Dec. I. b. and 
"abin m. Dec. II. a. act of thinking ; 

reckoning ; account. 
xtn to see. 

itn m. Dec. III. c. wstorc / aspect, ap- 
pearance. 
inn f! Dec. VII. c. and Wfl Dec. VIII. 

c. (with suff. nnim : Dan. 4 : 8.) 

idem. 
aon m. (pi. "ptfan , const, ""aiin , with 

suff. s^an , lia^X'jq . a sk 
xwn to err, to sm. 
nxisn f. Dec. IX. a sin-offering. 
Sficsn m. Dec. I. a. violence ; plunder, 

rapine. 
Kan to sew, Pa. idem. 
">n adj. Dec. IV. a. living. 
*rn and n^n to fe. Aph. part. KHQ 

preserving alive. 
srn f. Dec. VII. a. 6eas£, animal. 
■p*n pi. m. Dec. I. a. (But V*n and 

\*n occur instead of the regular 

absolute form,) life. 
b?n m. Dec. III. d. strength; a 

host. 



V T 



131 



err: 



c^n adj. I tec, I. a. «•/.■•<■ ; u b noun. 

10/m ///'///. Mugian, 
Dan and Pafil csn and awi to 6e 

ir/.sv ; to understand. 
swan <>r xaaiin (pron. hhakhma,) f 

1 )ir. VIL a. wisdom. 
■fcq and ^bn adj. Dec. III. meet. 
cbn in. I >ec. II I. o. '/ dream* 
cbn to change; to be changed; to 

pass through ; to paw, spoken of 

time. 
cjVn, c;bn i, (in the Jerusalem dialect 

wpbrn and C^in) prep, instead of. 
pbn m. \)vr. I. a. /"//•/. fof. 
on m. a J'<i(/i'i-i/!-i(iu\ irreg. with 

Buff. man , r ( * an . 
x^n to contemplate^ to a 
s-on and X^n £ Dec. VIII. a. /tea/; 

anger. 
pan to ceo:; to grieve. 
^>~n in. Doc. III. a. UHwe. 
V-tH 111. pi. wheat. 

nssn £ Dec. VII. a. dedication, conse- 
cration. 
"ijn to compassionate, show favor to. 

Ithpa. to pray, make supplication. 
"n&n adj. Dec. I. a. defective. 
■JOT! and Aph. "jOnx to -possess, to hare 

in possession. 
*on m. Dec. III. b. power, might. 
ron m. Dec. III. a. clay ; potter's 

work. 
ion to be deficient or lackiiig. Pa. to 

diminish ; to depress. 
l^n : m. Dec. III. a. harvest. 
r^n : and Aph. to urge, hasten. Part. 

Aph. C^nns urgent^ hasty. 
5£n m. Dec. III. a. afield. 
Z~\n to devastate. Hoph. pass. 
-"in f. Dec. III. a. a sword. 
fwgnn m. pi. Dec. IV. c. di- 
viners, Magians, from the Persian 

JOLoJw^, a wise man; or from 

Heb. ann , persons skilled in hie- 
roglyphics. 
rpn fo st?ig-e, 6wm. Ithpa. Pass. 



•,— r. in. Dec. III. ,t. Inin thigh. 
inn to 6t/m ; to 6c A"'. 
-■ i- in. I )ec. I. a. darkness, 

-"IT, and --I'- adj. D'C. I. a. poor. 

indigi nt. 
nrn to think necessary^ with b and 
I hi*. ; to /" /" cessary. 

I. birn to be thin; to make thin or 
small ; to crush. Pa. idi m. 

J I. brn to ///////.• ; to reckon to the ac- 
count of any on,', to imputr. Pa. 

to regard. Ithpa. pass. 

crn /o ffeai 



ZX'J to />'' 'jlml . joyful. 

3D adj. Dec. I. a. liau. MB Dec. VII. 
a. good; beautiful. 

nz'Ji m. Dec. I. a. executioner, armed 
attendant. 

21D m. Dec. I. a. goodness, excellence; 
happiness. 

isd m. Dec. I. a. a mountain; a rock. 
Heb. 1«. 

Pla adj. fast in?. Ar. .^j-b to fast. 

b'B Pa. to £0 Olrfy to" Walk abroad. 
Pal pel b^b^ to cast out ; to reniove. 

"pB m. Dec. I. a. ctoy. 

b^ m. Dec. IV. a. dew. 

^ba m. irreg. eniph. X?bB ; plur. 
T^? 3 . • r?^a ; emph. X'ba . -xbB ; 
with sail'. -"b'J Gen. 22 : 3. Pseudo- 
Jon. ; a boy, a servant. 

bbB to hide. Aph. to recline for rest 
under the shade. 

pb:: to throw away. 

■WB and Pa. n^B to ^if/e. Ithpe. 
■"laa&J andi^'J-X . and Ithpa. "IS'JX 
to hide one's self 

nr:: to err. to wander. Aph. to cause 
to err, to seduce. 

n?D to taste; to eat. Pa. to give to 
eat, to feed. 

crj and D?a m. Dec. III. a. taste. 
particularly pleasant taste; wis- 
dom, Dan. 2 : 14 ; command, xlict ; 



sto 



132 



cause for trial, Ez. 5:5; reckon- 
ing, account, Dan. 6:3; regard, 
respect ; bs> DSI3 D*ii!) , Zo regard, 
Dan. 3 : 12. B98 bra , chancellor, 
lit. master of decrees. 

I. 1313 ra. Dec. III. b. naz'Z, of a hu- 
man finger or toe ; claw. 

II. 1§B m. Dec. III. emph. bHb-JB, 
the blatta, a shell-fish of a purple 
color. 

1^t3 Zo expel, drive out. 

^fiB m. Dec. III. a. a Zeq/i 

N^bs'nB m. plur. emph. proper name 
of a nation settled in Samaria, 
origin unknown, Ez. 4 : 9. LXX. 
Ttt^o^aXatot. 



bz* Aph. baih Zo bring. 

nttj'a? f. Dec. III. c. the dry land. 

^ f. a hand, irreg. Emph. R"£ and 
with X prosthetic fcO*K , with sufF. 
si 1 ?.?* *?33 C^TS 'Prov. 21:1.) 
Vimj, "jia^j (dual "H? ;) plur. 

rrf- 

S^ Aph. Part. ffiinn and fittio 

praying, praising. 
5^7 to know; to understand. Aph. 

yiirj io s/iow, declare, make known. 
an? fo g-ive ; hence to set, place. 

Ithpe. pass. ; to be given up. 
>irp m. Dec. I. a. the Jewish people, 

the Jews. 
i~n>im m. proper name, Judah. 
■^n? m. Dec. VI. a Jew. PI. emph. 

D'P m. Dec. I. a. a day. PI. const, 
fem. nai" 1 and masc. "VO? . 

pai" 1 m. Dec. II. a. a sucking child, 
suckling. 

t\bii m. proper name, Joseph. 

lyvfi Dec. 1. or isTfP adj. Dec. VI. 
only, alone. 

SB? Fut. SB*^ to be good; to seem 
good, bs . to any one, to be pleas- 
ing. 



^ an abbreviation. See Chrestoma- 

thy, p. 92. 
ba^ and h*) , Fut. b^D? (and like the 
Heb. b'5^1 Jud. 14 : 13.) to 6e a&Ze; 
7o prevail. 
"ib? to 6ear, bring forth; sometimes 

Zo &eg-eZ. 
D^ m. Dec. IV. a. a sea, the sea. 
S|b* ^o add Hoph. Heb. form, CjOW 

?o Z>e added. 
13? ^ to advise, counsel. Part, a co?m- 

seZZor. Ithpa. Zo consult together. 
ap?? m. proper name, Jacob. 
ns^ m. Dec. III. a. proper name, ./«- 

pheth. 
XT? Shaphel RSi« and i»ittS to finish. 
2%i t oe certain, true. Pa. to tell 

the truth. 
a" 1 ^? adj. Dec. I. a. true, certain; con- 
firmed, valid, a" 1 ^ ■}» certainly, of 

a truth. 
1J3 1 ? Zo 6wnz (neut), 6e consumed. 

Aph. Zo 6wr?2 (act.), consume. 
rTip? f! Dec. VII. a. burning. 
I'lJsE adj. Dec. I. a. Aard, difficult ; 

honored, honorable, noble. 
*\p_*l to be or 6e esteemed honorable or 

valuable ; i. q. Pa. Zo honor. Aph. 

idem. 
IB^ m. Dec. I. b. honor ; splendor ; 

glory. Sometimes it has X pros- 
thetic. 
ob^n? and C&ttjsn'i Jerusalem. 
rr\^ m. Dec. III. a. month. 
Tfjj f. Dec. III. a. pi. )W , thigh. 
bsnis? m. proper name, Israel; the 

people of Israel. 
B$1 in Peal not used. Aph. B*»T£is 

to stretch forth, reach out. 
W, Heb. nx, sign of the Objective 

or Accusative case. 
am or a^rn Zo si'Z.* Zo reside, stay. 

Aph. aTVin to place, cause to 

dwell. 
-PFP adj. Dec. I. a. abundant, great, 

eminent; adv. TW and SlW 

©ery, exceedingly. 



TDD 



i:;:; 



irn to remain, be left. Pa. ifcl fo 
make to abound, to cause abund 

UllCf. 



3 prep, and conj. ; like / <7j?, as 
though. 

3H3, 3x3. 3^3 and aa m. Dec. I. a. 

grief, Borrow, 
ana adj. Dec, III. b. (i. q. Heb. 

ata,)/afcc 
1>na, T «na and i'ia adv. ( =Heb. xs) 

now. "^"i-'i now therefore. 
■p-ir adv. so, thru. "i=3 id. ■p'laii 

note then fore. 
ns adv. now. na W hitherto. 
brp to be able. Const, with b and 

Inf. 
13 f. Dec. IV. a. window. 
pM3 (only in. pi.) m. Dec. I. a. 

thorns. 
aai's, (sometimes written 33i'S,)m. 

Dec. II. a. a star. 
"Jja Pa. to confirm, establish; to make 

vigorous efforts. Ithpa. pass. ; also, 

as Pa, to endeavor earnestly. 
■n'3 m. Dec. I. a. cor, a measure for 

things liquid or dry, equal to the 

homer or to ten ephahs, supposed 

to contain about eight bushels. 
S)W3, see q ? D3. 
133 ni. Dec. II. a. a ta/en£. 
13 3 Kethib Ez. 7:22. idem. 
ba. bs, xb 3 . x^3. ^3, adj. = Heb. 

?3, all, the whole, every. 

I. bbs Shaph. bbati to complete, fin- 
ish. Ishtaph. b'ronrx pass. 

II. bba and Aph. bbsx to crown; 
met. to adorn. 

6033. n^3 and ""333 conj. and adv. 

how! quam! as; i K»3 like. 
15 j T? ft ^ v - rightly; thus. *)33 

fAeny therefore ; //jws. 
•j}:3 m. pi. with fern. form. Dec. VII. 

a. colleagues. LXX. o-irSotvW. 
■n'23 and l|3 m. Dec. I. a fowy. Gv. 

Kivvpa, Lat. cinyra. 



R833 i 1 . 1 , q, ',3 /A//.v. 

1»33 in. proper name, Canaan. 

-■:z to collect, act Ithpe. to assemble, 
to m 

■-33 1,1. Dec. VI. i. q. ---3 a Chal- 
dean. 

X33. H33 and ^C3 to lie hid, to he 

concealed. Pa. to hah-, conceal} 
i. .,. Peal. 
r-33 in. Dec. I. a. a feeling of 'shame ; 
ignominy. 

^p3 m. I )<•<•. III. a. silver. 
l?a adv. note. "i"3 is /////// now. 
ra e.g. Dec IV. a. a hollow; the 
'palm of ilu; hand; £fe fofe of the 

loot. 

•33 to hunger. Aph. to cause or suf- 
fer another to be hungry. 

i?a Pa. to wash; to purify ceremo- 
nially ; /o ofrme, wa/ce expiation. 

TE3 /o />///r/. Pa. idem. 

K13 £0 6e grieved. Ithpe. and Ithpa. 
idem. 

xb3-3 f Dec. VIII. a, manffe, cloak. 

3113 in. Dec. I. a. a cherub. 

Tii3 m. Dec. I. a. herald. 

Ti3 /o proclaim, make proclamation. 
Aph. /<7e/>i. 

C13 m. Dec. III. a. a vineyard. 

SQ13 m. Dec. V. a. a M?w2e. PI. 
",JD13 . 

"T-s m. Dec. VI. pi. »^? 3 « Chal- 
dean; as astrology flourished prin- 
cipally in Chaldea. an astrologer. 

i«53 /o 6fi //ir/^; to be Jit ; to be 
agreeable, to please. 

itt)3 and lti3 adj. Dec. I. a. and II. 
a. right; just, upright; Jit; legiti- 
mate. 

3P3 to write. 

3rs m. Dec. I. a. writing ; prescrip- 
tion, limitation. Ez. 7:22. 

bP3 and bra m . Dec. III. e. a wall. 



b prep, as in Hebrew, to; for; of, 
b . . . . "pa between — and. 



8 23 



134 



«na 



Kb adv. not; nothing. Dan. 4:32. 
Jtbri and tfbn nonne? also, ecce/ 
Zo'/ Gram. § 68. 3. 

fifijb and ^b . see $$\ and I3nb . 

3b or 33b m. the heart, jrreg. Emph. 
sab,; with suff. ^b. r^b, sjsb, 
etc.; plur. emph. X*33b; with suff. 
Ti nn ab. 

iyi|3b m. Dec. I. a. clothing ; a gar- 
went. 

"psbsb f. plur. plants ; flowers. 

lasb Zo cZoMe one's se//i Aph. to 
clothe. ^ 

"rib conj. therefore, with prosthetic S, 
"iDV^ 5 com P- of sb and "jrt , except 
(comp. Lat. nisi j) but, sed. 

I^b to curse. 

\^b m. Dec. VI. a Levite. Plur. SPib . 

*P^b m. a sea-monster, leviathan. 

rib prep, to; toward; with. 

b^b and sbib m. irreg. emph. K^b ; 
plur. "i^b^b; night. 

P n b a contraction for rnx xb , there 
is not; there are not. 

Tinb adv. and prep, alone; only; 
also. It is strictly a noun, loneli- 
ness ; hence with 3, "Tj'hinbs, in 
his loneliness, i. e. he alone. 

onb m. Dec. III. a. bread. 

onb m. a feast, Dan. 5 : 1. 

H3nb f. Dec. VII. a. « concubine. 

K^b and i~rab (as a noun, nothing,) 
adv. no? / ZesZ. STab^i that not ; 
lest. 

N^b or nsb to fafcor, foi'Z; to be fa- 
tigued with labor. 

Wb or *i^b f. Dec. VII. c. labor; fa- 
tigue. 

ob^b adv. forever. 

*H&? m. Dec. I. b. tongue. 



52 



•73 and before gutturals a , prefix, i. q. 

the sep. prep. *(Q . 
xv , rra or -nn (with Daghesh forte 



euphonic in the first letter of the 
next word,) interrog. pron. what ? 
It is sometimes used adverbially, 
how? also in exclamations how! 
qudm ! N732 as ; how ! XTsb and 
XTab whither? why? ^ sua /Aa* 
which. 
nX73 fem. num. a hundred. ' Dual 

'fcHRB m. dual, scales, balance. 
"173X73, more common orthography, 

"I73i?3 , q. v. 

1N73 and "(73 m. Dec. I. a. a vessel; an 
instrument; a garment, (=Heb. 

"jnriSTS adj. Dec. I. b. shameful; 

ashamed. 
2*373 m. Dec. I. a. a fountain. 
rfein f. Dec. VII. a. roll, book. 
1273 Pa. to throw down, destroy. 
nS^TS m. Dec. II. a. an altar. 
iTna f. Dec. VII. a. tax, tribute. By 

a resolution of Daghesh forte into 

Nun, it is sometimes written njnSB;, 

Ez. 4:13. 
thts m. Dec. I. a. residence, 
^rs m. pr. n. Dec. VI. Media; a 

Mede. 
tnp'iTS f. Dec. VII. a. province ; land, 

country. 
fii'iTS or ns^TS m. Dec. II. a. tfie easZ, 

(lit. <f/ie rising, viz. of the sun.) 
35^73 (found only in this form) indef. 

pron. any thing. 
"rta m. Dec. I. a. dwelling, residence, 

J." q. -iil73 . 
ri73 see BHg : . 

OJnia f. pr. n. Moriah, a hill in Jeru- 
salem. 
tni73 m. Dec. I. a. death; a deadly 

pestilence. 
nsi73 or ni» to die. 

yiTTS, emph. X3 it 73 food; sustenance. 
KH73 and nn73 to strike; to wound. 

Pa. KHTS idem; also to restrain. 

Ithpe. to be fastened or nailed, 

Ez. 6:11. 



V- 



131 



" - 



Hjjinia f. Dec. VI II. a. cow 
class of the priests or Le\ iti 

jo- ;ui.i nor to mm,'. am« ,• /" 
reach ,- vt ith br . to ca»/r upon, be- 
fall ■ happen to ;i person. 

brj- prep, on account off T 1 b-:;^ 
hi cause, since. 

ba^g in. Dec. II. a. food. 

-:-•; mi- naKB in. I).,-. II. a. word, 
speech ; command. With Buff, it 
sometimes signifies seJf i like the 
Heb. bJbs . s,. also ""~i x--**2 ///,• 

t : - t : 

Lord t Jehovah, 

yz pi. m. irreg.j emph. K*tt,con t. 
■»3SJ and sometimes ^-O^Oj water, 
waters, 

nd-^ in. Dec. II. a verbal from iW'Jj 
a pin in, a valley. 

"^•2 to depress, humble; to crush. 
Pa. idem. 

xbs tojS& Ithpe. pass. 

Tjxb'a m. Dec. I. b. an angel. 

r\ii f. Dec. VII. a. PI. -pia, word, 
speech ; thing. 

nb-c m. Dec. III. b. salt. 

nh-q deiiom. from the preceding, in 
the Targums, to salt, to season with 
salt, in bibl. Chaldec only Ez. 
4: 14, prob. to eat sal/, to derive 
support. According to the He- 
brew commentators to devastate. 
destroy, derived from the fact thai 
salt land is generally waste, bar- 
ren ; or from the custom of sowing 
the site of a devastated city with 
salt. 

7|bs or ~\h"q m. Dec. III. a. a king. 

~b "2 m. Dec. III. b. advice, counsel. 

nsbtt f. Dec. VII. a. a queen. 

32>bi3 f. Dec. VII. c. a kingdom ; do- 
minion, reign. 

bb*2 Pa. to speak. 

*l"0 and ","9 interrog. pron. who? what? 
""! "i"? whoever. 

)-2 prep, from • of. out of; some of 
(comp. the French (/'/); because 
of; rather than, in preference to; 



after an adjective, than. — *pq fre- 
quently take after it the charac- 
teristic prefix of the Qe^n. or Dat. 
which i thru pleonasl 

r-z-,*2 Gen. 19 ! 10, i. q. maw . 
-,-:- n. 3 : 24, Jer. Targ. 

I. q. r-"!^ I" 3 - — '1 i- because, 
since. — r^T 1 - truly. — u'Vjrya 
idem, With auffixee "]- takes Da- 
ghesh (brte ; as t - , 

x:^ to number, reckon. Pa. ':~ . - :^ 
and ":-. /<> constitute, appoint. 

rr,:- i. q. n-jr . q, v. 

jhsh in. \)<r. II. a. verba] from jrr», 
(i. q. Hch. rn^. the l)a<rhcsh forte 
being resolved into Nun. ~"?2 al- 
so occurs in the Targums, c. g. 
Jer. 3: 15.) knowl dge, intt /licence; 
the understanding, the mind. 

H3^ i. q. wS3?3. 

ri373 rn. Dec. I. b. rest; quietness, si- 
lence. 

nn:^ f. Dec. VII. a. gift, offering; 
tribute. 

•£3E m. Dec. I. 1). number. 

M30B f. Dec. VIII. c. poverty, want. 

x^"2 c. g. irreg. (with suff. Tfiv. pi. 
■pr-c or -,r? .) //<,? fee//y, <• 1 Kfer. PI. 

b?B in. Dec. I. b. (verbal from bbr to 

enter,) setting of the sun. PI. idem. 

WISE m. Dec. II. a. distinction ; di- 

- : - ' 

vision. 

32^ m. Dec. II. a. a planting. 

X"'J~ f Dec. VII. a. a command, in- 
junction. 

W>2Ca f. Dec. VII. c. middle, midst. 

ovists pr. n. Egypt. 

ttJ-JP^ m? Dec. II. a. sanctuary, holy 
place. 

itf m. Dec. I. a. and 

x--c m. Dec. II. b. lord. Syr. and 
Arab. idem. 

"HB to rebel, to be rebellious. 

iyQ adj. Dec. I. a. rebellious. 

W1B f. Dec. VII. c. correction; in- 
struction. 



13 3 



136 



D53 



Di"ia m. Dec. I. a height, eleva- 
tion. 

ana to pluck off. 

nizia m. Dec. III. b. oil. 

rplBa m. Dec. I. a. (strictly 2d Part, 
from Hira to anoint,) anointed,' 
Messiah. 

r^q-q m. Dec. III. a. and b. skin. 

MWQ m. Dec. II. a. a 6ed. 

jSlIJa m. Dec. II. a. a dwelling ; a 
tent. 

fintin m. Dec. V. a. (strictly Inf 
from 80©) a resting. 

^jyh.»B f Dec. VII. b. a flute, musi- 
cal reed. 

nnizia in the biblical Chaldee, i. q. 

"■Mjaa m. Dec. II. a. a feast ; a. ban- 
quet. 

WW f. Dec. V. a. desire,' appetite. 

bra to compare ; to use similitudes. 
Heb. biiJa . 

bra m. Dec. III. a. a parable, simili- 
tude ; a sententious remark, a pro- 
verb. • 

"na m. Dec. I. b. and )Wq Dec. II. a. 
a gift ; a reward, lax "jFia a gift 
of a reward, i. e. the giving of a 
reward. 

SttWa f Dec. VIII. a. (fem. of the 
preceding,) a present, gift. 



3 



833 Ithpa. ^snx to prophesy; to ut- 
ter (a prophecy). 

•"J&M33 f. Dec. VII. a. prophecy ; pre- 
diction. 

H2T33 f Dec. VII. a. a present, gift ; 
colL g-r/fa ; plur. ^a?3J3 . 

IK" 1 33 and SP33 m. irreg. emph. X*33 ; 
plur. y*tpin ; emph. KJ&prg and 

X*?33 ; with suff. 7p;33 , ijyta? ; 
a prophet. 
WBhai f. Dec. VIII. a. candlestick. 

*tt3 to flow. 

"1S3 prep, orer against; toward. 



'p'lSjj (found only in the plur. abs.) 

streams, rivers. 
frS/a m. Dec. III. d. brightness, light, 

of the morning. 
Tiai, l^S and I" 1 ?? m . Dec. I. a. 

leader, chief prince. 
3^3 Ithpa. 3'n3nx to be willing; to 

do willingly; to give voluntarily. 

Inf WMSnO as a noun, that which 

is given voluntarily, a free-will-of- 
fering. 
^3*7? m. Dec. I. b. row of stones; 

structure; wall. 
"H3 to/ee. 
■j 1 !? m. Dec. I. a. and with Ti parago- 

gic, iT-fli , sheath ; met. 6orfy, q. d. 

sheath of the soul. 
Tina m. Dec. I. a. ZigTi?. 
!T"pn3 f. Dec. VII. c. illumination, 

wisdom. 
Dins to roar / to bellow ; to groan. 
^Ji? to sAi?ze brightly. Pa. Irt3 to ew- 

lighten. Ithpa. pass. S 
*i?i3 m. Dec. III. a. a stream, 
^i to flee. 
n*ia to res?/ Aphel n^sx to caitse to 

res?, to give rest. 
*>13 f. Dec. VII. c. and 
ibV? f Dec. VII. b. a dunghill. 
yia m. Dec. I. a. a fish. 
"i« m. Dec. I. a. fire. 
pT3 to suffer injury. Aph. pT3-X or 

p?3n to injure. 
12JH3 m. Dec. I. a. brass. 
nrn to descend, go down. Aph. nfix , 

Fut. nn^_ , Imp. nnx , to frrmg- 

down, carry down ; to deposit. 

Hoph. Jnnsn to 6e brought down, 

deposed. 
^iaa m. Dec. I. a. an observer, one 

who keeps (e. g. a law.) 
bw3 to ?*/? wp, elevate. 
^23 to Zreep, preserve; to observe, re- 
gard. 
rirr3 m. Dec. I. a. a sweet odor, 

hence an acceptable sacrifice. 
OD3 , 033 m. Dec. III. b. wealth • 



-in] 



137 



wS-C 



power, strength^ of body or mind. 

PI, rii/us. 

rzi to bite. 

noa in. Dec. III. I>. <t leopard. 

no: to take} to receive. 

no: to take away, remove ; /<> putt 

asunder, [thpe. pass. 
7|CD and Pa. to pour out ; to ojfi r. 

tjc: in. Dir. 111. 1). libation, diink-of- 
fet'ing. 

pes to asa ml. Aph. r^sn to tafa "/'• 

Cattffi tO user, id. I loph. psn |. , . 

of A ph. 
bc3 Km. bsn to fall; to fall down; 
t<> be thrown down; to fall <>»t. hap- 
pen. 

pD3 to go out, to depart; t<> com.: 

forth. 
x^B3 t". Dec. VII. a. expense} cost. 
UE3 or &JD3 c. g. Dec. III. a. ami 
XSE3 f. Dec. VII. a. /j/e; so**/; self; 

a living brims. 
33J3 in. Dec. III. l». a planting; a 

plant. 
X33£3 I! Dec. V\\.*> strength, solidity, 

firmness. 
nx3 to quarrel, contend. Pa. id. 
n:i3 to conquer, surpass, prevail over, 

be superior to. lthpe. Pa. and 

Ithpa. idem. 
b^3 to liberate, deliver. Aph. idem. 
Xp3 and 

■'£3 adj. Dec. IV. b. pure. 
\T£3 to smite, strike. 
X'1'3 to tafce; /o lake away. Ithpa. 

to rise up against, with bs> . 
rui ; 3 to forget ; lthpe. to forget ; to be 

forgotten. . 

■pus irreg. PI. of XfiX . 
Vtiatil f. Dec. VII. a. breath, life. 
iu;3 m. Dec. III. b. an eagle. 
■|"n w*3 m. Dec. I. a. /e/ter, public let- 
ter. Persian. 
*,n3 to give. Gram. § 18. note 2. 
1D3 to /«// off, as leaves or fruit. 

Aph. to shake or strip off. 



K32Q f. (Jr. crafxfivicr}, sambuca, a 
three cornered tringed in- tru- 
uirni. similar '<> the harp. 

bzq to ' /' '/. Poalj to be erecti d. 

~zz to brae, sustain ; to expect, Dan. 

i ; to eons iih r ; to siij>j>'<s> ■ ; 
with 3, fO //"/;/• ///. 

x;o to be numerous; to be increased. 
Aph. to caws6 to im-ieas, ; to mul- 
tiply. 

n;p to fall prostrate, t<> worship, con- 

Btrued with b . 
-■:o mi. Drr. I. a. affliction. 
X n i.p adj. Dec. I. a. much; many. 
■JJkfc in. Dec. III. 1). deputy, governor. 
~;o to *///'/ ///;. 
rP3Bmo f. i. q. Greek (TD^wa, a 

bag-pipe. 
gp'O in. Dec. I. a. an end. 
rpo /o come /o a>i ewdj /o 6e fulfilled, 

spoken of a prediction. Aph. to 

put an end to any thing. 
'nio to recede ; to go aside. 
*,nn!iD m. Dec. I. b. perverseness ; a 

crime. 
r,no to drive out, expel. 
tjd m. Dec. III. b. side ; extremity. 
irrp m. Dec. II. b. the moon. 
vj^O and Jpp m. Dec. I. a. i. q. C)iO . 

end, extremity. 
hzv to understand. Ithpa. ^3nDX to 

look at ; to reflect ; to consider ; 

const, with 3, nib, etc. 
"|3p to try, prove. Ithpa. and Aph. 

idem. 
b:o adj. Dec. II. a. foolish, unwise. 
• ( nbs& or "jnbrro adj. Dec. I. b. intelli- 
gent; prudent. 
pbp or pbp to ascend, go up. Pa. to 

cause to ascend ; to takeaway; to 

destroy. 
Cpbb adj. Dec. I. a. perverse. 
^^0 m. pr. n. Sammael. an evil 

ansrel. sometimes called the anzel 



an? 



138 



^ 



of death, and sometimes, prince of 

(he air. 
T|ED to sustain. Ithpe. passive. 
K:o'to hate. 

nj03D f. Dec. VII. a. haired. 
150 construed with b , to aid, assist. 

Pa. idem. 
ISO m. Dec. III. a. and 
K1S.& or K1S& f. Dec. VIII. a. swp- 

port ; aid; strength. 
ISO ( = Heb. IjDB) to vm£; to in- 
spect. 
ISO and 1E0 m. Dec. II. a scribe ; a 

learned man. The emph. form is 

sometimes written N150 . 
ISO m. Dec. III. b. a book. 
bzno m. Dec. I. a. Plur. wide oriental 

breeches. 
Ip^lp f. Dec. VII. c. vanity j vacuity. 
T|10 m. Dec. II. b. prefect, president. 
ino Pa. ifio to /iicto, to conceal; to 

destroy. Compare the Greek acf>a- 

vi£g), which has both these senses. 



"|X2J and "jS m. Dec. I. a. collective 
noun, (i. q. Heb. )%&)', sheep,flocks. 

125 to make ; to do, perform ; to ex- 
ercise (authority, etc.) ; to till (the 
ground); Ithpe. to be made; to 
take place, happen. Ithpa. idem. 

125 m. Dec. III. a. a servant. 

ni^2S : f. Dec. VII. a. work, labor; 
business. 

">?? to go over ; to transgress. Aph. 
to send over, transmit; to trans- 
gress. 

125 Dec. III. b. that which is beyond. 
^y^.l n ?? : the other side of the Eu- 
phrates. 

IS prep, and conj. to; until. With 
suffixes it takes a plural form. 
Nb"73> while .... not, before, ante- 
quam. 

&n$. or niS to pass away ; with 3 to 
g-o to, cowie upon ; to pass away, be 



abolished, destroyed. Aph. to take 
away ; to depose. 

■"illS m. Dec. I. a. conception. 

"|15 m. pr. n. Eden, (pleasure). 

"vp. c - S- Dec. I. b. time ; a year. 

1315 m. Dec. I. b. labor, work. 

115 adverb, yet, further, moreover. 
Sometimes it is a mere expletive. 

N^ls and K?15 f. pi. ",^5, iniquity, 
perverseness, sin. 

0^5 m. Dec. I. a. a boy ; a young 
man. , 

P>|5 to be straitened, to be in difficulty. 
Aph. p-'SN to molest, be hostile ; to 
constrain. 

115 only Dan. 2 : 35, chaff. In Syr. 
and Ar. idem. 

Itttos m. Dec. II. a. firmness, strength. 

ttp^S f. Dec. VII. a. ring, seal-ring. 

NIT 5 m. pr. n. Ezra. 

KI35 f. Dec. VII. a. counsel, wisdoin, 
\. q. Heb. .125 . 

^2 , 6&" 1 ? . b^sb and b^sbtt adv. and 
prep, above. )"Q b^S zVZem. 

T? c. g. Dec. III. d. ow eye / a foun- 
tain. In the latter sense the plu- 
ral is )):y_ . 

"l*5 Pa. denom. to look at ; to exam- 
ine with care, comp. Eng. to eye. 

i n 5 m. Dec. I. a. watcher, a name of 
angels, or of an order of angels, 
Dan. 4 : 10, 14, 20. 

bs prep, upon; above; concerning; 
besides; before; against; some- 
times for bx, to, toward, etc.— 
1 bs because. 

!*b5 adv. over, above, followed by "pa . 

nbs f. Dec. VIII. a. burnt-offering. 
Plur. ^5 . 

fibs f. Dec. VII. a. occasion; pretext. 

">ibS : and ^5 or %|S , forms of b5 . 

i|s adj. Dec. VI. upper; highest; 
emph. iittbs £/te Mos£ il/g-A. 

•ji^bs m. Dec. I. a. the Most High 
Plur. excel. "p^bs idem. 

ibs f Dec. VII. b. an upper chamber ; 
a lodging chamber. 



n; 



!:;:♦ 



nbE 



bbr to go in. enter i (of the sun) to 
ret Aph. fe?n and bwn to /;/7/>v 
in. Hoph. b»n pa 

cbr in. \hr. II. ;i. and 

cbr m. Dec 111. a. '/// age; eternity} 

the world. bwbjriJ or x^br---; 

/(</■ , ■/•« r, 
--br n,. Dec. VI. PI. N"~br. a// 

Elamite. 
rb? in. I ><t. III. I), i. q. Heb. vb-j. , a 

rib. 
DSP o. g. a people, irreg. Bing. like 

Drc IV. a. plur. l*r^": eniph. 

cr prep, with ; iii. Before Buff, tin' 
D takes Daghesh forte; as iss . 

pia? and p - -" adj. Dec. I. a. deep, 
unsearchable. 

bvs in. Dec. I. a. and b?ar Dec. III. a. 

T t - -: 

lah or. (oil. 
-1732 m. Dec. III. a. i. q. Heb. lES, 
wool. 

n:r /<< answer; to speak in conversa- 
tion, to !» -fin (o speak. 

",:5 in. Dee. I. a. a cloud. 

r:r m. Dec. III. a. a bough, branch. 

'-:". ra. Dec. I. a. mulct, fine. 

r-.-j in. Dee. III. b. time. 

-D> see SlZJS . 

par m. Dec. II. a. or pO? : Dec III. 
b. affair ; business. 

■*£:?. m. Dee. III. with sulf. PPBS, 
branches, foliage. 

nfi3 m. Dee. III. a. to/. 

^XV part. adj. Dec. I. a. troubled, sad. 

S£3? m. Dec. III. a. and b. the heel, 
Heb. 3j2» ; aw ewZ; a reward, Heb. 

Cps /o 6d crooked ; to be perverse. Pa. 

/o make crooked ; ?o pervert. 
~P.~. to root out. pluck up. Ithpe. pass. 
■»j» m. Dec. I. b. sZocA\ roof. 
■>S m. Dec. I. a. enemy. 
""" and Pa. rns to mix. Ithpa. pass. 
*^S m. Dec. I. b. wild ass, onager. 
r;~:; £ Dec. VII. a. nakedness ; hence 

(//feV/o/Jor. 



b--r . Ithpa. bm$PK to to stripped, 
-s':--:* adj. 1 tec. VI. naked. The 

form -b--j-:-. "Nb---". and*l&«nS 

are lew frequent. 
o*ns or ='i- adj. Dec. I. cunning. 
bns and '--:• Dec. 1. a. and -b-:; Dec 

VI. adj. uncircumri8i d. 
:::.::; or -~" m. Dec. III. b. an 

herb ; coll. herbs. 

-•jr f. KltoS in. num. adj. ten. Plur. 

----'" twenty. 
rr" and r-rr to ////*/>/.-. purpose. 
PS in. Drc. I\'. 1). i. q. r:r , time. 
i-r" adj. I tec. I. a. prepared, ready ; 

about to. fat n rus. Prefixed to the 

Inf. it forms a kind of Future 

tense. 
p"rr adj. Dec. I. a. ancient, old. 
in? to be rich. Pa. to enrich. 



■fin , 1$B m. Dec. III. b. a corpse. 

*,nb'B m. Dec. I. b. verbal from nbc , 
service. 

c"E m. Dec. IV. c. the mouth. 

"Hp/iE m. Dec. I. b. a command, pre- 
cept. 

rUTB in. irreg. const. nriB, pi. "JJrjD, 
governor of a province. 

nne m. Dec. III. a. (ins Dan. 2 : 41.) 
a potter. 

EBB m. Dec. III. a. an zmder-gar- 
ment, perhaps breeches. Kethib 
Dan. 3:21. 1B>3E . idem. 

T§ C" 1 ")^ Gen - 3 : 24 > Jer - T -) c - s- 

fruit, irreg. Plur. 'p 1 ?"'E . rYhfi . with 
suff. ^-)Q Prov. 8 : 19. 

aba /o divide. 

abs m. Dec. III. a. half. 

N>53 f. Dec. VII. a. division or c/ass 
of the priests. 

D"nbs m. Dec. I. b. linen; a piece of 
linen. 

nbts to serve; to worship; to culti- 
vate (the ground); to observe or 



na 



140 



Dip 



keep (a law.) Compare in Latin 
colo, which has all these significa- 
tions. 

",nbQ m. Dec. I. b. service, worship 
'of God. 

^ttibs m. Dec. VI. a Philistine. 

pi3S and Pa. pSB to afford delight. 
Ithpa. to enjoy ; to feast upon. 

OS m. Dec. IV. a. and b. a part ; in 
relation to the hand, the palm. 

■vmob and ^n205 m. Dec. I. a. if/aXrrjp, 
the psaltery, a stringed instrument. 
Hengstenberg considers it a kettle- 
shaped instrument ; see his Authen- 
ticity of Daniel, article Greek words. 

XSQ and Pa. n SQ to deliver; to make 
free. 

*i|35) Pa. to command. 

1-lpa m. Dec. I. a. statute, command- 
ment. 

bns m. Dec. II. (Gr. § 32, note 3.) iron. 

rns to flourish ; to blossom. 

S^B to divide. 

ens pr. n. Persia; the Persians. 

■»tna m. Dec. VI. emph. KJCftfi Ke- 
thib. Dan. 6 : 29, a Persian. 

3>na fo render (good or evil to any- 
one); fo reward. Ithpe. idem; to 
tafre vengeance. 

pnB Zo redeem, liberate; hence Dan. 
4 : 24. to expiate, or perhaps rather 
fo dismiss. 

t!yz to divide; to distinguish. Pa. 
Part. pass, tthfto Ez. 4:18, dis- 
tinctly. 

W.m m. Dec. III. a. copy. 

EtfJQ fo extend, reach out. 

"ids to interpret, explain. Pa. ic?e?72. 

ilBB m. Dec. I'll. b. interpretation, 
explanation. 

33P5 m. Dec. I. b. delicacies, richfood. 

cans m. Dec. I. a. word; edict; letter; 
thing, matter, like the Heb. *cn . 

nns to enlarge, extend. 

nns Zo open. Ithpeel and Ithpaal, 
pass. 

TS m. Dec. I. a. breadth, width. 



&OS to be willing ; to acquiesce. 

nixas (Hebrew) armies, retained in 
Chaldee after w; and iJlfa* . 

toS f. Dec. V11I. c. desire ; affair. 

3?3S to weif, moisten. Ithpa. 3>a z::j&< pass. 

IS m. Dec. IV. b. side. — TZV on the 
part of. — isb against. 

SOS only Dan. 3 : 14. tfiST] is z7 z/owr 
purpose ? or was tZ yowr design ? 

pi'ns adj. or sub. masc. Dec. I. a. 
righteous ; a righteous man. 

Xjs'iS f. Dec. VII. a. justice, righteous- 
ness ; alms-giving. 

i^S m. Dec. II. a. (K in otio,) the neck. 

nbs , ^bs Pa. to pray, supplicate, in- 
voke. 

nbx to prosper. Aph. J"ibs«i to make 
prosperous, promote (a person) ; to 
execute prosperously ; also intrans. 
to prosper, be successful ; to be pro- 
moted. 

obs and tabs m. Dec. III. a. an 
image, idol ; form, appearance. 

riES to sprout, germinate. Aph. to 
cause to sprout, to bring forth. 

nss in. Dec. III. a. grief. 

"PSS m. Dec. I. a. a he-goat. 

"ids c. g. Dec. II. a. a bird; a sparrow. 

Tj"nS r or Tp^S adj. Dec. I. a. needy } 
construed with b , in need of. 



bsp and Pa. to receive, accept ; like 
Sj'aia, to listen to, comply with. 
Ithpa. pass. 

bag and bnp prep, before; over 
against, opposite; because of With 
suff. nbnp , Tjbaj? , etc.— bagb idem. 

— b^ip-bs because of; conj. because; 
therefore ; as. 

U^p adj. Dec. I. a. holy; as a noun, 
saint; holy being, applied to an- 
gels. 

D'lp m. Dec. III. a. that which is be- 



bp 



111 



fore; former time, beginning ; the 
east, i" -^r'-- • (see jD) formerly; 
in front; toward the mst. on the 
east aide. 
Dtp and D"ip prep. l>'foi'\ in relation 
i.i place, cm-am f in relation t<> 
time, ante. It takes Buffixes like 

plural nouns ; c. g. "~7P : , " l 'T^"]~. • 

— is? D*i£ antequam. — DiJ^ ","2 often 
i. q. ■)« ; sometimes i. 4. ~"j~. 
simply. 

rnnp 1: Dec VII. a. origin^ anti- 
quity. r~-rp W prep, before. 
«ia*ig f. Dec VII. c. antiquity; meet' 

in 'j, com im r together^ occursus. 

ia"j|2 adj. Dec. Yl. first. 

U^p Pa. to sanctify, consecrate, set 
apart. 

Vi^p m, Dec. II. a. holiness, sacred- 
ness. 

Dip Put -^p" 1 to /7.s-c lip, to stand Pa. 
Djp to establish ; to confirm by an 
oath; to swear; to sustain. Aph. 
C^px and D^gn, Fut. D^p 1 ] and 
D^grV . Part. D^pHD , to set up. e. g. 
a Btatue, an image; to appoint, 
e. g. a governor. Hoph. E^n , 
n^pn , or with the form of Aphel, 
crpri Dan. 7:4, to stand. 

•J3"i!ip m. Dec. I. b. offering, oblation; 
sacrifice, victim. 

b'jp to kill. Pa. idem, in reference 
to the destruction of many. So in 
Syriac. Ithpe. and Ithpa. pass. 

IWp m. Dec. III. b. knot ; joint ; dif- 
ficult problem. 

D"ip (i. q. Heb. j^p) m. Dec. III. d. 
summer. 

D^p m. Dec. I. a. a covenant; an 
edict, decree. 

D*p adj. Dec. I. a. established, firm. 

•pp ra. pr. n. Cain. 

ennip Kethib Dan. 3 : 5, 7, etc.. i. q. 
Gr. KL^api<i, a harp. The pointing 
is that of Oiinp , q. v. 

bp T m. Dec. I. a. voice. PI. "pb;? thun- 
ders; m fe% voices. 



fetfcg adj. 1 )•■«-. I. a. light; quick, 
adv. a little. 

•nWg aii'l •"-r '"• Dec. I- a. a rird/r, 

a belt. 
■Jg in. 1 ><■<•. I\'. 1.. a m st. a hive. 

x:p to but/, purchase , 
■j-:p in. !)»■<•. I. b, acquisition; pot* 
ei ssion, substance. 

qxp to 06 anL'nj. to be in a rage. 
r-j~ m. Dec. III. (///-o. //77//A. 

VSp to r/// o//'. amputate ; to A'/'//. 

Ithpe. ps 
rsp E Dec. I. b. a part ; on >//'/. 
»np to co// ; to read. 

3"3pj -jk and Pa. -~p to approach; 

in touch, construed with 3 . s, etc. 

to ortng-, to ^//ir. Ithpe. to cleave 

to. Aph. to brim r near; to offer. 
iip in. Dec. I. a. war, contest. 
•np a c%, irreg. Emph. »?■}£, xn*}p. 

Rrvnp, x;np and xn-^p ; plur. 

VTFP.i VT'P ail(1 "iTPPt emph. 

yyp ; i" ( I TIP. E D ec - HI- a - a torn* 
Plur. r^P, "|3~P and. with Dual 
form. T:?"}P . 

V'np m. Dec III. a. r/ piece, fragment. 

oiep m. irreg. emph. KDOTp truth. 
— xa^pa indeed ; interrog. in- 
deed? — DittJp "jo truly, certainly. 

n*j|5 emph. xnirp Dec. III. a. a boxc ; 
the rain-bow. 

Oiinp(Kerifor0^rnp.Dan. 3: 5, etc. 
The analogy of the Greek xi'.^apis 
would lead us to point the latter 
onrv«p . The Targums have Dfirig 
which appears to be the less an- 
cient form.) m. Dec. I. a. a harp. 



L ; X^ and ttJ^ m. Dec. I. a. head; sum 
amount. Plur. T'ijsn, "-"?• anJ 
once ytifi?! Ez. 5 : 10. chiefs, prin- 
cipal men. 

Z"\ m. Dec. IV. a. plur. 'pIpD'l Dec. 
II. a. a prince ; as an adj. great ; 



»sn 



142 



3125 



plur. proud, arrogant (speeches, or 
actions.) 

non to be great or numerous. Pa. " , 2'n 
and Aph. isnx to exalt, set in an 
eminent station; to increase; to 
bring forth abundantly. Ithpe. and 
Ithpa. to be exalted, to be elevated. 

son f. Dec. VIII. c. greatness. 

ian and xian num. adj. ten thousand. 
a myriad. Plur. i*ian and "j33n . 

•j'iS'n m. Dec. I. a. lord, master. 

ftpon num. adj. Dec. VI. fern. RJSW 
fourth. 

■pnnn m. Dec. I. a. a nobleman, prince. 

Ran to desire, long for. Pa. rctom. 

Tin to 6e moved, excited; to be angry. 
Aph. to excite to anger. 

van m. Dec. III. b. anger. 

bj"} and bin c. g. Dec. III. a. a foot. 
Dual and plural "phn . 

£3 Ip. to 6e tumultuous. Ithpe. and 
Ithpa. idem; to rage; to roar. 
Aph. to rage ; to collect together in 
a rage or with tumult. 

1^1 m. Dec. I. a. aspect, appearance. 

Tjj'h m. Dec. III. e. anger. 

Hn c. g. Dec. I. a. tcrnd ; spirit. 

Gin to 6e Aig-A / to 6e exalted. Palp. 
Bain to e.raZZ, praise. Aph. to Zr/Y 
«p. Ithpal. to It/i m/> orce's se//! 

Din m. Dec. I. a. height. 

n m. Dec. I. a. a secret. 

p^rn adj. Dec. I. a. distant, remote. 

QTn and Pael onn, to pi'fy, compas- 
sionate ; to love. 

raJfTi f. Dec. VIII. c. toi?e ; affection, 
friendship. 

"pE-rn (found only in the plural) m. 
Dec. III. a. mercy, compassion. 

rnn to trust in. Ithpe. construed 
with bs , idem. 

b^on adj. Dec. I. a. serc£ away; de- 
serted. 

rpn m. Dec. I. a. scent, smell. 

tthn . see ban . 

on adj. Dec. I. a. high. 

8«n and nan to Z&row, cast; to set, 



place; to impose (a tax). Ithpe. 
to be cast. 

Ton to ?0m/c significantly ; to beckon. 

?»n adj. Dec. V. b. and Dec. VI. de- 
ceitful. 

"n and Pa. to sing for joy ; to speak 
joyfully. 

ran f. Dec. VIII. c. and 

sosn f. Dec. VIII. a. pleasure, will; 
benevolence ; delight. 

"iT 1 ^"^ m. Dec. I. a. a thought. 

■J32n adj. only Dan. 4 : 1, [4 : i]flour- 
ishing. 

3>Sn and Pa. S3*3 to 6rea& «i pieces. 

osn to trample upon, tread in pieces. 

IliJn f. Dec. VIII. c. permission ; lib- 
erty ; power. 

S^TEn adj. Dec. I. a. wicked. 

edn to note, write down ; to write. 

SlZjn m. Dec. III. b. and Wti~\ f. Dec. 

VII. c. wickedness. \ 

xn^nn f. Dec. VII. a. verbal from 
nnn , trembling. 

TS 

nb m. Dec. I. a. aw eZrfer, a ?w<2n 0/ 

grey tars. 
K=2b, i. q. K330, q. v. 
xab , i. q. KiO , to be or become great. 
K'lJiiB adj. Dec. I. a. great; much, 

many ; adv. very, exceedingly. 
Gib to se£, ptoce ; to appoint ; to issue 

(a decree) ; oso 01b to show respect; 

ob clb to g-iue a name, to name. 
nob m. Dec. III. b. i. q. "100 , side. 

Only Dan. 7 : 5, Keri. 
bsb Aph. b3bs* to understand; to be 

wise. Ithpa. const, with 3 , to con- 
sider. 
isnbsb f. Dec. VII. c. intelligence, 

understanding. 
5»b i. q. S30 to /mte. (In Chaldee 

it is generally written with 0.) 

Part. Nib an enemy. 
nrb m. Dec. III. a. hair. 
nsb f. Dec. VIII. a. (PI. ftst? Dec. 

VIII. c.) a lip. 



nic 



1 1:; 



- 



C 



b»ttS, bxr or b"r to ask. seek. />•- 
quest i with 2 of the thing asked, 
or with two accusatives ; to in- 
quire, uiih Jj dI" the person. 

xbxr i: \)rr. VII. a. request; affair, 
concern, matter. 

^xz [thpe. i«BW« ami Ithpa. 1XPWK 
to l»' I' ft. to remain. 

-xii; in. Dvr. I. I), the rest, remainder. 

I. aw in. Dec IV. a. ///>' sabbath. 

II. ad (contracted from 3Dt{) num. 
adj. seven. 

Tin3\ZJ in. Dec. I. a. glory, honor. 
nrj Pa. to praise; to sing praises. 

simply to sing. 
oati in. Dec III. b. a tribe. 
S^aiO in. Dec. I. a. aflame. 
b^rr in. Dec I. a. way, path. 
^attj ord. adj. Dec. VI. seventh. 
sad num. adj. seven. See Par. XI. 

in the Grain. 
pad to forsake; simply to leave. 

(thpe. pass. 
ttSatfJ Pa. to terrify. Ithpa. pass. 
n;iD /o err. Aph. to entice to sin. 
bit f. pi. 'jVsffi and jbattj . ir//e of a 

king; hence queen, Ps. 4-5: 10. 
b«jttj Pa. to persuade; to entice. 
SHftj Ithpa. to eanert one's se{£ 
■«}!B Pael. fo set. place. Ithpa. fo ta 

made, to become. 
■jt&Nfl m. Dec. Lb. authority, dominion. 
D1& i. q. DttJ . 

iBid m. Dec. II. a. beauty. Plur. id. 
*toW in. Dec. I. a. a wall. 
■paiSittJ m. Dec. I. a. a friend ; a 

companion. 
ftOMIgW m . pi. inhabitants of Susa, 

the winter residence of the Per- 
sian kings. 
3P85 and VV& to free, deliver. See 

Gram. § 14. 2. note. 
n^nr adj. Dec. I. a. corrupt, wicked; 

as a noun wickedness, crime. 



nsA to discover; to a/tain, acquire, 
Aph. ia\ ni. [thpe. to be found. 

jaw to dwell, rest. Pa. "-- to 
to dwell. Hence 

x:-- i: Dec, vn. a. dwelling^ pre- 
sence ; llo'tliriih' prrsrur, and L r lo- 
ry as it appeared in the tabernacle. 

nVr to be secure^ safe. 

nbui f. Dec. VII. a. 'and 

^ba) f. Dec. VII. c something amiss, 

an trior, fault ; a failure. 

~f~- f Dec. VII. a. rest, tranquillity. 

nVjj to send away; to put off; to 
Stretch out (the hand j. Pa. and 
Aph. idem. Ithpe. to be deprived. 

I. ab'ij and DboJ to rafe, to //'/r< power, 
construed with 3 or hv . Aph. to 
cause /a r«/e. fo gtse dominion. 

II. abiD const, with 3, to fall upon. 
attack. 

■ptabttj m. Dec. I. a. 7//A/'. governor. 

",ablb m. Dec. I. b. might, power ; do- 
minion. 

I^bir adj. Dec. I. a. power/til, having 
power, const, with a over any thing; 
const, with b and an Inf. p< rmiM '/. 
lawfid; as a noun, a powerful 
man, rider, officer. 

zhv to complete. Aph. to finish, bring 
to an end; to restore, give bark. 

oblli m. Dec. I. a. /x'ace. prosperity. 

rl-z'r^ m. pr. n. Solomon. 

rbxoiti f irreg. plur. ybttjbw . ibtfjjtfj . 
"V-.V~ and "brbw ; ; a chain. 

Dlti . DID and Dti m'. irreg. emph. xyi" ; 
with suff. wad , ■pntttti ; plur, 
jnotti, const, rn^r. etc. a 7*«w. 

D'lJ m. pr. n. Shem. 

1»E Aph. /o destroy. 

'jrraV names, pi. of C13 q. v. 

»?a» Plur. emph. heaven, the heav- 
ens. The sing, and the absol. 
plur. are wanting ; const. "TOBJ . 

DS1» Ithpolel Ewncix to 6e aston- 
ished, amazed. 

■pati, KpatD (see Gr. § 31. note 2.) 
adj./a£. r?c/Y. 



*nta 



iu 



nnn 



5>aia to hear ; to obey. Ithpe. to &e 
heard ; to show one's self obedient, 
to be obedient or submissive. 

yj'nattj i. q. Heb. ThnilS , Samaria. 

^^^ c. g. Dec. III. b. the sun. 

Iliaia to serue ; to minister, as a priest, 
etc. 

"piaaia m. pr. n. Samson. 

"jti c. g. Dec. IV. b. a tooth. The 
dual form "pSia is used for the plu- 
ral. So in Hebrew o^Sia . 

Mia Put. Tseri, to be changed, altered; 
to be different. Pa. to change ; to 
violate, transgress ; pass. Part, di- 
verse, different. Ithpa. to change; 
intrans. to be altered. Aph. i. q. 
Pael. 

I. Mia f. Dec. VIII. a. sleep. 

II. Mia and niia f. irreg. const. KfSJ ; 
emph. KfittS ; plur. "paia ; a year ; 
collectively in the singular, years. 

•pStti adj. Dec. I. a. fem. &*5i?u5 Dec. 

VII. a. sharp. 
"3ia m. Dec. I. b. eeZg-e; powtf. 
fifsto f. irreg. emph. M^;ia and KftSOi ; 

plur. "p9tt| ; arc Aowr ; a moment, 

any short period of time. 
nsia Ithpa. n ?niax to narrate, tell; 

to enumerate; to speak. 
ttSVD m. Dec. II. a. a judge. 
•nsta or spBlB f. Dec. VII. c. bruising, 

trampling under foot; perhaps 

Gen. 3 : 15, Pseudo-Jon. and Jer. 

Targ. safety, deliverance; or rem- 
edy. 
bsili Aph. to bring down, humble ; to 

oppress, subdue. 
bsia adj. Dec. III. low. 
"isiti to be fair ; to be agreeable. 
pttj adj. Dec. I. a. leg. 
^isnsia m. Dec. I. a. dawn of the 

morning. 

I. &nia , tnia and rnia , to dwell ; to 
slop, rest. Aph. to cause to dwell 
or remain. 

II. Miia and nnti to loosen; Part. 
"l^ia toose, aZ liberty; to solve, ex- 



plain. Pa. idem; also to begin. 

Ithpa. to 6e loosed, spoken of the 

joints, to become powerless. 
tiKia m. Dec. III. e. a root. 
sip'lia f. Dec. VII. c. and 
ittjitii f Dec. VII. b. eradication; 

met. banishment. 
nia and niD num. adj. Dec. IV. b. six. 

PI. Tnia s?:^i/. 

fitnilj and nnia to drink. Construed 
with a denoting the vessel out of 
which any one drinks. 

bnia to found, establish, confirm. 
Aph el idem. 

pnia to be silent, keep silence. 



Ma^P], defectively written; see 

M^xPi f. Dec. VII. a. (PI. f^KR e.g. 

Dec. I.) a fig-tree ; a fig. 
THin part. adj. Dec. I. a. fragile, 

weak, easy to be broken. 
"Din to break, to break in pieces. Pa. 

idm. Ithpe. and Ithpa. pass, 
■fifi m. Dec. III. b. and 
Miiin f. Dec. VII. a. contention, strife. 
MT"Hn fem. Dec. VII. a. revolving in 

a circle ; hence, continuance. — 

fctl^ro constantly, continually. 
3*iFl to return ; to turn away, to avert. 

Aph. to return (act.), to restore. 
JTiFi to be astonished ; to be terrified, 

to tremble for fear. 
M&in f Dec. VIII. a. a generation ; 

a nation, tribe. 
KBpp^in f. emph. ar)Bj5C*lFl , cause, oc- 
casion. 
&]psitl m. Dec. II. a. strength, might. 
Tin, i. q. Heb. TiaJ, m. Dec. I. a. an 

ox. 
xnail^n f. Dec. VIII. a. praise; a 

song of praise ; any song. 
ninn prep, under. It takes the suf 1 

fixes of plural nouns. 
nnn idem. 



n3n 



145 



;nn 



xn-x-n t'. Dec. VII. a. desire^ <n>j»- 

'titr. 

-,=n Aph. pnx to prepare. 

;bn m. Dec. HI. a. i. q. rich. :^. 

.s'//n;r. 

b^-n adj. Dec. La. elevated; forti- 
fied. 

nbn l*. (raasc. nrbn, const, m. nnsn, 
f. ™^)j num. adj. three. Plur. 
ynbn. /////•///. 

•*mbn adj. Dec. VI. third. Once 
written ^nbn Dan. 5 :7. 

Cn (i. q. Ilrb. D«})j n»tn, and )1BM 
adv. ///ere; thither. ' cna , }»M 
f/te;*ce. 

nan m. Dec. III. b. a wonder, a 
miracle. 

WBPl f. Dec. VII. c. perfection; in- 
tegrity. 

nj^n or nsiari C pr. n. of a city of the 
Philistines, Timnath. 

wSjn plur. "pan i. q. X3\xn , etc. q. v. 

yan num. adj. Dec. I. b. second. 

ni3^3Pi adv. a second time, again. 

x^nsn m. pi. Dan. 3:2, 3, prob. 
judges or lawyers, jurisconsulti. 

(Ar. -£i| to give counsel, to pass 

sentence j hence mufti.) 



Cj'ipn rn. Dec I. a. strength ,• vehe- 
mence. 

"p-n adj. !><:(;. I. a. right ; fit, COM* - 

n'u.nt ■ firm. 

tppjft adj. Dec I. a. strong, mighty. 
bpj\ (i. ([. Heb. b-'L'j to weigh. P 

Praet to &e weighed. 
"il^n Pa. to adapt) arrange ; to />/> - 

pure; to establish. Aph. /'A///. 

Hoph. Jo be reestablished, restored. 
■jjrn adj. Dec. II. a. i. q. f^n.. 
t)M to if/'xr. as a tree ; to become 

strong, powerful. Pa. to confirm. 

establish. 
q'pn and rijrn m. Dec. I. a. power, au- 
thority. 
Cjj^n to explain, interpret. Part. 

pass, ca^na interpreted. 
"p^n num. adj. toco; 6oto,. See 

(Gram. Par. XI. and § 42. 1. a. 

note. 
-i02-"nn num. adj. twelve. 
Tpn and Pa. "^"in to expel, drive out. 
Sin and Pa. snn to break asunder ; 

to destroy. 
2nn m. Dec. III. a. and b. ttoor ; 

— xsba 3?npi i/te king's palace. 
S'Hn m. Dec. I. a. porter, watchman 

at a gate. 



10 



APPENDIX. 



A. The Rabbinic Dialect. 



§ 1. This dialect is so called from the principal writers who have em- 
ployed it, viz. the Jewish Rabbins. Their most important writings have 
generally had respect, either to the Hebrew language, the Scriptures of 
the Old Testament, or to the traditions which constitute the Oral Law, 
and which the Jews regard as of equal authority with the Scriptures. 
These writings have been composed in various ages, chiefly since the 
eleventh century of the Christian era. Among the most valuable of them 
are the commentaries of Solomon Jarchi, Aben Ezra and David Kimchi, 
which are published, with others, in the Hebrew Rabbinic Bibles of Bom- 
berg and Buxtorf. That of Solomon Jarchi is extant also in a Latin 
translation published by J. P. Breithaupt, (Gotha 1713, 3 vols, small 4to.) 

For a general account of Rabbinic writers, see Bartolocci's Bibliotheca 
Rabbinica, Wolf's Bibliotheca Hebraea, Vols. I. and III., and the " Vitae 
Celebrium Rabbinorum " in Reland's Analecta Rabbinica. 

§ 2. The Rabbinic resembles the ancient Hebrew more nearly than it 
does the Chaldee, although Chaldee forms are by no means rare. The 
following are the principal points, in respect to which it varies from both 
Hebrew and Chaldee. 

1. Form of the letters. These may be characterized as a sort of He- 
brew running hand. They are the following : 



Hebrew. 
K 

3 

1 

n 

1 

T 

n 



Rabbinic. 

i 



mi; RABBINIC DIALECT. 1 IT 

8, Vowels, The Rabbinic is entirely destitute of vowel-marks, with ihe 
exception of a few books which have been pointed for the convenience of 
learners. (Cellarius Inst. Rab. 1. 1.) Whatvowel are to be supplied in 
reading, musl be determined by a knowledge of forms, and by the 
in each particular case. Where however ambiguity would otherwi i 
ist, the letters f> , <\ uii.l ■ are frequently inserted ; f> in Buch cases indicating 
the a sound (Qamets or Pattahh), i the o or w sound (Hholem, Shureq, 
Qjbbuts or Qamets Hhatuph), and » tin; e or i sound (Tseri, Seghol or 

IJhireq.) 

:?. Tlu: construct slate of nouns often appears instead of the abso- 
lute. 

I. The prefixes 7 (Chaldee) and c (Hebrew, lor ->cf>) arc employed 
almost indiscriminately. 

5. The conjugation Piel is distinguished, by the insertion of Yodh be- 
tween the first and second radicals; e.g. -53'7 (*=12Ej)j Hophaly by the 
insertion ofVav after the preformative He; e. g. ^rnt) (=* , ?| r 3 or "?!'?)■ 
Compare No. 2. above. 

6. From Niphal and Hithpael a new conjugation is formed in Rabbinic, 
called Nithpael, sometimes reflexive^ but generally passive in signification. 
It is distinguished, in the Praeter. by the formative prefix p; ; elsewhere, 
it docs not differ inform from Hithpael. 

7. Many irords occur in Rabbinic, which are not found in Hebrew or 
Chaldee. They are, for the most part, theological or philosophical terms, 
and are not unfrequcntly borrowed from foreign languages, especially the 
Greek ; e. g. ip>p , i. q. cyq^dov. 

8. Abbreviations abound. These are fully explained by Buxtorf in his 
treatise, De Abbre via tun's Hebraicis. Compare also Wolf's Bibliotheca 
Hebraea Vol. IV. p. 251. 

For the means of obtaining a complete acquaintance with the Rabbi- 
nic, the reader is referred to 

Reland's Analecta Rabbinica, particularly the first two works in that 
collection, viz. Genebrard's Isagoge Rabbinica and Cellarius' Institutio 
Rabbinismi. 

Danzius' Rabbinismus Enucleatus. 

Opitius' Chaldaismus. 

Otho's Institutiones Linguarum Orientalium. 

Tychsen's Elementa Dialecti Rabbinicae. 

Buxtorf's Lexicon Chaldaico-Talmudico-Rabbinicum. 

§ 3. The commentary of R. David Kimchi on Joel 3: 1. 2. (Eng. Ver. 



148 APPENDIX. 



2 : 28, 29), may serve as a specimen of this dialect. The words of the 
prophet are 

D3TJJ3T B^nas'i oarja warn -iba-ba-bs* ^srn-ptf '■pBiris ^-'^fta rrni 
COMMENTARY. 

■5Pfc »sl p npf> "?ppi / ['3 t)?^3 t)?i>>b r^r^ p>pi ips ■ p npf> o?«ji 

IpPPpI 131CP 713? »3 t5P^C P3?'7' f>il H37p.Op3? "3PP ' '3P ip"?C' 3"5p3 '3 6pj3?7 s 1 

pipi 713? ipvpp pii P*>ic P3?>7' »pip w?7pe jw fa' P3?'7'p pfa npf> bp »3?>3 
is J>33 'pn -prcf> : [> pw] pfp> pf> P3?7 pf>p ppip »d *3Pf>3C p'crp pir'i 

P7pP pip P"P >33?3 333 13»p1 ">C3 i3 "?PP P1p1>3 Wto 1J?3 ip-?C'3 CnT • "5C3 
P3P 13*53 p ' [ip p'3?C>] *?£3 b f>3' ' [p"^ P'ip] ^3 j? *p3'1 IVlfa ■ 1733 

• d'3»|>pi p'injp 'i'*? is "5Ppi • bp»5j3 C7ipp pn prpi p»ifnp iinc' is? -3C3 33 
P3?7 pn p'P *pm . [p"i '>m'] pirn 73?1 p:ppri tip i3?7' pin >3 -jppc ipd 
Pis? pn P3'31 PP3p pn ''r 3"pp* 'p pn via? pp:i [p"' pw] *?ppc h>3 i3CPi 

' 1P3:p't 73? *3137P P3 Pp2"?P3 *33JP pi3C *p7*»C ?3$P1 " PIP' ppTI p3?7 pn P"313J1 
*3E3 33 h} *3Pp pnp PISTCSI * 03'p1331 P3'33 1P331 pip lf>3:p' pi.13 >3 *?Pp f>i '2 
pil3 pi P3"51P3 P3';p? *3T>Pl " P3'P1331 05*33 1P301 pip 35 *31>P f>3 PP1333 33P 
PP133P P7pi P13P P3 '3 S*l J1P"? ]3 PEP '3*3 3*5P il7JP P3pP 3p3t *p7 33? PlPl 
1P33P> P133P1 6»33P1 * Pri'P P3?3 33313 li P7p ^3 tP pip pHrip P3? ''Ppl 
•P131MP pIPlip -5PPC 1^3 Plipp PP-5P3 Ppi P'PP PP13:P1 P'3:P iplPC 1P3 Pp1"53?33 
rip PP*?P3 P P3P'33 P'P^ Pp [3'' -537^3] "3PPC 1P3 ' P'P'3;P 3T3 PP13: Pp^P pi 
73? 1")33?C P'P'333 VPt 1P3 PtP pi3?pi Pt pli3?P PP3 VP' pi " 13 Wp Plip3 T71pP 
pn3?3P 'IP* P7PP P13C3 "?CP pli3?P 'j "53! P3P1 p"3? ^^"J PCP3 PP3 P'P' 'ilpC 
133*51 C*31 17P3?1 [p'p '^C'J *3PpC 1P3 ' P'7:3?P i3? PJ1 *p13ptP 'P'l P17P3P 'P'l 
lp"5C' PP 1733?'1 ip-JC pP3 17P3?'C »53 PpIP PJ1 P3'P"?131 P3n3p *)33 '331 P33p5 

r33?3 sni pn pp3 P'Ppc Yi vw pyytt j"33?i * istPi P3?7 pn ppi p'pp 

* C»313pp1 jP PI"? Pitn' 3CV i3?1 717 p'3 33? 'P3!:t1 "3PP p * PSTCP 

Translation of the Commentary. 
"iP-'nnN n'-ni . as if he had said b^JSi n^nqxa h^ij , (Isa. 2 : 2.) And 
it shall come to pass wz ^Ae last days. He employs the expression ^"'"'nrix , 
after this, because he had said, " And ye shall know that I am in the midst 
of Israel." His meaning was, 2 Ye shall know now, but not with a perfect 
knowledge; for, as yet, ye continue to sin 3 before me. But after this 
knowledge, the time will come when ye shall know me with a perfect 
knowledge, and shall no longer sin, viz. in the days of the Messiah, when 
it is written 4 that the earth shall be full of the knowledge of the Lord. 
(Isa. 11:9.) 



THE RABBINIC DIAL! OT. * 149 



"I will pouroul mj Spirit upon all fie a." The meanii / 

/,/</ « as it is written' in other plac< '<, when the i 

Dot relate to all beings thai possess life, I"" to man alone, vrit- 

ten,° "Let all flesh bless, etc." (Pa 145:21,) and, "All flesh shall come, 
etc." (Isa. 66:23.) So, in a restricted sense, here, "all flesh' 1 

Israelites fit to receive tin; Holy Spirit. 

■■ All," that is. rt greai andamaUj as it is written.-' " For they shall all 

know me, from the least of them, nnto the greatest of them." (Jer. 31 : 34.) 

"My Spirit," that is, the spirit of knowledge and wisdom; as it is writ- 
ten, ( Isa. LI : 2,) " The Spirit of 1 1 1 *- Lord 7 shall rest upon him.*' and the 
prophet goes on to explain." •• the spirit of wisdom and understanding, the 
spirit of counsel and might, the spirit of knowledge and of the fear of the 
Lord." 

After their understanding shall have been purified, the power of speech 
in some 6f them shall he increased until they shall prophesy. For he 
not, '"They shall all prophesy," but, " Your sons and your daugh- 
ters shall prophesy." In respect to the effusion of the Spirit, he says, 
•• upon all flesh;" but in regard to prophecy, he says, not all, but, ' ; And 
your .s-o;?.s' and your daughters shall prophesy." So he say.-,. •• your old men 
and your young men." not all of them. And this accords with the man- 
ner in which that wise and great man. It. Moses Ben-Maimon. of blessed 
memory, 9 wrote. " The gift of prophecy (he says) is not conferred upon 
a man, even 10 with instruction, unless nature prepared it for him at the 
time of his birth." 

The sons and the daughters shall prophesy in their youth, like Samuel 
the prophet. And the prophetic revelations shall be given to them in 
seeing dreams ; as he says, " dreams, visions." And such was the prophe- 
sying of most of the prophets; as it is written, 6 (Num. 12: 6.) '"If there be 
a prophet among you. I, the Lord, will make myself known to him in a 
vision, and will speak unto him in a dream." So also there shall be de- 
grees among them, one more exalted than another, as there were among 
the prophets who have passed ; until perhaps there will be among them 
one equal to Moses our master, (peace be upon him.) 11 And observe, he 
mentions three degiees which [correspond] to the ages of man, childhood, 
youth, and old age. 

,; Also upon the servants ;" as it is written, 6 (Isa. 61 : 5.) "And stran- 
gers shall stand and feed your flocks, and the sons of the alien shall be 
your ploughmen and your vine-dressers." And even upon them, because 
they dwell in the land of Israel and serve Israel, shall be the spirit of 
knowledge and understanding. 



150 ' APPENDIX. 



The expression 'pouring out of the Spirit, is equivalent to saying, "The 
Spirit shall be upon them abundantly," [so as to be] like a literal pouring 
out. Thus it is written, 5 (Zech. 12 : 10), " And I will pour upon the house 
of David, and upon the inhabitants of Jerusalem, the spirit of grace and of 
supplications." 

Notes. 

1 Verse 27. 2 Lit. he said, ■jpf* is used with very great latitude. See 
below, note 4. 3 Lit. ye return and sin. i ivfcl, lit. concerning 

which it is said, t is instead of -)%{) . 5 Compare the preceding note. 

6 'iS, an abbreviation for "jpii t)5V5, that is to say. 7 '©, abbreviation 

of opt) j the name. i. e. Jehovah. 8 Abbreviations. Fully written they 

would read tTt> 7D "5P^1 . *p is a Rabbinic particle, equivalent to the He- 
brew *S . tyt> is Piel (=Tl"ia), comp. § 2. 5. 9 'Yl , abbreviation of 
S^si W32N 10 'pfaj abbreviation for ij>jjfa, which is contracted of the 
two particles iJ>f> of>, even if. "'t/'a?, i- e. OlitD vh$- So the Mo- 
hammedans say whenever they repeat the name of their prophet. 



To the above outline, which was prepared for the first edition of this work, 
it gives me pleasure to add here that the student may obtain a good idea of 
the Eabbinical writers and their works from a volume by the Rev. Prof. 
Samuel H. Turner, D. D., entitled " Biographical Notices of some of the most 
distinguished Jewish Babbies, and Translations of portions of their Commen- 
taries, &c." New York, 1847 ; 12mo, pp. 245. 



Tin; samakitan DIALECT. 151 



B. Tin. S vmakitan DlALl 

; i. The Samaritan, 1 i u « - the Rabbinic, holdi ;< place between Hebrew 
and Chaldee. See above, Intr. 2. note 2. A brief view of if will there- 
fore be appropriate in tin's Appendix. 

§2. Its characters are those which, among all the oriental alphabets, 
m osl nearly resemble the letters found <>n ancient Hebrew coins ; and hence 
we may infer were essentially the Bame with the. Hebrew letters before 
the Babylonish captivity. Sec above, Gram. 5 I. They arc as folio 



A 


X 




v= 


■J 


s 


n 




(71 


1 


1 


y 




% 


3 


T 


i 




1 


3 


3f 


n 




*U 


•a 


V 


n 


r) 


)3 


3 


* 


T 




t* 





H 


n 




V 


V 



J 


D 


m 


B 


V 


? 


'} 


1 


jum. 


12; 


\ 


n 



The Samaritan lias no peculiar forms for final letters,, nor does i; 
liibit any vowel points. 

h 3. The following are the principal grammatical peculiarities of this 
dialect. 

1. Nouns have, as in Chaldee and Syriac. an Emphatic State, but em- 
ploy =J instead of A in forming its termination. 

2. Masculine nouns usually form the plural, as in Hebrew, by the ter- 
mination ^yril 5 although plurals ending in Jffi are also found. Femi- 
nines form their plurals, like the Chaldee, in an, but written J A with A 
as a mater lectionis. 

3. The personal pronouns, both separate and suffixed, nearly all agree 
with the Hebrew ; the demonstrative and relative with the Chaldee. 

4. The conjugations of verbs are the same as in Chaldee. and the in- 
flection almost the same throughout. 

5. Vav conversive is not found. 

6. Their punctuation is peculiar. A single dot (*\ is placed after 

*This form of the letter Nun, which appears in some alphabets, seems to have 
been invented by the type-founders to get rid of the close resemblance between 
Nun and Pe. It is not sustained by MSS. or old editions. See Walton, Castell, 
Cellavius, &C. passim. The forms of Pe and Nun are confounded in the Samaritan 
alphabets given in several of our Hebrew grammars. 



152 



APPENDIX. 



every word ; two dots placed horizontally (**\ are sometimes employed 
for a colon; and two placed perpendicularly (t) or three (<) with 
or without additional lines, (_ ♦♦) or (— .♦) or (— <♦) f or a period. 

§ 4. The first five verses of Genesis, taken from the Samaritan version 
of the Pentateuch, may serve as a specimen of this dialect. As it is with- 
out points I will place the pronunciation in Chaldee letters at the right. 



Samaritan Text. 

* S^Zf ' ^TAtA^a (1) 

^ViA* (2) :SV1ft*AflI* 

*^mA 'nm* *^c^^a 
* mjA * iv * ns™^ 

*^mA '^A* (3) :^(7!^ 

:ra!j ^l^t ,£ ra,b '^tqf 

* Affl * ttlA * ?^t (4) 

•«»^3Af a^ *AZtr3ta3ti 

•serai) *iffl3 *33t2A 

•?v^t (5) &%*»**. *^/7iat 
*»«fflA *«rabz *^mA 



Pronunciation. 

Dttbp nwi»Bga 
msnflj n^ nnba 

■sg^i i-raa© sin 
^ek by nstDni 

" _ - t : t : 

nnba rrni rainri 
■>bk by ratfna 
nnbj* -rasp trijg 
: irija njni nnD rnn 
rn nnb» ntni 
©nsaiabsbnn^ns 
mro -pa nnba 
pwn :s-DtBn y<M 
un^ rnrwb nnba 
mb^b p^T roi&nbi 

: prin rail 



Note. The first word is hMMBg contracted from tin^^nj? beginning. The 
second is a quadriliteral Oabz &e created, not found in the cognate dialects. 
The rest of these five verses may be said to be almost entirely Chaldee. 

§ 5. For full information respecting the Samaritan dialect and version 
of the Pentateuch, consult 

Io. Morinus, Opuscula Hebreo-Samaritana. 

Walton, Prolegomena to the Polyglott Bible, ch. 11. 

Castell, Heptaglott Lexicon, and Grammar prefixed. 

Chr. Cellarius, Horae Samaritanae, and 

Uhlemann, Institutiones Linguae Samaritanae. 



THE END. 






iSSSSSH- 0F CONGRESS 



027 249 383 9 



We 




'.it' 



■ 



■ 



IS 



fiilll 
SI 

IB - 







HfJ 



1 



3 



